professional development center · project manual volume 1 of 2 fort zumwalt school district 555...

PROJECT MANUAL

Volume 1 of 2

Fort Zumwalt School District

555 East Terra Lane

O’Fallon, Missouri 63366

March 2, 2020

Project Number: 201810.00

Professional Development Center 1138 Tom Ginnever Ave., O’Fallon, MO 63366

611 North 10th Street, Suite 200 Saint Louis, Missouri 63101 T: 314.421.3542

333 Salem Place, Suite 110 Fairview Heights, Illinois 62208 T: 618.624.2080

www.ittnerarchitects.com

FORT ZUMWALT SCHOOL DISTRICT 201810.00 PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT CENTER

SEALS PAGE 000107-1

DOCUMENT 000107 - SEALS PAGE

Fort Zumwalt School District- Professional Development Center

Missouri Certificate of Authority No: 000004

Responsibilities for specifications contained in the Project Manual for the above referenced project are as follows: Division(s) and/or Section(s) Firm Seal

Division 2 to 14, except Division 3 and 5

Wm. B. Ittner, Inc.


SEALS PAGE 000107-2


Missouri Certificate of Authority No: 2004012212


Division 3, 4, and 5

Kreher Engineering, Inc..

3/2/20203/2/2020


SEALS PAGE 000107-3


Missouri Certificate of Authority No: E-2018042187


Seal applies to all Sections in Divisions 21, 22, 26, 27 and 28

ECS Consulting Engineers

3/2/2020

FORT ZUMWALT SCHOOL DISTRICT 201810.00

PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT CENTER

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1

DOCUMENT 000110 – TABLE OF CONTENTS

Division ..... Section Title ................................................................................................................................. Pages

VOLUME 1

000107 ...... SEALS PAGES ............................................................................................................................ 4

000110 ...... TABLE OF CONTENTS .............................................................................................................. 6

DIVISION 00 AND 01 BIDDING AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................... 134

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

033000 ...... CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE .................................................................................................... 16

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY

042000 ...... UNIT MASONRY ......................................................................................................................... 22

DIVISION 05 – METALS

051200 ...... STRUCTURAL STEEL ................................................................................................................ 8

053100 ...... STEEL DECK .............................................................................................................................. 6

054000 ...... COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING ........................................................................................... 8

054400 ...... COLD-FORMED METAL TRUSSES ........................................................................................... 6

055000 ...... METAL FABRICATIONS ............................................................................................................. 10

DIVISION 06 – WOOD AND PLASTICS

061000 ...... ROUGH CARPENTRY ................................................................................................................ 4

061600 ...... SHEATHING ................................................................................................................................ 6

062013 ...... EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY (COMPOSITE DECKING) ................................................... 4

062023 ...... INTERIOR FINISH CARPETRY .................................................................................................. 6

064116 ..... PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS .................................................. 6

066400 ...... PLASTIC PANELING (FRP) ........................................................................................................ 4

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

071416 ...... COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING ............................................................................. 6

071919 ...... SILICONE WATER REPELLENTS ............................................................................................. 6

072100 ...... THERMAL INSULATION ............................................................................................................. 8

072726 ...... FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS ......................................................................... 8

073113 ...... ASPHALT SHINGLES ................................................................................................................. 8

074213.13 . FORMED METAL WALL PANELS AND SOFFITS ..................................................................... 8

074213.14 . METAL VENTED SOFFIT PANELS ............................................................................................ 8

074213.15 . METAL PANEL ROOF SCREENS .............................................................................................. 10

074646 ...... FIBER-CEMENT SIDING ............................................................................................................ 6

075423 ...... THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING.................................................................. 8

076200 ...... SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ...................................................................................... 8

077100 ...... ROOF SPECIALTIES .................................................................................................................. 6

077200 ...... ROOF ACCESSORIES ............................................................................................................... 8




077253 ...... SNOW GUARDS ......................................................................................................................... 4

078413 ...... PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING ............................................................................................... 6

079200 ...... JOINT SEALANTS ...................................................................................................................... 8

DIVISION 08 OPENINGS

081113 ...... HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES ................................................................................. 6

081416 ...... FLUSH WOOD DOORS .............................................................................................................. 6

083113 ...... ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES ............................................................................................... 2

083323 ...... OVERHEAD COILING DOORS .................................................................................................. 10

084113 ...... ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND FRP DOORS ............................. 14

084523 ...... FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH-PANEL SKYLIGHT ASSEMBLIES ................................................. 8

085113 ..... ALUMINUM WINDOWS .............................................................................................................. 8

087100 ...... DOOR HARDWARE .................................................................................................................... 40

088000 ...... GLAZING ..................................................................................................................................... 10

088300 ...... MIRRORS .................................................................................................................................... 6

088853 ...... SECURITY GLAZING .................................................................................................................. 8

DIVISION 09 FINISHES

092216 ...... NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING .................................................................................... 6

092900 ...... GYPSUM BOARD ....................................................................................................................... 8

093000 ...... TILING ......................................................................................................................................... 10

095113 ...... ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS ............................................................................................... 6

096513 ...... RESILENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES ..................................................................................... 4

096519 ...... RESILIENT TILE FLOORING ...................................................................................................... 4

096813 ...... TILE CARPETING ....................................................................................................................... 4

097200 ...... WALL COVERINGS .................................................................................................................... 4

099300 ...... STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING ............................................................................ 4

099600 ...... HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS .......................................................................................... 6

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES

101100 ...... VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES ................................................................................................... 6

101419 ...... DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE ........................................................................................... 6

102113 ...... TOILET COMPARTMENTS ........................................................................................................ 6

102226 ...... OPERABLE PARTITIONS ........................................................................................................... 8

102227 ...... OPERABLE GLASS PARTITIONS ............................................................................................. 6

102600 ...... WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION .............................................................................................. 6

102800 ...... TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES ..................................................................... 4

104413 ...... FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS ............................................................................................. 6

104416 ...... FIRE EXTINGUISHERS .............................................................................................................. 2

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

113100 ...... RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES ..................................................................................................... 2

114000 ...... FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................... 2

115213 ...... PROJECTION SCREENS ........................................................................................................... 4




DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS

122113 ...... SHADES ...................................................................................................................................... 6

123623.13 . PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS ........................................................................... 4

123661.16 . SOLID-SURFACING COUNTERTOPS ....................................................................................... 4

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)




VOLUME 2

000110 ...... TABLE OF CONTENTS .............................................................................................................. 6

DIVISION 21 – FIRE PROTECTION

211313 ...... WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS ........................................................................................... 8

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

220719 ...... PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION .............................................................................................. 6

221116 ...... PLUMBING PIPING ..................................................................................................................... 8

221119 ...... DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES .............................................................................. 4

221319 ...... SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES ............................................................................... 4

224100 ...... PLUMBING FIXTURES ............................................................................................................... 4

DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL

230100 ...... MECHANICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS ................................................................................... 5

230110 ...... GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................. 3

230518 ...... ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING ........................................................................................ 3

230529 ...... HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ..................................... 13

230553 ...... IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ........................................................ 5

230593 ...... TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC ........................................................... 12

230713 ...... DUCT INSULATION .................................................................................................................... 19

230719 ...... HVAC PIPING INSULATION ....................................................................................................... 8

230993 ...... SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS ......................................................... 17

231123 ...... FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING ............................................................................................. 18

232113 ...... HYDRONIC PIPING .................................................................................................................... 15

232123 ...... HYDRONIC PUMPS .................................................................................................................... 5

232300 ...... REFRIGERANT PIPING .............................................................................................................. 8

233113 ...... METAL DUCTS ........................................................................................................................... 11

233300 ...... AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES ......................................................................................................... 12

233423 ...... HVAC POWER VENTILATORS .................................................................................................. 7

233600 ...... AIR TERMINAL UNITS ................................................................................................................ 5

233713 ...... DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES ............................................................................... 4

235216 ...... CONDENSING BOILERS ............................................................................................................ 10

237413 ...... PACKAGED OUTDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS ....................................................................... 12

238233 ...... CONVECTORS .......................................................................................................................... 4

238239 ...... UNIT HEATERS .......................................................................................................................... 9

DIVISIONS 24 THRU 25 (NOT USED)

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

260100 ...... BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................... 10

260519 ...... LOW VOLTAGE ELEC. POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES ............................................. 6

260529 ...... HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ..................................................................................................... 4

260533 ...... RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELEC. SYSTEMS.................................................................... 8

260544 ...... SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLING .......................................... 4

260548 ...... VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ................................. 6

260553 ...... IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ...................................................................... 8




260572 ...... OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY ....................................... 6

260573 ...... OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY ........................................ 8

260574 ...... OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY ............................................... 6

260923 ...... LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES ................................................................................................ 4

262413 ...... SWITCHBOARDS ....................................................................................................................... 8

262416 ...... PANELBOARDS .......................................................................................................................... 8

262726 ...... WIRING DEVICES ...................................................................................................................... 6

265119 ...... LED INTERIOR LIGHTING ......................................................................................................... 6

265219 ...... EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING .......................................................................................... 6

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

270100 ...... BASIC COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................... 12

270526 ...... GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS ........................................ 8

270528 ...... PATHWAYS AND COMM. SYSTEMS ........................................................................................ 10

270553 ...... IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS ............................................................. 4

271000 ...... COMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEMS OVERVIEW ........................................................... 6

271100 ...... COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS ............................................................... 10

271323 ...... COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING ................................................. 8

271513 ...... COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING ......................................................... 6

271543 ...... FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS .......................................................................................... 8

271700 ...... TESTING AND VERIFICATION OF COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS ......................................... 10

274116 ...... AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS ........................................................................................................... 8

279300 ...... SECURITY SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................ 10

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFTEY AND SECURITY

280513 ...... CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY ....................... 6

280528 ...... PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY .................................................... 4

283111 ...... DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM ................................................................... 18

DIVISIONS 29 THRU 30 (NOT USED)

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

311000 ...... SITE CLEARING ...........................................................................SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS

311513 ...... EROSION CONTROL ....................................................................SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS

312000 ...... EARTH MOVING ...........................................................................SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS

313116 ...... TERMITE CONTROL .................................................................................................................. 4

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS .................................................SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS

321313 ...... CONCRETE PAVING .................................................................................................................. 8

321373 ...... CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS .................................................................................. 4

321726 ...... TACTILE WARNING SURFACING ............................................................................................. 4

329200 ...... TURF AND GRASSES ................................................................................................................ 4

329300 ...... PLANTS ....................................................................................................................................... 10

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES ................................................................................SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS

DIVISIONS 34 THRU 49 (RESERVED)




END OF SECTION 000110

TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR DIVISION 0 AND DIVISION 1 Page 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR DIVISION 00 AND DIVISION 01 PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT CENTER

FORT ZUMWALT SCHOOL DISTRICT O’Fallon, Missouri

DIVISION 00 – BIDDING REQUIREMENTS PAGES Table of Contents for Division 00 and Division 01 1 Bid Form 3 Invitation to Bid 2 Instructions to Bidders 2 Bids Requested 1 Federal Work Authorization Program (E-Verify) 2 Owner’s Special Supplementary Instructions 2 1. On-Site Safety Training 2. Drug and Alcohol Testing Program 3. Convicted Sex Offenders 4 Transient Employers 5. Wage and Bid Subsidies Prevailing Wage Rates 1 Prevailing Wage Law Check-Off List 2 Annual Wage Order No. 26 4 General and Supplementary Conditions 3 AIA Form A201-2017 39 Geotechnical Report dated December 2019 50 DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 1000 General and Administrative Requirements 21 1. Summary of the Work 2. Drawings & Specifications 3. Drawing Symbols 4. Definitions 5. Products and Substitutions 6. Submittals 7. Requests for Information (RFI’s) 8. Industry Standards 9. Governing Regulations/Authorities 10. Schedules, Reports and Payments 11. Project Meetings 12. Temporary Facilities and Services 13. Quality Control Services 14. Cutting and Patching 15. Project Closeout 16. Owner’s Stock 17. Allowances 18. Unit Pricing 19. Alternates 20. Guarantees 21. Safety 22. Project Record Documents 23. Claims for Additional Time End of Table of Contents for Division 0 and Division 1

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

BID FORM Page 1

BID FORM

PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT CENTER PHASE 2 & 3 ADDITIONS

Fort Zumwalt School District

Instructions to Bidders: Complete all blank spaces. Bids must be submitted in a sealed, opaque envelope. Bidders must indicate the following information below and in the lower left hand corner of the envelope: CONTRACTOR’S NAME_____________________________________________ BID FOR: PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT CENTER TO: Board of Education Fort Zumwalt School District 555 East Terra Lane O’Fallon, MO 63366 Gentlemen: The undersigned hereby proposes and agrees to furnish all labor, materials, equipment and supervision necessary to complete the PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT CENTER for Fort Zumwalt School District, O’Fallon, Missouri, in strict accordance with the drawings and Project Manual dated March 2, 2020, as prepared by Ittner Architects. Base Bid.....................……………………………………………..$__________________________ ALTERNATE BIDS:

Alternate #1: IT Addition Shell Only Indicate the amount to be ADDED to the Base Bid to construct the exterior shell only for the IT Addition as indicated per the plans and specs…………………………………………………….$__________________________ Alternate #2: IT Addition Interior Finish Indicate the amount to be ADDED to the Base Bid to construct the IT Addition as indicated per the plans and specs……………$__________________________ Alternate #3: Skylights at Meeting Room 112 Indicate the amount to be ADDED to the Base Bid to add four (4) skylights AND skylight shades at the large meeting room as indicated on the plans and specs……………………….$__________________________ Alternate #4: Skylights at Work Room Area 234 Indicate the amount to be ADDED to the Base Bid to add two (2) skylights at the open office area as indicated on the plans and specs……………………………………………………..$__________________________

BID FORM Page 2

• WORKERS (Complete all blank spaces) The undersigned hereby certifies to Fort Zumwalt School District (“Owner”) that _______% of all workmen for the project presently reside in St. Charles County, Missouri and that _______% of all workmen for the project have satisfactorily completed an apprenticeship program developed and operated in accordance with the Policy Recommendations, as that term is defined in the specifications. Inaccurate certifications shall constitute cause for termination of any contract with the Owner and the Owner may then require, whether or not included in the contract, indemnification for any costs incurred by the Owner in connection with the termination. • FEDERAL WORK AUTHORIZATION PROGRAM (E-VERIFY) Bidder certifies that, if awarded a contract in excess of $5,000 for this project and as a condition to the award of any such contract, bidder will be enrolled and participate in a federal work authorization program with respect to the employees working in connection with the contracted services being provided, or to be provided, to the school district (to the extent allowed by E-Verify). Bidder agrees to affirm the same through sworn affidavit and provision of documentation. In addition, bidder agrees to sign an affidavit that it does not knowingly employ any person who is an unauthorized alien in connection with the services being provided, or to be provided, to the school district. • TAXES The undersigned hereby declares that all prices given herein EXCLUDE Missouri Sales and Use Taxes in accordance with the notice of EXEMPTION FROM MISSOURI SALES AND USE TAX, MISSOURI DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE as bound within these specifications.

• BONDS (Cross out highlighted language that does not apply and fill in the blank) Accompanying this bid is a (Bid Bond) (Certified Check) (Cashier’s Check) in the amount of $_________________, payable without condition to the Owner which, because time is of the essence, it is agreed shall be retained as liquidated damages for the delay and extra expense caused the Owner if the undersigned fails to execute the contract and furnish the bonds required by the Contract Documents.

• ADDENDA (Acknowledge below receipt of Addenda issued, if any) ADDENDUM NO. ___________________ DATED _____________________, 2020 ADDENDUM NO. ___________________ DATED _____________________, 2020 ADDENDUM NO. ___________________ DATED _____________________, 2020 ADDENDUM NO. ___________________ DATED _____________________, 2020

DATED THIS ___________________________DAY OF _________________________, 2020. ______________________________________ Name of Bidder ______________________________________ Street Address of Bidder ______________________________________ City, State & Zip Code of Bidder ______________________________________ Printed Name & Title of Authorized Company Officer

BID FORM Page 3

______________________________________ Signature of Authorized Company Officer ______________________________________ Phone Number of Bidder Indicate whether CORPORATION, PARTNERSHIP or SOLE OWNER If Corporation, in what state incorporated?_______________________________ If Partnership, give names of Partners__________________________________ If Sole Owner, give name of firm_______________________________________ End of Bid Form

INVITATION TO BID Page 1

INVITATION TO BID

1. Sealed bids are being solicited for the construction of a new Professional Development Center for Fort Zumwalt School District. In general, the project consists of a new building to be located 1138 Tom Ginnever Avenue, O’Fallon, MO 63366 and will contain about 21,000 sq. ft. and site development to include a large parking lot area. Construction is a single story, slab-on-grade building to include limited kitchen equipment, HVAC, plumbing, fire protection and electrical systems. In addition to the base bid, there are 4 ADD alternate bids, which include ADD alternate options for an additional 3,655 sq. ft.

2. The Owner for this project is: Board of Education Fort Zumwalt School District 555 East Terra Lane O’Fallon, MO. 63366

3. The Architect for this project is: Ittner Architects 611 N. Tenth Street, Suite 200 St. Louis, MO 63101

During the bidding period please direct all questions to:

Rick Keisker at Ittner Architects Office: 314-421-3542, or email: [email protected]

4. Bids must be submitted in strict accordance with the plans and specifications dated February 28, 2020. 5. It shall be the bidder’s responsibility to insure that his bid is received by the Owner NOT LATER THAN

TIME: 3:00 P.M. DATE: Thursday, April 2, 2020 LOCATION: District Administration Office 555 East Terra Lane O’Fallon, MO 63366

6. Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud at the above established time and place. 7. Bids must be accompanied by a Bid Bond, Cashier’s Check, or Certified Check in an amount equal to 10% of the Base Bid amount. 8. The Owner will require One Hundred Percent (100%) Performance and Payment Bonds for any and all contracts. Bonds must include provisions to guarantee the faithful performance of the prevailing hourly wage clause in accordance with the Prevailing Wage Law, Department of Labor and Industrial Relations, Industrial Commission of Missouri. Bidders shall include the cost of all bonds in their total quote. 9. Bidders certify that the bonds being/to be supplied are from a bonding company which the bidder believes to be solvent and that representations made in the bonds are true and correct. 10. No bid may be withdrawn or modified after the time set for the receiving of bids and pending consideration of and action upon same by the Owner. In no event, however, will action upon the bids be deferred beyond 90 days from the date hereinbefore set forth for receiving of same.

mailto:[email protected]

INVITATION TO BID Page 2

11. Pre-Bid Conference is: TIME: 2:00 pm DATE: Thursday, March 12, 2020 LOCATION: District Administration Office 555 East Terra Lane O’Fallon, MO 63366

12. The plans and specifications for this project may be viewed at the following locations: • Fort Zumwalt School District, District Administration Office, 555 East Terra Lane, O’Fallon, MO

63366, (636) 272-6620 • Cross Rhodes Reprographics, 1712 Macklind, St. Louis, MO 63110 (314-421-5141) • Dodge at: www.construction.com

13. Bidding documents may be obtained from either Fort Zumwalt School District or Cross Rhodes Print and Technologies as follows:

• Fort Zumwalt School District: The drawings and Project Manual may be obtained in electronic and printed format from Fort Zumwalt School District, 555 East Terra Lane, O’Fallon, MO 63366 (636-272-6620). Electronic document requests should be directed by email to [email protected], including requester’s contact information, and a link to electronic files will be returned. Printed bid documents are available upon deposit of $200 per set. This deposit will be refunded to bidders submitting a bona fide bid, and upon return of the documents to the school district in good condition within two weeks following the opening of bids, otherwise the deposit shall be forfeited.

• Cross Rhodes Reprographics: The drawings and Project Manual are available from Cross Rhodes Reprographics located at 1712 Macklind, St. Louis, MO 63110, in electronic and/or printed format, however, the cost will be at the contractor’s expense.

14. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any technicalities therein.

BY ORDER OF: Board of Education

Fort Zumwalt School District End of Invitation to Bid

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 1

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

BIDS AND BID SECURITY Bids shall be made out on forms provided. They shall be sealed in an envelope, plainly marked with the name of the Project, and addressed to: Board of Education Fort Zumwalt School District 555 East Terra Lane O’Fallon, Missouri 63366 A bid to be entertained must be properly made out and signed by the bidder and must contain no erasure nor written memorandum qualifying same and must be accompanied by a Bid Bond in the amount of Ten Percent (10%) of the total amount of the Base Bid or in the form of a Cashier’s or Certified Check in a like amount. Said Bid Bond or check shall be made payable to the Treasurer of the Board of Education, Fort Zumwalt School District, O’Fallon, Missouri. The Bid Security will be taken and considered as liquidated damages, not as a penalty, for the failure of a bidder to whom a contract is to be awarded to execute the contract documents and surety bond. The Bid Security of all unsuccessful bidders will be returned approximately two (2) weeks following the award of the contract, excluding the apparent low, second and third low bidders whose bid security will be returned upon execution of the contracts, payment/performance bonds and required insurance certificates by the successful bidder for the faithful performance of the work and upon the receipt of these documents by the Owner in a form acceptable to the Owner. INVESTIGATION Before submitting their proposals, bidders shall carefully examine the drawings and specifications, visit the site(s), and fully inform themselves as to existing conditions and shall include in their bids all items necessary to carry out and complete the work under such conditions and in strict accordance with the drawings and specification. Should a bidder find discrepancies in, or omissions from the drawings or specifications, or should he be in doubt as to their meaning, or to the scope of work involved, he shall at once notify the Architect in writing who will send written instructions to all bidders. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for any oral instructions. Addenda may be issued during the time of bidding which shall be acknowledged in bidder’s proposal and will become a part of the contract. Addenda will be issued to bidders of record, however, neither the Architect nor the Owner assume responsibility for issuing addenda to bidders not of record, or for ensuring that bidders of record have received issued addenda. Bidders are responsible for contacting the Architect or Owner prior to submitting their bids to ensure that they have received any/all addenda issued. No oral, telephonic or telegraphic proposals or modifications of proposals will be considered. APPROVED EQUAL REQUEST SUBMITTAL If the Bidder desires to substitute any material or product as an approved equal, he shall make his request in writing to the Architect for approval and obtain approval at least 10 days prior to the date set for opening of the bids. The request must be accompanied by data substantiating the claim that the material or product is equal to that specified and the Contractor shall include all adjustments as required by such changes. Approval of the Architect shall be by Addendum sent to all bidders. Previous approval by the Architect of materials and products for other projects does not constitute approval for this project. VOLUNTARY ALTERNATE PROPOSAL Materials, systems and products of the Bidder’s choice may be offered as a voluntary alternate to the items named in the specifications. The procedure for submitting a voluntary alternate proposal is as follows:

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 2

A. Bidder must first prepare a Complying Bid using the bid form provided in the Project Manual. Such Complying Bid must be in strict accordance with the requirements of the Drawings and Project Manual, incorporating the materials, systems and products named in the specifications. B. Once the above requirement is satisfied, bidder may then offer a voluntary alternate proposal using materials, systems and products NOT named in the specifications. Such voluntary alternate proposal must be prepared in writing on bidder’s letterhead, and must be attached to and submitted along with the Complying Bid prepared in step “A” above.

C. Each voluntary alternate proposal must be accompanied by full descriptive and technical data for the alternate materials, products or equipment being submitted.

D. Each voluntary alternate proposal must be accompanied by a statement of the cost to be ADDED TO or DEDUCTED FROM the Complying Bid prepared under step “A” above. E. Prior approval by the Architect is not required on items submitted as a voluntary alternate proposal. F. Fort Zumwalt School District reserves the right to accept or reject voluntary alternate proposals. TIME OF COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION Bidders are advised that the work is to commence on or about Monday, May 4, 2020, with substantial completion not later than Friday, May 28, 2021 (13 Months). Liquidated damages will be assessed at the rate of Three Hundred Dollars ($300.00) per calendar day for each day past the date established for substantial completion that substantial completion has not been achieved for each phase, as determined by the Architect. Neither the Architect nor the Owner will be responsible for additional costs claimed due to delays beyond their control. PRE-BID CONFERENCE Pre-Bid Conference will be held at 2:00 pm on Thursday, March 12, 2020 at District Administration Office. TAXES Bidders shall exclude Missouri sales and use taxes upon materials and equipment from their bids. ST. CHARLES COUNTY RESIDENCY AND APPRENTICESHIPS The Owner derives a substantial portion of its funding form St. Charles County, Missouri residents and believes that those residents take special pride in projects they perform for the Owner; such projects enhance the community of St. Charles County, Missouri and provide for the future of St. Charles County children. Consequently, the Owner encourages bidders to employ St. Charles county residents for the Project. All bidders are required to certify in their bids the percentage of their workmen for the project which reside in St. Charles County, Missouri. The Owner seeks to ensure that the highest quality workmanship will be performed on the Project and to do so, encourages bidders to use workmen on the Project who have satisfactorily completed apprenticeship programs developed and operated in accordance with the Policy Recommendation, dated January 28, 1992, of the Federal Committee on Apprenticeship, U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Office of Work-Based Learning, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training (the “Policy Recommendation”). All bidders are required to certify in their bids the percentage of their workmen for the project which have satisfactorily completed such a program for the type of work they will be performing. End of Instructions to Bidders

BIDS REQUESTED Page 1

BIDS REQUESTED Prime contractor, lump sum bids for completing the project in its entirety, are to be submitted directly to the Owner on bid forms provided in the Project Manual. Bidders submitting a bid for this project are entirely responsible for providing all labor, materials, equipment and full-time supervision to properly complete the project, and for scheduling and coordinating the various aspects of the work within the overall project. In general, the project consists of a new building to be located 1138 Tom Ginnever Avenue, O’Fallon, MO 63366 and will contain about 21,000 sq. ft. and site development to include a large parking lot area. Construction is a single story, slab-on-grade building to include limited kitchen equipment, HVAC, plumbing, fire protection and electrical systems. In addition to the base bid, there are 4 ADD alternate bids, which include ADD alternate options for an additional 3,655 sq. ft. There are 5 Alternate bids:

Alternate #1: IT Addition Shell Only Indicate the amount to be ADDED to the Base Bid to construct the exterior shell only for the IT Addition as indicated per the plans and specs.

Alternate #2: IT Addition Interior Finish Indicate the amount to be ADDED to the Base Bid to construct the IT Addition as indicated per the plans and specs. Alternate #3: Skylights at Meeting Room 112 Indicate the amount to be ADDED to the Base Bid to add four (4) skylights AND skylight shades at the large meeting room as indicated on the plans and specs. Alternate #4: Skylights at Work Room Area 234 Indicate the amount to be ADDED to the Base Bid to add two (2) skylights at the open office area as indicated on the plans and specs.

Bidders are to include in their bid a $15,000 Allowance for remediating unsuitable soils may be encountered in areas under the building or parking lot.

End of Bids Requested

FEDERAL WORK AUTHORIZATION PROGRAM Page 1

FEDERAL WORK AUTHORIZATION PROGRAM (“E-VERIFY”) Pursuant to Missouri Revised Statute 285.530, all business entities awarded any contract in excess of five thousand dollars ($5,000) with a Missouri public school district must, as a condition to the award of any such contract, be enrolled and participate in a federal work authorization program with respect to the employees working in connection with the contracted services being provided, or to be provided, to the District (to the extent allowed by E-Verify). In addition, the business entity must affirm the same through sworn affidavit and provision of documentation. In addition, the business entity must sign an affidavit that it does not knowingly employ any person who is an unauthorized alien in connection with the services being provided, or to be provided, to the District. Accordingly, your company: a) agrees to have an authorized person execute the attached “Federal Work Authorization Program Affidavit” attached hereto as Exhibit A and deliver the same to the District prior to or contemporaneously with the execution of its contract with the District; b) affirms it is enrolled in the “E-Verify” (formerly known as “Basic Pilot”) work authorization program of the United States, and are participating in E-Verify with respect to your employees working in connection with the services being provided (to the extent allowed by E- Verify), or to be provided, by your company to the District. (NOTE: Department of Homeland Security offers E-Verify, an electronic program that allows employers to verify that newly hired employees are eligible to work in the US. The service is free, and employers can sign up at https://www.vis-dhs.com/EmployerRegistration/ ) c) affirms that it is not knowingly employing any person who is an unauthorized alien in connection with the services being provided, or to be provided, by your company to the District; d) affirms you will notify the District if you cease participation in E-Verify, or if there is any action, claim or complaint made against you alleging any violation of Missouri Revised Statute 285.530, or any regulations issued thereto;

e) agrees to provide documentation of your participation in E-Verify to the District prior to

or contemporaneously with the execution of its contract with the District (or at any time thereafter upon request by the District), by providing to the District an E-Verify screen print-out (or equivalent documentation) confirming your participation in E-Verify; f) agrees to comply with any state or federal regulations or rules that may be issued subsequent to this addendum that relate to Missouri Revised Statute 285.530; and g) agrees that any failure by your company to abide by the requirements a) through f) above will be considered a material breach of your contract with the District. By:_______________________________________ (signature) Printed Name and Title: ________________________________ For and on behalf of: _________________________________ (company name)

https://www.vis-dhs.com/EmployerRegistration/

FEDERAL WORK AUTHORIZATION PROGRAM Page 2

EXHIBIT A

FEDERAL WORK AUTHORIZATION PROGRAM AFFIDAVIT

I, ________________________, being of legal age and having been duly sworn upon my

oath, state the following facts are true:

1. I am more than twenty-one years of age; and have first-hand knowledge of the

matters set forth herein.

2. I am employed by ____________________________ (hereinafter “Company”)

and have authority to issue this affidavit on its behalf.

3. Company is enrolled in and participating in the United States E-Verify (formerly

known as “Basic Pilot”) federal work authorization program with respect to Company’s

employees working in connection with the services Company is providing to, or will

provide to, the District, to the extent allowed by E-Verify.

4. Company does not knowingly employ any person who is an unauthorized alien in

connection with the services Company is providing to, or will provide to, the District.

FURTHER AFFIANT SAYETH NOT.

By:________________________________ (individual signature)

For ________________________________ (company name)

Title:_______________________________

Subscribed and sworn to before me on this _____ day of ____________________,

200___.

__________________________________

NOTARY PUBLIC

My commission expires:

OWNER’S SPECIAL SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS Page 1

OWNER’S SPECIAL SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS

1. ON-SITE SAFETY TRAINING Current legislation (Missouri Revised Statutes, Chapter 292, Health and Safety of Employees, Section 292.675) requires that any contractor for any public body for purposes of construction of public work, and any subcontractor to such contractor, shall provide a ten-hour Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) construction safety program for their on-site employees, unless such employees have previously completed the required program and have documentation verifying they have done so. The contractor will forfeit a penalty to the contracting public body of $2,500 plus an additional $100 for each employee employed by the contractor or subcontractor, for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such employee is employed without the required training. For more information: http://labor.mo.gov/DLS/workplaceSafety/required_safety_training

2. DRUG AND ALCOHOL TESTING PROGRAM

Missouri law requires that employees of contractors and subcontractors performing public works construction contracts on public schools have to implement a random drug and alcohol testing program to be paid for by the employers (contractors and subcontractors). If an employee tests positive, the employer must notify the school district of any action taken by the employer to protect the safety of students.

3. CONVICTED SEX OFFENDERS

All persons are to comply with the provisions of Missouri Statute 566.149, which stipulate that certain convicted sex offenders are not to be present within five hundred feet of school property. Regardless of the person’s knowledge of his or her proximity to school property or a school-related activity, violation of the provisions of this statute is a class A misdemeanor.

4. TRANSIENT EMPLOYERS

Transient employers (as defined in Missouri Revised Statutes, Section 285.230) must file a financial assurance instrument with the director of revenue and provide proof of compliance to the school district before work begins, or otherwise provide financial security to the school district as required by law. Once work begins, a transient employer must post in a prominent and easily accessible place at the worksite a clearly legible copy of:

• The notice of registration for employer withholding issued to the transient employer by the director of revenue.

• Proof of coverage for workers’ compensation insurance or self-insurance signed by the transient employer and verified by the Department of Revenue through the records of the Division of Workers’ Compensation.

• The notice of registration for unemployment security. Any transient employer failing to comply with these requirements will be liable for a penalty of $500 per day until the notices required by this section are posted as required by statute. Contractors utilizing transient employers as subcontractors are required to ensure that the subcontractors are complying with state statute.

5. WAGE AND BID SUBSIDIES, SUPPLEMENTS, AND REBATES

In accordance with Missouri Revised Statutes, Section 290.095, contractors and subcontractors are required to report to the school district the date and amount of any wage subsidy, bid supplement or rebate for employment on a public works project received within 30 calendar days of receipt of payment. Such subsidies, supplements or rebates are prohibited if they reduce the wage rate below the prevailing wage

OWNER’S SPECIAL SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS Page 2

rate. Contractors and subcontractors who do not comply will owe to the district double the dollar amount per hour that the wage subsidy, bid supplement, or rebate has reduced the wage rate paid by the employer below the prevailing wage rate as provided in Section 290.262 for each hour that work was performed.

PREVAILING WAGE RATES Page 1

PREVAILING WAGE RATES As of August 2018, Prevailing Wage Rate changes have been implemented due to the passing of legislations (HB 1729) passed by the Missouri General Assembly. Due to the passing of this new law, Public works projects for which either the engineer’s estimate or the bid accepted for the total project is in the amount of $75,000 or less are not subject to the prevailing wage law. However, if a public works project becomes subject to a change order that increases the total project cost in excess of $75,000, the provisions of Sections 290.210 to 290.340 shall apply only to that portion of the project that was in excess of $75,000. In the event that prevailing wage rates are in effect, the following will apply: Workmen performing work under this contract shall be paid wages not less than the prevailing hourly rate of wages as determined by the Department of Labor and Industrial Relations of the State of Missouri, pursuant to Section 290.210 to 340 V.A.M.S., or as determined by the Court of Appeal. A copy of the hourly wage rates is provided herein. Under the provisions of this law, the Contractor shall post a clearly legible statement of prevailing hourly wages to be paid to all workmen employed to execute the contract in a prominent and easily accessible place at the site. Notice shall remain posted during the full time that any such workman are employed on the project. Contractors engaged in any construction of public works shall keep full and accurate records clearly indicating names, occupations and craft of every workman employed by them in connection with the work together with an accurate record of the number of hours worked by each workman and the actual wages paid therefore. Payroll records shall be open to inspection by an authorized representative of the contracting public body or of the Department of Labor at any reasonable time and as often as may be necessary to satisfy the Department of Labor. Such records shall not be destroyed or removed from the state for a period of one year following the completion of the public work for which the records are kept. Contractors shall submit monthly certified copies of their payroll records to the contracting public body. The contractor will forfeit a penalty to the school district of one hundred dollars ($100.00) for each workman employed, for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such workman is paid less than the stipulated rates for any work done under the contract by the contractor or by any subcontractor under them. Upon completion of the work and prior to final payment, each contractor shall file with the contracting public body an Affidavit of Compliance stating that he has fully complied with the provisions and requirements of this section. The public body shall not be authorized to make final payment until such affidavits are filed in proper form and order and acceptable. The documents following are included in this Section, and consist of:

• Prevailing Wage Check Off List (2 Pages) • Annual Wage Order

Questions regarding the Prevailing Wage Rates should be addressed to: Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial Relations Division of Labor Standards Prevailing Wage Section P.O. Box 449 Jefferson City, MO 65102-0449 Phone: 573-751-3403 Fax: 573-751-3721 (Revised 12/13/18)

Missouri Division of Labor Standards

WAGE AND HOUR SECTION

MICHAEL L. PARSON, Governor

Annual Wage Order No. 26 Section 092

ST. CHARLES COUNTY

In accordance with Section 290.262 RSMo 2000, within thirty (30) days after a certified copy of this Annual Wage Order has been filed with the Secretary of State as indicated below, any person who may be affected by this Annual Wage Order may object by filing an objection in triplicate with the Labor and Industrial Relations Commission, P.O. Box 599, Jefferson City, MO 65102-0599. Such objections must set forth in writing the specific grounds of objection. Each objection shall certify that a copy has been furnished to the Division of Labor Standards, P.O. Box 449, Jefferson City, MO 65102-0449 pursuant to 8 CSR 20-5.010(1). A certified copy of the Annual Wage Order has been filed with the Secretary of State of Missouri.

Original Signed by Taylor Burks, Director Division of Labor Standards

Filed With Secretary of State: March 8, 2019

Last Date Objections May Be Filed: April 8, 2019

I

Prepared by Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial Relations

Building Construction Rates for REPLACEMENT PAGE Section 092 ST. CHARLES County

OCCUPATIONAL TITLE ** Date of Increase

Basic Hourly Rates

Asbestos Worker $58.41 Boilermaker $26.34* Bricklayer $57.67 Carpenter $55.56 Lather Linoleum Layer Millwright Pile Driver

Cement Mason $51.36 Plasterer

Communications Technician $55.57 Electrician (Inside Wireman) $64.59 Electrician Outside Lineman $63.98 Lineman Operator Lineman - Tree Trimmer Groundman Groundman - Tree Trimmer

Elevator Constructor $26.34* Glazier $60.07 Ironworker $60.81 Laborer $46.68

General Laborer First Semi-Skilled Second Semi-Skilled

Mason $50.01 Marble Mason Marble Finisher Terrazzo Worker Terrazzo Finisher Tile Setter Tile Finisher

Operating Engineer $60.71 Group I Group II Group III Group Ill-A Group IV Group V

Painter $47.83 Plumber $67.90

Pipe Fitter Roofer $50.81 Sheet Metal Worker $66.1 1 Sprinkler Fitter $67.39 Truck Driver $26.34*

Truck Control Service Driver Group I Group II Group III

Group IV

*The Division of Labor Standards received less than 1000 reportable hours as required by RSMo 290.257.4(b). Public works contracting minimum wage is established for this occupational title using data provided by Missouri Economic Research and Information Center, in accordance with RSMo 290.257.2.

**Annual Incremental Increase ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 26 3/29/19

Heavy Construction Rates for ST. CHARLES County

OCCUPATIONAL TITLE ** Date of Increase

Basic Hourly Rates

Carpenter $56.31 Millwright Pile Driver

Electrician (Outside Lineman) $63.98 Lineman Operator Lineman - Tree Trimmer Groundman Groundman - Tree Trimmer

Laborer $47.45 General Laborer Skilled Laborer

Operating Engineer $60.91 Group I Group II Group Ill Group IV

Truck Driver Truck Control Service Driver $39.47 Group I Group II Group III Group IV

Section 092

Use Heavy Construction Rates on Highway and Heavy construction in accordance with the classifications of construction work established in 8 CSR 30-3.040(3).

Use Building Construction Rates on Building construction in accordance with the classifications of construction work established in 8 CSR 30-3.040(2).

If a worker is performing work on a heavy construction project within an occupational title that is not listed on the Heavy Construction Rate Sheet, use the rate for that occupational title as shown on the Building Construction Rate Sheet.

*The Division of Labor Standards received less than 1,000 reportable hours as required by RSMo 290.257.4(b). Public works contracting minimum wage is established for this occupational title using data provided by Missouri Economic Research and Information Center, in accordance with RSMo 290.257.2.

**Annual Incremental Increase ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 26 3/19

OVERTIME and

HOLIDAYS

OVERTIME

For all work performed on a Sunday or a holiday, not less than twice (2x) the prevailing hourly rate of wages for work of a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed or the public works contracting minimum wage, whichever is applicable, shall be paid to all workers employed by or on behalf of any public body engaged in the construction of public works, exclusive of maintenance work.

For all overtime work performed, not less than one and one-half (11,4) the prevailing hourly rate of wages for work of a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed or the public works contracting minimum wage, whichever is applicable, shall be paid to all workers employed by or on behalf of any public body engaged in the construction of public works, exclusive of maintenance work or contractual obligation. For purposes of this subdivision, "overtime work" shall include work that exceeds ten hours in one day and work in excess of forty hours in one calendar week; and

A thirty-minute lunch period on each calendar day shall be allowed for each worker on a public works project, provided that such time shall not be considered as time worked.

HOLIDAYS

January first; The last Monday in May; July fourth; The first Monday in September; November eleventh; The fourth Thursday in November; and December twenty-fifth;

If any holiday falls on a Sunday, the following Monday shall be considered a holiday.

ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 26 3/19

GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Page 1

GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction shall be in accordance with AIA Document A201 – 2007 edition of the American Institute of Architects. Copy attached

2.1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

A. The following Supplementary Conditions change, modify, and take precedence over the AIA General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201 – 2007: 1. Section 3.6 Taxes. All contractors shall exclude Missouri sales and use taxes on materials and equipment required for their work. The school district is tax-exempt, and will provide a Missouri Department of Revenue Project Exemption Certificate, and a copy of the district’s notice of Exemption from Missouri Sales and Use Tax on Purchases and Sales. Contractors shall be responsible for coordinating the delivery of all such materials/equipment thus purchased, and for receiving, handling, properly storing and installing them within the scope of their work for the Project.

2. Section 3.7.1 Construction Permits. The Owner will obtain and pay the cost of the general

building permits for this project issued by City of O’Fallon and O’Fallon Fire Protection. The cost of all other permits and licenses are the responsibility of the contractor.

3. Section 9.10.2. Additional documents to be submitted to the Owner by the Contractor before release of final payment are listed in Section 01 1000 of the Project Manual.

4. Section 11.1 Contractor’s Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall, at its expense, procure and maintain insurance on all of its Operations, in companies acceptable to the Owner as follows a. Workers Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance as required by any applicable law

or regulation and shall be statutory limits. Employers Liability insurance shall be in an amount no less than $1,000,000 each accident for bodily injury, $1,000,000 policy limit for bodily injury by disease and $1,000,000 each employee for bodily injury by disease. If there is an exposure of injury to Contractor’s employees under the U.S. Longshoremen’s and Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act, the Jones Act or under laws, regulations or statutes applicable to maritime employees, coverage shall be included for such injuries or claims.

b. General Liability Insurance Contractor shall carry Commercial General Liability Insurance, Occurrence Form (not Claims-Made), covering all operations by or on behalf of the Contractor, providing insurance for bodily injury liability and property damage liability for the limits of liability indicated below and include coverage for: (i) Premises and Operations (ii) Products and Completed Operations (iii) Contractual Liability. (iv) Personal Injury Liability and Advertising Injury Liability (v) Except with respect to bodily injury and property damage included within the

products and completed operations hazards, the general aggregate limit shall apply separately to the Contractor’s project under this contract.

Limit of Liability The Commercial General Liability policy limits shall not be less than: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence (Combined Single Limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage)


$1,000,000 Aggregate for Products/Completed Operations $1,000,000 Personal Injury/Advertising Injury $2,000,000 General Aggregate (should have endorsement to apply the General Aggregate per project) Additional Insured The Owner, its officers, directors and employees, shall be named as Additional Insureds, using ISO CG 20 10 (current edition) or equivalent under the Commercial General Liability Insurance. NOTE: If Additional Insured status is required during a correction period after completion of the project the ISO CG 20 37 or equivalent shall be provided. This must be stated on the insurance certificate provided to the owner and a copy of the endorsement confirming coverage should accompany the insurance certificate.

Primary Coverage The Contractor’s Commercial General Liability Policy shall apply as primary insurance and any other insurance carried by the Owner, its officers, directors and employees shall be excess only and will not contribute with Contractor’s insurance. This must be stated on the insurance certificate

. c. Automobile Liability Insurance The policy shall provide coverage for all owned, hired and

non-owned vehicles. The limit of liability shall be at least $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage and shall also cover Automobile Contractual Liability. The policy shall name the Owner, its officers, directors and employees, as additional insured. The policy shall be endorsed to be primary coverage and any other insurance carried by the Owner, its officers, directors and employees, shall be excess only and will not contribute with the Contractor’s insurance. To confirm coverage, a copy of the Additional Insured Endorsement and the Primary Insurance Endorsement should accompany the insurance certificate.

d. Waiver of Subrogation The Commercial General Liability and Automobile Liability policies shall each contain a waiver of subrogation in favor of the Owner, its officers, directors and employees. Copies of the waiver of subrogation endorsements must accompany the insurance certificate.

e. Certificates of Insurance As evidence of the insurance, limits and endorsements required, a certificate of insurance shall be furnished by the Contractor to the Owner before any work hereunder is commenced by the Contractor. The Contractor must provide 90 days prior written notice of any pending cancellation to the Owner. In the event that Contractor does not comply with the requirements of this section, the Owner may, at his option, provide insurance coverage to protect the Owner, and charge the Contractor for the cost of that insurance. The required insurance shall be subject to the approval of the Owner, but any acceptance of insurance certificates by the Owner shall in no way limit or relieve the Contractor of the duties and responsibilities by them in this Agreement.

5. Section 11.3 Property Insurance. The Owner is a member of and is insured by Missouri United School Insurance Council (MUSIC). The builders risk insurance coverage being provided by the Owner for this project through MUSIC, does not cover any equipment, tools or machinery owned, leased, borrowed or rented by any contractor, subcontractor or any of their employees. Should they wish to have such insurance coverage, they shall provide it at their cost.

6. Section 11.3.7 Waivers of Subrogation. Delete this Section in its entirety.


7. Section 11.4 Performance Bond and Payment Bond. The contractor shall execute and pay for the

following performance and payment bonds: a. A Performance of Contract Bond, and a Labor and Material Payment Bond with an approved surety company authorized to do business in the State of Missouri as surety thereon and made payable to the Owner in an amount equal to one-hundred percent (100%) of the contract price. Bonds shall include provisions to guarantee faithful adherence to the requirements of the Missouri Prevailing Wage Law for public works projects. b. In providing these bonds, the Contractor certifies that the bonds being supplied are from a bonding company which the Contractor believes to be solvent and that representations made in the bonds are true and correct. d. The cost of the bonds is to be included in the contractor’s bid. 8. Section 13.5.1. Except where indicated as the Contractor’s responsibility, the Owner shall engage the services of and shall bear the costs of on-site quality control testing and inspection services by an independent testing laboratory or entity to include compaction testing, concrete testing, grout testing, rebar and steel testing/inspection and the like. Testing services will be by SCI Engineering, 130 Point West Blvd., St. Charles, MO. 63301.

End of General and Supplementary Conditions

Document A201TM – 2017General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

Init.

/

AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:54:49 ET on 03/02/2020 under Order No.7938747030 which expires on 03/20/2021, and is not for resale.User Notes: (2037871225)

1

ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text.

This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.

For guidance in modifying this document to include supplementary conditions, see AIA Document A503™, Guide for Supplementary Conditions.

for the following PROJECT:(Name and location or address)

Fort Zumwalt R-II School DistrictProfessional Development Center1138 Tom Ginnever Ave.O’Fallon, Missouri 63366

THE OWNER:(Name, legal status and address)

Fort Zumwalt R-II School District555 East Terra Lane O’Fallon, Missouri 63366

THE ARCHITECT:(Name, legal status and address)

Wm. B. Ittner, Inc.611 North 10th Street, Suite 200Saint Louis, Missouri 63101

TABLE OF ARTICLES

1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

2 OWNER

3 CONTRACTOR

4 ARCHITECT

5 SUBCONTRACTORS

6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

7 CHANGES IN THE WORK

8 TIME

9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

11 INSURANCE AND BONDS

12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK

13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

Init.

/


2

14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT

15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES

Init.

/


3

INDEX(Topics and numbers in bold are Section headings.)

Acceptance of Nonconforming Work9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3Acceptance of Work9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3Access to Work3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1Accident Prevention10Acts and Omissions3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5, 10.2.8, 13.3.2, 14.1, 15.1.2, 15.2Addenda1.1.1Additional Costs, Claims for3.7.4, 3.7.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5Additional Inspections and Testing9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.4Additional Time, Claims for3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.6Administration of the Contract3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5Advertisement or Invitation to Bid1.1.1Aesthetic Effect4.2.13Allowances3.8Applications for Payment4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.5.4, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10Approvals2.1.1, 2.3.1, 2.5, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.12.10.1, 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.4.1Arbitration8.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.4 ARCHITECT4Architect, Definition of4.1.1Architect, Extent of Authority2.5, 3.12.7, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.4, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.4, 15.2.1Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6.4, 15.1.4, 15.2Architect’s Additional Services and Expenses2.5, 12.2.1, 13.4.2, 13.4.3, 14.2.4Architect’s Administration of the Contract3.1.3, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5Architect’s Approvals2.5, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 4.2.7

Architect’s Authority to Reject Work3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1Architect’s Copyright1.1.7, 1.5Architect’s Decisions3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.4.2, 15.2Architect’s Inspections3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4Architect’s Instructions3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.4.2Architect’s Interpretations4.2.11, 4.2.12Architect’s Project Representative4.2.10Architect’s Relationship with Contractor1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.3.2, 13.4, 15.2Architect’s Relationship with Subcontractors1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3Architect’s Representations9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1Architect’s Site Visits3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4Asbestos10.3.1Attorneys’ Fees3.18.1, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3Award of Separate Contracts6.1.1, 6.1.2Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work5.2Basic Definitions1.1Bidding Requirements1.1.1Binding Dispute Resolution8.3.1, 9.7, 11.5, 13.1, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.3.3, 15.4.1Bonds, Lien7.3.4.4, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Bonds, Performance, and Payment7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.5(Paragraphs deleted)Building Permit3.7.1Capitalization1.3Certificate of Substantial Completion9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5

Init.

/


4

Certificates for Payment4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.4Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval13.4.4Certificates of Insurance9.10.2Change Orders1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 7.3.10, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.2, 11.5, 12.1.2Change Orders, Definition of7.2.1CHANGES IN THE WORK3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 11.5Claims, Definition of15.1.1Claims, Notice of1.6.2, 15.1.3CLAIMS AND DISPUTES3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims15.4.1Claims for Additional Cost3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 7.3.9, 9.5.2, 10.2.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5Claims for Additional Time3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 9.5.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.6Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for3.7.4Claims for Damages3.2.4, 3.18, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, 11.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7Claims Subject to Arbitration15.4.1Cleaning Up3.15, 6.3Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.2, 15.1.5Commencement of the Work, Definition of8.1.2Communications3.9.1, 4.2.4Completion, Conditions Relating to3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10, 12.2, 14.1.2, 15.1.2COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND9Completion, Substantial3.10.1, 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2Compliance with Laws2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3Concealed or Unknown Conditions3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3

Conditions of the Contract1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4Consent, Written3.4.2, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 13.2, 15.4.4.2Consolidation or Joinder15.4.4CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS1.1.4, 6Construction Change Directive, Definition of7.3.1Construction Change Directives1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3, 9.3.1.1Construction Schedules, Contractor’s3.10, 3.11, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts5.4, 14.2.2.2Continuing Contract Performance15.1.4Contract, Definition of1.1.2CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE5.4.1.1, 5.4.2, 11.5, 14Contract Administration3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of1.5.2, 2.3.6, 5.3Contract Documents, Definition of1.1.1Contract Sum3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.8, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.2, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4, 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.1.2, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5Contract Sum, Definition of9.1Contract Time1.1.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 6.1.5, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.3.6, 7, 7, 7.3.10, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 12.1.2, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.6.1, 15.2.5Contract Time, Definition of8.1.1CONTRACTOR3Contractor, Definition of3.1, 6.1.2Contractor’s Construction and Submittal Schedules3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4.2.3, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2

Init.

/


5

Contractor’s Employees3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1Contractor’s Liability Insurance11.1Contractor’s Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner’s Forces3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.3, 12.2.4Contractor’s Relationship with Subcontractors1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 4.2.4, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4Contractor’s Relationship with the Architect1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1Contractor’s Representations3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2Contractor’s Responsibility for Those Performing the Work3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents3.2Contractor’s Right to Stop the Work9.7Contractor’s Right to Terminate the Contract14.1Contractor’s Submittals3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Contractor’s Superintendent3.9, 10.2.6Contractor’s Supervision and Construction Procedures1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.6, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4Coordination and Correlation1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications1.5, 2.3.6, 3.11Copyrights1.5, 3.17Correction of Work2.5, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, 12.3, 15.1.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents1.2Cost, Definition of7.3.4Costs2.5, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 7.3.3.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, 11.2, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14Cutting and Patching3.14, 6.2.5

Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4Damage to the Work3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4Damages, Claims for3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.3.2, 11.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.7Damages for Delay6.2.3, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2, 14.3.2Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of8.1.2Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of8.1.3Day, Definition of8.1.4Decisions of the Architect3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2Decisions to Withhold Certification9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.3, 9.5.1, 9.5.3, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1Definitions1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1, 15.1.1Delays and Extensions of Time3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5Digital Data Use and Transmission1.7Disputes6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2Documents and Samples at the Site3.11Drawings, Definition of1.1.5Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of3.11Effective Date of Insurance8.2.2Emergencies10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.5Employees, Contractor’s3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1Equipment, Labor, or Materials1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2Execution and Progress of the Work1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.3.4, 2.3.6, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.6, 8.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.1, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.4

Init.

/


6

Extensions of Time3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3, 15.1.6, 15.2.5Failure of Payment9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2Faulty Work(See Defective or Nonconforming Work)Final Completion and Final Payment4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3Financial Arrangements, Owner’s13.2.2, 14.1.1.4GENERAL PROVISIONS1Governing Law13.1Guarantees (See Warranty)Hazardous Materials and Substances10.2.4, 10.3Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers5.2.1Indemnification3.17, 3.18, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3Information and Services Required of the Owner2.1.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10.1, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.6.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4Initial Decision15.2Initial Decision Maker, Definition of1.1.8Initial Decision Maker, Decisions14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5Injury or Damage to Person or Property10.2.8, 10.4Inspections3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.4Instructions to Bidders1.1.1Instructions to the Contractor3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.4.2Instruments of Service, Definition of1.1.7Insurance6.1.1, 7.3.4, 8.2.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.2.5, 11Insurance, Notice of Cancellation or Expiration11.1.4, 11.2.3Insurance, Contractor’s Liability11.1Insurance, Effective Date of8.2.2, 14.4.2Insurance, Owner’s Liability11.2Insurance, Property10.2.5, 11.2, 11.4, 11.5

Insurance, Stored Materials9.3.2INSURANCE AND BONDS11Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy9.9.1Insured loss, Adjustment and Settlement of11.5Intent of the Contract Documents1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13Interest13.5Interpretation1.1.8, 1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1Interpretations, Written4.2.11, 4.2.12Judgment on Final Award15.4.2Labor and Materials, Equipment1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2Labor Disputes8.3.1Laws and Regulations1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4Liens2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8Limitations, Statutes of12.2.5, 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1Limitations of Liability3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.12.10.1, 3.17, 3.18.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.6.8, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, 12.2.5, 13.3.1Limitations of Time2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5Materials, Hazardous10.2.4, 10.3Materials, Labor, Equipment and1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2Mechanic’s Lien2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8Mediation8.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, 15.4.1, 15.4.1.1Minor Changes in the Work1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4

Init.

/


7

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS13Modifications, Definition of1.1.1Modifications to the Contract1.1.1, 1.1.2, 2.5, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7, 10.3.2Mutual Responsibility6.2Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2Notice1.6, 1.6.1, 1.6.2, 2.1.2, 2.5, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 7.4, 8.2.2 9.6.8, 9.7, 9.10.1, 10.2.8, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1, 14.2.2, 14.4.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 15.4.1Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Insurance11.1.4, 11.2.3Notice of Claims1.6.2, 2.1.2, 3.7.4, 9.6.8, 10.2.8, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 15.2.8, 15.3.2, 15.4.1Notice of Testing and Inspections13.4.1, 13.4.2Observations, Contractor’s3.2, 3.7.4Occupancy2.3.1, 9.6.6, 9.8Orders, Written1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.5, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.3.1OWNER2Owner, Definition of2.1.1Owner, Evidence of Financial Arrangements13.2.2, 14.1.1.4Owner, Information and Services Required of the2.1.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4Owner’s Authority1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3.32.4, 2.5, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7Owner’s Insurance11.2Owner’s Relationship with Subcontractors1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work2.5, 14.2.2Owner’s Right to Clean Up6.3

Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts6.1Owner’s Right to Stop the Work2.4Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work14.3Owner’s Right to Terminate the Contract14.2, 14.4Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.2.2, 3.11, 3.17, 4.2.12, 5.3Partial Occupancy or Use9.6.6, 9.9Patching, Cutting and3.14, 6.2.5Patents3.17Payment, Applications for4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.10.1, 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3Payment, Certificates for4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4Payment, Failure of9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2Payment, Final4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3Payment Bond, Performance Bond and7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2Payments, Progress9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION9Payments to Subcontractors5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2PCB10.3.1Performance Bond and Payment Bond7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws2.3.1, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.4.4, 10.2.2PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF10Polychlorinated Biphenyl10.3.1Product Data, Definition of3.12.2Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7Progress and Completion4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.4Progress Payments9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4Project, Definition of1.1.4

Init.

/


8

Project Representatives4.2.10Property Insurance10.2.5, 11.2Proposal Requirements1.1.1PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY10Regulations and Laws1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4Rejection of Work4.2.6, 12.2.1Releases and Waivers of Liens9.3.1, 9.10.2Representations3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1Representatives2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.10, 13.2.1Responsibility for Those Performing the Work3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10Retainage9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3Review of Contractor’s Submittals by Owner and Architect3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor3.12Rights and Remedies1.1.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.4Royalties, Patents and Copyrights3.17Rules and Notices for Arbitration15.4.1Safety of Persons and Property10.2, 10.4Safety Precautions and Programs3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4Samples, Definition of3.12.3Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7Samples at the Site, Documents and3.11Schedule of Values9.2, 9.3.1Schedules, Construction3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2Separate Contracts and Contractors1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 12.1.2

Separate Contractors, Definition of6.1.1Shop Drawings, Definition of3.12.1Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7Site, Use of3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1Site Inspections3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.9.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.4Site Visits, Architect’s3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4Special Inspections and Testing4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.4Specifications, Definition of1.1.6Specifications1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14Statute of Limitations15.1.2, 15.4.1.1Stopping the Work2.4, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1Stored Materials6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4Subcontractor, Definition of5.1.1SUBCONTRACTORS5Subcontractors, Work by1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6.7Subcontractual Relations5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1Submittals3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.4, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Submittal Schedule3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7Subrogation, Waivers of6.1.1, 11.3Substances, Hazardous10.3Substantial Completion4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2Substantial Completion, Definition of9.8.1Substitution of Subcontractors5.2.3, 5.2.4Substitution of Architect2.3.3Substitutions of Materials3.4.2, 3.5, 7.3.8Sub-subcontractor, Definition of5.1.2Subsurface Conditions3.7.4

Init.

/


9

Successors and Assigns13.2Superintendent3.9, 10.2.6Supervision and Construction Procedures1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4Suppliers1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6, 9.10.5, 14.2.1Surety5.4.1.2, 9.6.8, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 14.2.2, 15.2.7Surety, Consent of9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Surveys1.1.7, 2.3.4Suspension by the Owner for Convenience14.3Suspension of the Work3.7.5, 5.4.2, 14.3Suspension or Termination of the Contract5.4.1.1, 14Taxes3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.4.4Termination by the Contractor14.1, 15.1.7Termination by the Owner for Cause5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.7Termination by the Owner for Convenience14.4Termination of the Architect2.3.3Termination of the Contractor Employment14.2.2

TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT14Tests and Inspections3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 12.2.1, 13.4TIME8Time, Delays and Extensions of3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5

Time Limits2.1.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.4Time Limits on Claims3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.1.3Title to Work9.3.2, 9.3.3UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK12Uncovering of Work12.1Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3Unit Prices7.3.3.2, 9.1.2Use of Documents1.1.1, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.12.6, 5.3Use of Site3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1Values, Schedule of9.2, 9.3.1Waiver of Claims by the Architect13.3.2Waiver of Claims by the Contractor9.10.5, 13.3.2, 15.1.7Waiver of Claims by the Owner9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7Waiver of Consequential Damages14.2.4, 15.1.7Waiver of Liens9.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4Waivers of Subrogation6.1.1, 11.3Warranty3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 15.1.2Weather Delays8.3, 15.1.6.2Work, Definition of1.1.3Written Consent1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.10.3, 13.2, 13.3.2, 15.4.4.2Written Interpretations4.2.11, 4.2.12Written Orders1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.4.2, 14.3.1

Init.

/


10

ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS§ 1.1 Basic Definitions§ 1.1.1 The Contract DocumentsThe Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement, and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive, or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor’s bid or proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements.

§ 1.1.2 The ContractThe Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect’s duties.

§ 1.1.3 The WorkThe term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment, and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.

§ 1.1.4 The ProjectThe Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by Separate Contractors.

§ 1.1.5 The DrawingsThe Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams.

§ 1.1.6 The SpecificationsThe Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services.

§ 1.1.7 Instruments of ServiceInstruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials.

§ 1.1.8 Initial Decision MakerThe Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2. The Initial Decision Maker shall not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and shall not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith.

§ 1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents§ 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results.

Init.

/


11

§ 1.2.1.1 The invalidity of any provision of the Contract Documents shall not invalidate the Contract or its remaining provisions. If it is determined that any provision of the Contract Documents violates any law, or is otherwise invalid or unenforceable, then that provision shall be revised to the extent necessary to make that provision legal and enforceable. In such case the Contract Documents shall be construed, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to give effect to the parties’ intentions and purposes in executing the Contract.

§ 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade.

§ 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.

§ 1.3 CapitalizationTerms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles, or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects.

§ 1.4 InterpretationIn the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.

§ 1.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications, and Other Instruments of Service§ 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and retain all common law, statutory, and other reserved rights in their Instruments of Service, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect’s or Architect’s consultants’ reserved rights.

§ 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them, subject to any protocols established pursuant to Sections 1.7 and 1.8, solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to the Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect, and the Architect’s consultants.

§ 1.6 Notice§ 1.6.1 Except as otherwise provided in Section 1.6.2, where the Contract Documents require one party to notify or give notice to the other party, such notice shall be provided in writing to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed and shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person, by mail, by courier, or by electronic transmission if a method for electronic transmission is set forth in the Agreement.

§ 1.6.2 Notice of Claims as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be provided in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly served only if delivered to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed by certified or registered mail, or by courier providing proof of delivery.

§ 1.7 Digital Data Use and TransmissionThe parties shall agree upon protocols governing the transmission and use of Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form.

§ 1.8 Building Information Models Use and Reliance (Deleted)

ARTICLE 2 OWNER§ 2.1 General§ 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express

Init.

/


12

authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner’s approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative.

§ 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor, within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of, or enforce mechanic’s lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner’s interest therein.

§ 2.2 Deleted

(Paragraphs deleted)§ 2.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner§ 2.3.1 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities.

§ 2.3.2 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture, or an entity lawfully practicing architecture, in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.

§ 2.3.3 If the employment of the Architect terminates, the Owner shall employ a successor to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect.

§ 2.3.4 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work.

§ 2.3.5 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner’s control and relevant to the Contractor’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor’s written request for such information or services.

§ 2.3.6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2.

§ 2.4 Owner’s Right to Stop the WorkIf the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3.

§ 2.5 Owner’s Right to Carry Out the WorkIf the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such default or neglect. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect and the Architect may, pursuant to Section 9.5.1, withhold or nullify a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to reimburse the Owner for the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner’s expenses and compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. If current and future payments are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. If the Contractor disagrees with the actions of the

Init.

/


13

Owner or the Architect, or the amounts claimed as costs to the Owner, the Contractor may file a Claim pursuant to Article 15.

ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR§ 3.1 General§ 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative.

§ 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of its obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect’s administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor.

§ 3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor§ 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.4, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor’s review is made in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require.

§ 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall submit Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner, subject to Section 15.1.7, as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities.

§ 3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures§ 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and shall be solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Owner and Architect, and shall propose alternative means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect shall evaluate the proposed

Init.

/


14

alternative solely for conformance with the design intent for the completed construction. Unless the Architect objects to the Contractor’s proposed alternative, the Contractor shall perform the Work using its alternative means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures.

§ 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors.

§ 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.

§ 3.4 Labor and Materials§ 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.

§ 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work approved by the Architect in accordance with Section 3.12.8 or ordered by the Architect in accordance with Section 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive.

§ 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them.

§ 3.5 Warranty§ 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.

§ 3.5.2 All material, equipment, or other special warranties required by the Contract Documents shall be issued in the name of the Owner, or shall be transferable to the Owner, and shall commence in accordance with Section 9.8.4.

§ 3.6 TaxesThe Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect.

§ 3.7 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws§ 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded.

§ 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.

§ 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.

Init.

/


15

§ 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown ConditionsIf the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 14 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend that an equitable adjustment be made in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor, stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Architect’s determination or recommendation, that party may submit a Claim as provided in Article 15.

§ 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15.

§ 3.8 Allowances§ 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection.

§ 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,.1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all

required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;.2 Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and

other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; and

.3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor’s costs under Section 3.8.2.2.

§ 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness.

§ 3.9 Superintendent§ 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.

§ 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may notify the Contractor, stating whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.

§ 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner’s consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed.

§ 3.10 Contractor’s Construction and Submittal Schedules§ 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall submit for the Owner’s and Architect’s information a Contractor’s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall contain detail appropriate for the

Init.

/


16

Project, including (1) the date of commencement of the Work, interim schedule milestone dates, and the date of Substantial Completion; (2) an apportionment of the Work by construction activity; and (3) the time required for completion of each portion of the Work. The schedule shall provide for the orderly progression of the Work to completion and shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents. The schedule shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project.

§ 3.10.2 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, shall submit a submittal schedule for the Architect’s approval. The Architect’s approval shall not be unreasonably delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, or fails to provide submittals in accordance with the approved submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals.

§ 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect.

§ 3.11 Documents and Samples at the SiteThe Contractor shall make available, at the Project site, the Contract Documents, including Change Orders, Construction Change Directives, and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and the approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar required submittals. These shall be in electronic form or paper copy, available to the Architect and Owner, and delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed.

§ 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples§ 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules, and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work.

§ 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.

§ 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship, and establish standards by which the Work will be judged.

§ 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is to demonstrate how the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.

§ 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve, and submit to the Architect, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents, in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of Separate Contractors.

§ 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.

§ 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect.

Init.

/


17

§ 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, unless the Contractor has specifically notified the Architect of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, by the Architect’s approval thereof.

§ 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such notice, the Architect’s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.

§ 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law.

§ 3.12.10.1 If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by an appropriately licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings, and other submittals related to the Work, designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the services, certifications, and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.

§ 3.12.10.2 If the Contract Documents require the Contractor’s design professional to certify that the Work has been performed in accordance with the design criteria, the Contractor shall furnish such certifications to the Architect at the time and in the form specified by the Architect.

§ 3.13 Use of SiteThe Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, lawful orders of public authorities, and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment.

§ 3.14 Cutting and Patching§ 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting, or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting, or patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting, or patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents.

§ 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors by cutting, patching, or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter construction by the Owner or a Separate Contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of the Separate Contractor. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold, from the Owner or a Separate Contractor, its consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.

§ 3.15 Cleaning Up§ 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste

Init.

/


18

materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materials from and about the Project.

§ 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor.

§ 3.16 Access to WorkThe Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect with access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located.

§ 3.17 Royalties, Patents and CopyrightsThe Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for defense or loss when a particular design, process, or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications, or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if an infringement of a copyright or patent is discovered by, or made known to, or should have been know by, the Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for the loss unless the information is promptly furnished to the Architect.

§ 3.18 Indemnification§ 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss, or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18.

§ 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.

ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT§ 4.1 General§ 4.1.1 The Architect is the person or entity retained by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.2 and identified as such in the Agreement.

§ 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities, and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified, or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.

§ 4.2 Administration of the Contract§ 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner’s representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or

Init.

/


19

for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor’s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and promptly report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract Documents, (2) known deviations from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (3) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of, and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of, the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

§ 4.2.4 Communications The Owner and Contractor shall include the Architect in all communications that relate to or affect the Architect’s services or professional responsibilities. The Owner shall promptly notify the Architect of the substance of any direct communications between the Owner and the Contractor otherwise relating to the Project. Communications by and with the Architect’s consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with Separate Contractors shall be through the Owner. The Contract Documents may specify other communication protocols.

§ 4.2.5 Based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.

§ 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.4.2 and 13.4.3, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

§ 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor’s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5, and 3.12. The Architect’s review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component.

§ 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may order minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4.

§ 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner’s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10.

§ 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more Project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site. The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any change in the duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Project representatives.

Init.

/


20

§ 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.

§ 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either, and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith.

§ 4.2.13 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information.

ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS§ 5.1 Definitions§ 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a Separate Contractor or the subcontractors of a Separate Contractor.

§ 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor.

§ 5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work§ 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the persons or entities proposed for each principal portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may notify the Contractor whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.

§ 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection.

§ 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor’s Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required.

§ 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person, or entity for one previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution.

§ 5.3 Subcontractual RelationsBy appropriate written agreement, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor’s Work that the Contractor, by these Contract Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract

Init.

/


21

Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies, and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.

§ 5.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts§ 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that

.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor; and

.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract.

When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor’s rights and obligations under the subcontract.

§ 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor’s compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension.

§ 5.4.3 Upon assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor’s obligations under the subcontract.

ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS§ 6.1 Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts§ 6.1.1 The term "Separate Contractor(s)" shall mean other contractors retained by the Owner under separate agreements. The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, and with Separate Contractors retained under Conditions of the Contract substantially similar to those of this Contract, including those provisions of the Conditions of the Contract related to insurance and waiver of subrogation.

§ 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.

§ 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner’s own forces and of each Separate Contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with any Separate Contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any revisions to its construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner until subsequently revised.

§ 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces or with Separate Contractors, the Owner or its Separate Contractors shall have the same obligations and rights that the Contractor has under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6, and Articles 10, 11, and 12.

§ 6.2 Mutual Responsibility§ 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and Separate Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor’s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.

Init.

/


22

§ 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a Separate Contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that would render it unsuitable for proper execution and results of the Contractor’s Work. Failure of the Contractor to notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects prior to proceeding with the Work shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner’s or Separate Contractor’s completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor’s Work. The Contractor shall not be responsible for discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that are not apparent.

§ 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a Separate Contractor because of the Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a Separate Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction.

§ 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage that the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or Separate Contractor as provided in Section 10.2.5.

§ 6.2.5 The Owner and each Separate Contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14.

§ 6.3 Owner’s Right to Clean UpIf a dispute arises among the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible.

ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK§ 7.1 General§ 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. A Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor. An order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone.

§ 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall proceed promptly with changes in the Work, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or order for a minor change in the Work.

§ 7.1.4 The combined overhead and profit markup shall include all contractor compensation (overhead & profit, general conditions, supervision, estimating, procurement, safety, quality control/assurance, protection, security, temporary utilities/facilities, cleanup, small tools, radios, vehicles, and all home/jobsite office costs and expenses) except for trade labor to perform the Work and materials installed as part of the Work that is retained by the Owner. The combined overhead and profit markup included in the total cost to the Owner for a change in the Work, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, shall be based on the following schedule:

.1 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor’s own forces, 10 percent of the cost.

.2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor’s Subcontractors, 5 percent of the amount due the Subcontractors.

.3 For each Subcontractor involved, for Work performed by that Subcontractor’s own forces, 10 percent of the cost.

.4 For each change in the Work, overhead and profit shall not exceed 15 percent of the total cost for Contractor and Subcontractors combined.

.5 Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with Section 7.3.7.

.6 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner

Init.

/


23

prescribed above. Where major cost items are Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a change involving over $100 be approved without such itemization.

§ 7.2 Change Orders§ 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor, and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following:

.1 The change in the Work;

.2 The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and

.3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.

§ 7.3 Construction Change Directives§ 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions, or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.

§ 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order.

§ 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods:

.1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation;

.2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;

.3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or

.4 As provided in Section 7.3.4.

§ 7.3.4 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.4 shall be limited to the following:

.1 Costs of labor, including applicable payroll taxes, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, workers’ compensation insurance, and other employee costs approved by the Architect;

.2 Costs of materials, supplies, and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed;

.3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others;

.4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use, or similar taxes, directly related to the change for which proof of payments made in the form of receipts shall be required for reimbursement;

.5 Costs of home office personnel directly attributable to the change.

.6 Reference Publications: The latest edition of R. S. Means Company’s publications titled; [1] Means Building Construction Cost Data, [2] Means Site Work Cost Data, [3] Means Mechanical Cost Data, [4] Means Electrical Cost Data, [5] Means Interior Cost Data, [6] Means Concrete Cost Data, or [7] Means Plumbing Cost Data. The R. S. Means Company’s publications for Change Orders shall not be used.

§ 7.3.5 If the Contractor disagrees with the adjustment in the Contract Time, the Contractor may make a Claim in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.

§ 7.3.6 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any,

Init.

/


24

provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.

§ 7.3.7 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order.

§ 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change.

§ 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be reasonably justified. The Architect’s interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15.

§ 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive.

§ 7.4 Minor Changes in the WorkThe Architect may order minor changes in the Work that are consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents and do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time. The Architect’s order for minor changes shall be in writing. If the Contractor believes that the proposed minor change in the Work will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and shall not proceed to implement the change in the Work. If the Contractor performs the Work set forth in the Architect’s order for a minor change without prior notice to the Architect that such change will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor waives any adjustment to the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time.

ARTICLE 8 TIME§ 8.1 Definitions§ 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.

§ 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.

§ 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8.

§ 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined.

§ 8.2 Progress and Completion§ 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work.

§ 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, commence the Work prior to the effective date of insurance required to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner.

§ 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time.

Init.

/


25

§ 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time§ 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by (1) an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, of an employee of either, or of a Separate Contractor; (2) by changes ordered in the Work; (3) by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties, adverse weather conditions documented in accordance with Section 15.1.6.2, or other causes beyond the Contractor’s control; (4) by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and binding dispute resolution; or (5) by other causes that the Contractor asserts, and the Architect determines, justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine.

§ 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.

§ 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION§ 9.1 Contract Sum§ 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.

§ 9.1.2 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed so that application of such unit prices to the actual quantities causes substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.

§ 9.2 Schedule of ValuesWhere the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit a schedule of values to the Architect before the first Application for Payment, allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in the form, and supported by the data to substantiate its accuracy, required by the Architect. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. Any changes to the schedule of values shall be submitted to the Architect and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require, and unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s subsequent Applications for Payment.

§ 9.3 Applications for Payment§ 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. The application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by all data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment that the Owner or Architect require, such as copies of requisitions, and releases and waivers of liens from Subcontractors and suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents.

§ 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders.

§ 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay.

§ 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage, and transportation to the site, for such materials and equipment stored off the site.

Init.

/


26

§ 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information, and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances, in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, or other persons or entities that provided labor, materials, and equipment relating to the Work.

§ 9.4 Certificates for Payment§ 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, either (1) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment in the full amount of the Application for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor; or (2) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect’s reasons for withholding certification in part as provided in Section 9.5.1; or (3) withhold certification of the entire Application for Payment, and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect’s reason for withholding certification in whole as provided in Section 9.5.1.

§ 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect’s evaluation of the Work and the data in the Application for Payment, that, to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information, and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion, and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work; (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures; (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment; or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum.

§ 9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification§ 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of

.1 defective Work not remedied;

.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims, unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;

.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or suppliers for labor, materials or equipment;

.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

.5 damage to the Owner or a Separate Contractor;

.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or

.7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.5.2 When either party disputes the Architect’s decision regarding a Certificate for Payment under Section 9.5.1, in whole or in part, that party may submit a Claim in accordance with Article 15.

§ 9.5.3 When the reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld.

Init.

/


27

§ 9.5.4 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Contractor shall reflect such payment on its next Application for Payment.

§ 9.6 Progress Payments§ 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect.

§ 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner, the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner.

§ 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor.

§ 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors and suppliers to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay, or to see to the payment of money to, a Subcontractor or supplier, except as may otherwise be required by law.

§ 9.6.5 The Contractor’s payments to suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4.

§ 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors or provided by suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust, or entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision.

§ 9.6.8 The Contractor shall defend and indemnify the Owner from all loss, liability, damage or expense, including reasonable attorney’s fees and litigation expenses, arising out of any lien claim or other claim for payment by any Subcontractor or supplier of any tier. Upon receipt of notice of a lien claim or other claim for payment, the Owner shall notify the Contractor. If approved by the applicable court, when required, the Contractor may substitute a surety bond for the property against which the lien or other claim for payment has been asserted.

§ 9.7 Failure of PaymentIf the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents, the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.

Init.

/


28

§ 9.8 Substantial Completion§ 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use.

§ 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect’s inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion.

§ 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion; establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance; and fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion.

§ 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate. Upon such acceptance, and consent of surety if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to the Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.9 Partial Occupancy or Use§ 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect.

§ 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor, and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work.

§ 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment§ 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection. When the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect’s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due

Init.

/


29

and payable. The Architect’s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled.

§ 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment, (5) documentation of any special warranties, such as manufacturers’ warranties or specific Subcontractor warranties, and (6) if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts and releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance. If a lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging the lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance, including all costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees.

§ 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed, corrected, and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of the surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims.

§ 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from.1 liens, Claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents; or.4 audits performed by the Owner, if permitted by the Contract Documents, after final payment.

§ 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a supplier, shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment.

§ 9.11 The Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, shall be liable for and shall pay the Owner the sums hereinafter stipulated as liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, for each calendar day of delay after the date established for Substantial Completion in the Contract Documents until the Work is substantially complete: Three Hundred Dollars ($300.00)

ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY§ 10.1 Safety Precautions and ProgramsThe Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract.

§ 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property§ 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to

.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;

.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody, or control of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a Sub-subcontractor; and

Init.

/


30

.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, and utilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.

§ 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with, and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities, bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury, or loss.

§ 10.2.3 The Contractor shall implement, erect, and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards; promulgating safety regulations; and notifying the owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities of the safeguards.

§ 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment, or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel.

§ 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3. The Contractor may make a Claim for the cost to remedy the damage or loss to the extent such damage or loss is attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18.

§ 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect.

§ 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition.

§ 10.2.8 Injury or Damage to Person or PropertyIf either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, notice of the injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter.

§ 10.3 Hazardous Materials and Substances§ 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials or substances. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and notify the Owner and Architect of the condition.

§ 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of the material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of the material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection.

Init.

/


31

When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable additional costs of shutdown, delay, and start-up.

§ 10.3.3 (Deleted)

§ 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be responsible for hazardous materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of the Contractor’s fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances.

§ 10.3.5 The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner’s fault or negligence.

§ 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred.

§ 10.4 EmergenciesIn an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor’s discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7.

ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS§ 11.1 Contractor’s Insurance and Bonds§ 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Owner, Architect, and Architect’s consultants shall be named as additional insureds under the Contractor’s commercial general liability policy or as otherwise described in the Contract Documents.

§ 11.1.2 The Contractor shall provide surety bonds of the types, for such penal sums, and subject to such terms and conditions as required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.

§ 11.1.3 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished.

§ 11.1.4 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Contractor’s Required Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Contractor becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide notice to the Owner of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration. Upon receipt of notice from the Contractor, the Owner shall, unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Owner, have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by the Contractor. The furnishing of notice by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of any contractual obligation to provide any required coverage.

§ 11.2 Owner’s Insurance§ 11.2.1 The Owner shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Owner shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.

Init.

/


32

§ 11.2.2 Failure to Purchase Required Property Insurance. If the Owner fails to purchase and maintain the required property insurance, with all of the coverages and in the amounts described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner, the Contractor may delay commencement of the Work and may obtain insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-Subcontractors in the Work. When the failure to provide coverage has been cured or resolved, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted. In the event the Owner fails to procure coverage, the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors to the extent the loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance to have been procured by the Owner. The cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by a Change Order. If the Owner does not provide written notice, and the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain the required insurance, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all reasonable costs and damages attributable thereto.

§ 11.2.3 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Owner’s Required Property Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Owner becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any property insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall provide notice to the Contractor of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration. Unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Contractor: (1) the Contractor, upon receipt of notice from the Owner, shall have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by either the Owner or the Contractor; (2) the Contract Time and Contract Sum shall be equitably adjusted; and (3) the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors to the extent any loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance had it not expired or been cancelled. If the Contractor purchases replacement coverage, the cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by an appropriate Change Order. The furnishing of notice by the Owner shall not relieve the Owner of any contractual obligation to provide required insurance.

§ 11.3 Waivers of Subrogation§ 11.3.1 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees, each of the other; (2) the Architect and Architect’s consultants; and (3) Separate Contractors, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees, for damages caused by fire, or other causes of loss, to the extent those losses are covered by property insurance required by the Agreement or other property insurance applicable to the Project, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require similar written waivers in favor of the individuals and entities identified above from the Architect, Architect’s consultants, Separate Contractors, subcontractors, and sub-subcontractors. The policies of insurance purchased and maintained by each person or entity agreeing to waive claims pursuant to this section 11.3.1 shall not prohibit this waiver of subrogation. This waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity (1) even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, (2) even though that person or entity did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, or (3) whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the damaged property.

§ 11.3.2 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, to the extent permissible by such policies, the Owner waives all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.1 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance.

§ 11.4 Loss of Use, Business Interruption, and Delay in Completion InsuranceThe Owner, at the Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain insurance that will protect the Owner against loss of use of the Owner’s property, or the inability to conduct normal operations, due to fire or other causes of loss. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor and Architect for loss of use of the Owner’s property, due to fire or other hazards however caused.

§11.5 Adjustment and Settlement of Insured Loss§ 11.5.1 A loss insured under the property insurance required by the Agreement shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.5.2. The Owner shall pay the Architect and

Init.

/


33

Contractor their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Owner, and by appropriate agreements the Architect and Contractor shall make payments to their consultants and Subcontractors in similar manner.

§ 11.5.2 Prior to settlement of an insured loss, the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the terms of the proposed settlement as well as the proposed allocation of the insurance proceeds. The Contractor shall have 14 days from receipt of notice to object to the proposed settlement or allocation of the proceeds. If the Contractor does not object, the Owner shall settle the loss and the Contractor shall be bound by the settlement and allocation. Upon receipt, the Owner shall deposit the insurance proceeds in a separate account and make the appropriate distributions. Thereafter, if no other agreement is made or the Owner does not terminate the Contract for convenience, the Owner and Contractor shall execute a Change Order for reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work in the amount allocated for that purpose. If the Contractor timely objects to either the terms of the proposed settlement or the allocation of the proceeds, the Owner may proceed to settle the insured loss, and any dispute between the Owner and Contractor arising out of the settlement or allocation of the proceeds shall be resolved pursuant to Article 15. Pending resolution of any dispute, the Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive for the reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work.

ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK§ 12.1 Uncovering of Work§ 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect’s request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect’s examination and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time.

§ 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment to the Contract Sum and Contract Time as may be appropriate. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the costs of uncovering the Work, and the cost of correction, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

§ 12.2 Correction of Work§ 12.2.1 Before Substantial CompletionThe Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, discovered before Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

§ 12.2.2 After Substantial Completion§ 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of notice from the Owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.5.

§ 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work.

§ 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2.

Init.

/


34

§ 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.

§ 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors, whether completed or partially completed, caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor’s liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.

§ 12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming WorkIf the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.

ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS§ 13.1 Governing LawThe Contract shall be governed by the law of the state of Missouri, excluding that jurisdiction’s choice of law rules.

§ 13.2 Successors and Assigns§ 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract.

§ 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate the assignment.

§ 13.3 Rights and Remedies§ 13.3.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.

§ 13.3.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect, or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed upon in writing.

§ 13.4 Tests and Inspections§ 13.4.1 Tests, inspections, and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections, and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections, and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections, or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. The Owner shall directly arrange and pay for tests, inspections, or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations so require.

§ 13.4.2 If the Architect, Owner, or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection, or approval not included under Section 13.4.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection, or

Init.

/


35

approval, by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section 13.4.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense.

§ 13.4.3 If procedures for testing, inspection, or approval under Sections 13.4.1 and 13.4.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure, including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

§ 13.4.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection, or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.

§ 13.4.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections, or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing.

§ 13.4.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work.

§ 13.5 InterestPayments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate the parties agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located.

ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT§ 14.1 Termination by the Contractor§ 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, for any of the following reasons:

.1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped;

.2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, that requires all Work to be stopped;

.3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or

(Paragraph deleted)§ 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, repeated suspensions, delays, or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3, constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less.

§ 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days’ notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination.

§ 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3.

§ 14.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause§ 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor

.1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;

.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors or suppliers in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors or suppliers;

Init.

/


36

.3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or

.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.

§ 14.2.2 When any of the reasons described in Section 14.2.1 exist, and upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, seven days’ notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:

.1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;

.2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and

.3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work.

§ 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.

§ 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract.

§ 14.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience§ 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work, in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.

§ 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay, or interruption under Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent

.1 that performance is, was, or would have been, so suspended, delayed, or interrupted, by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or

.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.

§ 14.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience§ 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner’s convenience and without cause.

§ 14.4.2 Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;.2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work;

and.3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice,

terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders.

§ 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Owner shall pay the Contractor for Work properly executed; costs incurred by reason of the termination, including costs attributable to termination of Subcontracts.

ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES§ 15.1 Claims § 15.1.1 DefinitionA Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, a change in the Contract Time, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility

Init.

/


37

to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. This Section 15.1.1 does not require the Owner to file a Claim in order to impose liquidated damages in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 15.1.2 Time Limits on ClaimsThe Owner and Contractor shall commence all Claims and causes of action against the other and arising out of or related to the Contract, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, in accordance with the requirements of the binding dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement and within the period specified by applicable law. The Owner and Contractor waive all Claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 15.1.2.

§ 15.1.3 Notice of Claims§ 15.1.3.1 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered prior to expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party under this Section 15.1.3.1 shall be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later.

§ 15.1.3.2 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the other party. In such event, no decision by the Initial Decision Maker is required.

§ 15.1.4 Continuing Contract Performance§ 15.1.4.1 Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 15.1.4.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted in accordance with the Initial Decision Maker’s decision, subject to the right of either party to proceed in accordance with this Article 15. The Architect will issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decision of the Initial Decision Maker.

§ 15.1.5 Claims for Additional CostIf the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given before proceeding to execute the portion of the Work that is the subject of the Claim. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4.

§ 15.1.6 Claims for Additional Time§ 15.1.6.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given. The Contractor’s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary.

§ 15.1.6.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated, and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction.

.1 The Contractor shall notify the Owner and Architect by phone, fax or email on or before the day of the adverse weather condition;

.2 the notification identifies the time critical trades which will be delayed by the adverse weather condition;

.3 the Contractor demonstrates the schedule impact of the weather day;

.4 the Contractor submits documentation of the adverse weather condition based on National Weather Service (NOAA) reports,

.5 the adverse weather condition prevents the Contractor from working on the Project more than six (6) hours of the work day in question; and

.6 the Contractor demonstrates that lost time cannot be recovered by adding additional manpower in the affected trades or other trades during standard pay rate work periods, or that additional manpower is not available when needed.

Init.

/


38

§ 15.1.6.3 The following chart of average monthly lost work days due to adverse weather are to be incorporated into the construction schedule and shall be the basis for determination of the number of lost work days due to adverse weather conditions. The granting of weather days on Saturdays or Sundays shall only occur if the Saturday or Sunday work was planned and pre-approved by the Owner. The total tabulation shall include the monthly gains as well as the monthly losses when considering a claim for an increase in the Contract Time.

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec

9 6 8 6 7 7 6 5 6 7 8 8

§ 15.1.6.4 Claims for increase in the Contract Time shall set forth in detail the circumstances that form the basis for the Claim, the date upon which each cause of delay began to affect the progress of the Work, the date upon which each cause of delay ceased to affect the progress of the Work and the number of days’ increase in the Contract Time claimed as a consequence of each such cause of delay. The Contractor shall provide such supporting documentation as the Owner may require including, where appropriate, a revised construction schedule indicating all the activitiesaffected by the circumstances forming the basis of the Claim.

§ 15.1.6.5 The Contractor shall not be entitled to a separate increase in the Contract Time for each one of the number of causes of delay which may have concurrent or interrelated effects on the progress of the Work, or for concurrent delays due to the fault of the Contractor.

§ 15.1.7 Waiver of Claims for Consequential DamagesThe Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes

.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and

.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit, except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.

This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.7 shall be deemed to preclude assessment of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 15.2 Initial Decision§ 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2 or arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, and 11.5, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim. If an initial decision has not been rendered within 30 days after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker, the party asserting the Claim may demand mediation and binding dispute resolution without a decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner.

§ 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the Initial Decision Maker’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim.

§ 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision

Init.

/


39

Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner’s expense.

§ 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of the request, and shall either (1) provide a response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished, or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part.

§ 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding dispute resolution.

§ 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1.

§ 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within 30 days from the date of receipt of an initial decision, demand in writing that the other party file for mediation. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within 30 days after receipt thereof, then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision.

§ 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor’s default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy.

§ 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines.

§ 15.3 Mediation§ 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract, except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.7, shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution.

§ 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2, the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings.

§ 15.3.3 Either party may, within 30 days from the date that mediation has been concluded without resolution of the dispute or 60 days after mediation has been demanded without resolution of the dispute, demand in writing that the other party file for binding dispute resolution. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for binding dispute resolution within 60 days after receipt thereof, then both parties waive their rights to binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision.

§ 15.3.4 The parties shall share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

SCI ENGINEERING, INC. EARTH • SCIENCE • SOLUTIONS

GEOTECHNICAL ENVIRONMENTAL

NATURAL RESOURCES CULTURAL RESOURCES

CONSTRUCTION SERVICES

130 Point West Boulevard, St. Charles, Missouri 63301 ■ 636-949-8200 www.sciengineering.com

December 4, 2019 Ms. Lisa Koester Fort Zumwalt School District 555 E. Terra Lane O’Fallon, Missouri 63366 RE: Proposal for a Geotechnical Exploration 1138 Tom Ginnever Avenue O’Fallon, Missouri SCI No. 2018-0583.10, Task 100 Ms. Koester: Attached is our Geotechnical Report, dated December 2019. It should be read in its entirety, and our recommendations applied to the design and construction of the project. Selected excerpts from the report are highlighted below:

• Existing fill was encountered in B-2 to a depth of 7.5 feet. We anticipate that the fill encountered on site is associated with filling the former drainageway prior to 2003. We anticipate that the fill will only impact the northeast corner of the proposed structure and portions of the eastern parking lot. The risk associated with the existing fill and recommendations for remediation are further discussed in the report.

• Groundwater may be encountered during wetter times of the year near the foundation bearing

elevation near the center of the building and in cut areas in the western half of the building. Groundwater may also be encountered in deeper utility excavations. The siltier soils can become unstable with the presence of groundwater. As such, care should be taken to minimize disturbance of these soils. Additional recommendations are provided in the report.

• Shallow spread footing foundations bearing on native lean clay, newly placed, low plastic structural

fill, or existing fill approved by SCI (if that option is chosen by the owner) are appropriate for support of the proposed building. Shallow foundations can be sized for maximum net allowable bearing pressures of 2,000 pounds per square foot (psf) for continuous wall footings and 2,400 psf for isolated column footings.

• We anticipate that some localized areas of inadequate bearing materials may be encountered during

construction like those observed in B-3 near the foundation bearing elevation. These areas may consist of, but are not limited to, isolated areas of soft soils or areas of unsuitable fill. Therefore, we recommend that an allowance be made in the construction budget for overexcavation and widening of select footings. If encountered, inadequate bearing materials should be undercut and replaced with engineered fill in accordance with in Sections 5.1 and 5.2.

Ms. Lisa Koester 2 December 4, 2019 Fort Zumwalt School District SCI No. 2018-0583.10

• The site is classified as Site Class C with the following seismic design parameters: Fa = 1.20, Fv = 1.66, SDS = 0.32, and SD1 = 0.14, indicating that a Seismic Design Category C may be used for a site with an Occupancy Category of I, II, or III.

We appreciate the opportunity to be of service and look forward to working with you during the construction phase of the project. If you have any questions or comments, please do not hesitate to contact me. I can be reached at 618-206-3008 or [email protected]. Respectfully, SCI ENGINEERING, INC. Elizabeth R. Alt, E.I. Staff Engineer Julie A. Miller, P.E. Senior Engineer ERA/JAM/hmm Enclosures Geotechnical Report \\scieng\shared\StCharles\shared\1soils\1NEW\PROJECT FILES\2018 PROJECTS\2018-0583 1138 Tom Ginnever Avenue\GS\10\Report\1138 Tom Ginnever Avenue- GS Report.docx

mailto:[email protected]

December 2019 SCI No. 2018-0583.10

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................... 1

2.0 SITE AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 1

3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS .................................................................................................... 2 3.1 Existing Fill......................................................................................................................... 2 3.2 Native Soil Profile .............................................................................................................. 2 3.3 Bedrock Geology ................................................................................................................ 3 3.4 Groundwater ....................................................................................................................... 3

4.0 DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS .............................................................................................. 3 4.1 Existing Fill......................................................................................................................... 3 4.2 Groundwater ....................................................................................................................... 4 4.3 Shallow Foundations ........................................................................................................... 4 4.4 Seismic Considerations ....................................................................................................... 5

4.4.1 Design Earthquake ................................................................................................ 5 4.4.2 International Building Code Site Classification .................................................... 5 4.4.3 Liquefaction Potential Analysis ............................................................................. 6

4.5 Floor Slab ............................................................................................................................ 6 4.6 Below-Grade Walls ............................................................................................................. 7 4.7 Site Grading and Drainage .................................................................................................. 9 4.8 Underground Utilities ....................................................................................................... 10 4.9 Pavements ......................................................................................................................... 10

5.0 SITE DEVELOPMENT AND CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS .............................. 11 5.1 Site Preparation ................................................................................................................. 11 5.2 Fill Materials and Compaction.......................................................................................... 12 5.3 Shallow Foundation Excavations ...................................................................................... 13 5.4 Subgrade Considerations .................................................................................................. 14 5.5 Excavation Bracing Requirements .................................................................................... 14 5.6 Erosion Control and Land Disturbance Monitoring Program ........................................... 15

6.0 CONSTRUCTION MONITORING PROGRAM .................................................................... 15

7.0 LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................................................ 16

TABLES Table 4.1 - Recommended Lateral Earth Pressures ...................................................................................... 8 Table 5.1 - Typical Compaction Requirements for Fill .............................................................................. 12

FIGURES Figure 1 - Vicinity and Topographic Map Figure 2 - Aerial Photograph Figure 3 - Historic Aerial Photograph Figure 4 - Site Plan

December 2019 ii SCI No. 2018-0583.10

APPENDICES Appendix A - CPT Log Legend and Nomenclature, CPT Logs Appendix B - Boring Log Legend and Nomenclature, Boring Logs Appendix C - Shear Wave Velocity Profiles

Geotechnical Report

1138 TOM GINNEVER AVENUE O’FALLON, MISSOURI

1.0 INTRODUCTION

At the request of Ms. Lisa Koester, of Fort Zumwalt School District, SCI Engineering, Inc. (SCI)

conducted a geotechnical exploration for the proposed building. The purpose of our exploration was to

characterize and evaluate the subsurface conditions, provide recommendations for foundations,

and address other geotechnical aspects. Our services were provided in general accordance with our

proposal, dated October 18, 2019, and accepted by Dr. Bernard Dubray of Fort Zumwalt School District

on October 28, 2019.

2.0 SITE AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION

SCI understands that a professional development center is currently being planned for a site located at

1138 Tom Ginnever Avenue in O’Fallon Missouri. The location of the site is shown on the Vicinity and

Topographic Map, Figure 1. The site is currently grass-covered and gently slopes towards the center of the

site. The property is still used as an agricultural field, occasionally planted with beans. The existing site

conditions are shown on the Aerial Photograph, Figure 2.

SCI previously completed a Phase One Environmental Site Assessment (Phase One) for the proposed site

in August 2018. Based on our review of the Phase One and Google Earth historic aerials, prior to 2003,

two sections of a drainageway intersected near the center of the site. Since that time, portions of the

drainageway have been filled in. The location of the former drainageway with respect to the proposed

development is shown on the Historic Aerial Photograph, Figure 3.

Based on the site plan provided, the building will be a single-story, slab-on-grade structure, with a footprint

of approximately 23,574 square feet. Paved parking will be located east and west of the proposed building,

with paved driveways surrounding the building. Additionally, water quality basins are proposed west of

the building and on either side of the western parking lot. We understand that a future addition is planned

west of the new building and may include a basement, but this portion has not been included in the current

scope of work. The proposed construction is shown on the Site Plan, Figure 4.

SCI Engineering, Inc. 1138 Tom Ginnever Avenue Fort Zumwalt School District SCI No. 2018-0583.10

December 2019 Page 2 of 16

Preliminary grading plans were provided by Bax Engineering Company on October 16, 2019. Based on

our review of these plans, we anticipate up to 4.5 feet of cut and up to 3 feet of fill in the building area and

cuts and fills of less than 5 feet for the remainder of the site. SCI should be provided with final

development and grading plans, once available, to review our recommendations and provide

additional consultation.

Structural loads were not available at the time of this report; however, we anticipate that the building will

be lightly-loaded, with column loads of less than 100 kips and wall loads of less than 4 kips per lineal foot.

3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

Eight Piezocone Penetration Test (CPTu) soundings (B-1 through B-8) were advanced at the approximate

locations shown on the Site Plan. Direct push borings were performed to a depth of 4 feet adjacent to

B-1, B-3, B-6, and B-7 and to a depth of 8 feet adjacent to B-2 and B-5. The test locations were staked in

the field by SCI personnel utilizing a global positioning system. Ground surface elevations at the sounding

and boring locations were interpolated from available light detection and ranging (LiDAR) data and should

be considered approximate. Detailed information regarding the nature and thickness of the soils

encountered, and the results of the field sampling and laboratory testing are shown on the CPT Logs

(Appendix A) and Boring Logs (Appendix B).

3.1 Existing Fill

Interpretations of CPT data, in addition to the soils encountered in the direct push borings, indicate that

existing fill was encountered in B-2 to a depth of 7.5 feet or approximate elevation (El) 476.5. The existing

fill primarily consisted of medium stiff to stiff lean clay with trace amounts of sand. Moisture contents in

the ranged from 17 to 24 percent. We anticipate this fill is associated with filling the former drainageway

on site, prior to 2003; however, documentation regarding the placement and compaction of the fill was not

available at this time of the report.

3.2 Native Soil Profile

The native soils consisted of lean clay with varying amounts of sand (CL in accordance with the

Unified Soil Classification System and ASTM D 2488-06) with the potential of interbedded fat clay (CH).

The native soils extended to the sounding termination at depths of 10 to 20 feet. The native clay soils were

generally medium stiff in consistency with softer zones around 2 to 3.5 feet in B-3 and 4 to 5.5 feet in B-5.



Moisture contents in the native soils collected from the direct push borings ranged from 17 to 29 percent.

Atterberg limits tests were completed on samples from 2 to 4 feet in B-1 and B-5, yielded a liquid limit

(LL) of 35 and a plasticity index (PI) of 13 for both samples.

3.3 Bedrock Geology

Documented geology, including the Bedrock Geologic Map of the St. Louis Quadrangle, Missouri and

Illinois, indicates that bedrock at the site consists of the Warsaw Formation. The Warsaw Formation is

typically dark, fissile shale or dolomitic limestone in the upper-half and shaley, cherty dolomitic limestone

in the lower-half. Based on the shear wave velocities collected from the ReMI survey, it appears that shale

bedrock and/or weathered shale were encountered at depth of approximately 35 feet followed by possible

limestone bedrock beyond a depth of 50 feet.

3.4 Groundwater

Interpretations of CPT data indicate groundwater could be present as shallow as 4 to 7.5 feet across the site

These measurements likely represent perched water trapped within a clay layer and not the actual

groundwater depths. The groundwater level depends on seasonal and climatic variations and may be

present at different depths in the future. In addition, without extended periods of observation, accurate

groundwater level measurements may not be possible, particularly in low permeability soils.

4.0 DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS

4.1 Existing Fill

We anticipate that the fill encountered on site is associated with filling the former drainageway prior to

2003. As shown on the Historic Aerial Photograph, we anticipate that the fill will only impact the northeast

corner of the proposed structure and portions of the eastern parking lot. The subsurface data suggests that

the fill may have been placed in a controlled manner based on the CPT’s correlated N60 values, the hand

penetrometer readings in the direct push borings, and the moisture contents. As such, there is a low to

moderate risk of settlement of the fill if the foundations and floor slab are supported on the fill. The area

where the fill is anticipated in the building area is a proposed fill area where 6 inches to 2.5 feet of fill are

planned.

If the owner does not want to assume the risk of leaving the fill in place beneath the building, we would

recommend removing the fill in its entirety to nature soils. The overexcavation should extend 5 feet beyond

the edge of the building’s foundations to facilitate compaction. It appears that most, if not all of the fill that



is being removed can be reused as fill provided there are no fat clays present in the upper 5 feet and that

there are no deleterious materials (organics, construction debris, etc.) present. Again, with this option,

this risk of leaving the existing fill in place would be removed.

If the owner chooses to accept the risk of leaving the fill in place, we would recommend at a minimum that

SCI be on site during construction to observe a proofroll of these soils as discussed in Section 5 and to

observe the bearing materials for the foundations. If unsuitable fill is observed, it should be removed and

replaced with crushed rock or flowable fill if encountered in the footings.

The fill in the parking lot can remain in place if properly proofrolled prior to the placement of new fill.

Any unsuitable soils should be removed and replaced with crushed rock.

4.2 Groundwater

Groundwater may be encountered during wetter times of the year near the foundation bearing elevation

near the center of the building and in cut areas in the western half of the building. Groundwater may also

be encountered in deeper utility excavations. The siltier soils can become unstable with the presence of

groundwater. As such, care should be taken to minimize disturbance of these soils. A mud mat can be used

as the base of excavations, if necessary, to minimize disturbance of these soils. Disturbed soils should be

removed and replaced with crushed rock. Sumps and pumps should remove accumulated groundwater in

the excavations. Low ground pressure equipment and/or trackhoes may also be required when the

excavation extends to within 2 feet above the groundwater table. In periods of dry weather (typically

summer and fall), the groundwater level could drop and provide better excavating conditions.

4.3 Shallow Foundations

Shallow spread footing foundations bearing on native lean clay, newly placed, low plastic structural fill,

or existing fill approved by SCI (if that option is chosen by the owner) are appropriate for support of the

proposed building. Shallow foundations can be sized for maximum net allowable bearing pressures of

2,000 pounds per square foot (psf) for continuous wall footings and 2,400 psf for isolated column footings.

We anticipate that some localized areas of inadequate bearing materials may be encountered during

construction like those observed in B-3 near the foundation bearing elevation. These areas may consist of,

but are not limited to, isolated areas of soft soils or areas of unsuitable fill. Therefore, we recommend that

an allowance be made in the construction budget for overexcavation and widening of select footings.



If encountered, inadequate bearing materials should be undercut and replaced with engineered fill in

accordance with in Sections 5.1 and 5.2.

Exterior footings and foundations in unheated areas of the building should be provided with at least

30 inches of soil cover for frost protection. Interior footings in heated areas can be located at nominal

depths below the finished floor. For footings designed and constructed in accordance with our

recommendations, total settlement should be less than 1-inch, and differential settlement between adjacent

footings should be less than ¾-inch.

4.4 Seismic Considerations

Ground shaking at the foundation of structures and liquefaction of the soil under the foundations are the

principle seismic hazards to be considered in design of earthquake-resistant structures. Liquefaction occurs

when a rapid buildup in water pressure, caused by the ground motion, pushes sand particles apart, resulting

in a loss of strength and later densification as the water pressure dissipates. This loss of strength can cause

bearing capacity failure while the densification can cause excessive settlement. Potential earthquake

damage can be mitigated by structural and/or geotechnical measures or procedures common to earthquake

resistant design.

4.4.1 Design Earthquake

According to the International Building Code (2015 edition) (IBC 2015), structures such as those proposed

for this project are required to be designed to a design earthquake with a 2 percent Probability of Exceedance

over a 50-year exposure period (i.e. a 2,475-year design earthquake). The design earthquake has a

Moment Magnitude (Mw) of 7.7 and a Peak Ground Acceleration of 0.17g, as determined from data

provided by the IBC 2015 and the United States Geological Survey National Seismic Hazard Mapping

Project.

4.4.2 International Building Code Site Classification

Refraction Micro-tremor data was acquired along Traverses T-1 and T-2 to measure the shear wave velocity

in the subsurface soils, with respect to depth, at the location shown on the Site Plan. The interpreted profile

of shear wave velocity with respect to depth is contained in Appendix C. Our analysis indicates that the

weighted average shear wave velocity in the upper 100 feet of the subsurface profile at the subject site is

approximately 1,379 feet per second (ft/sec) and 1359 ft/sec for T-1 and T-2, respectively, indicating a



Site Class C. Seismic design parameters for the site are as follows: Fa = 1.20, Fv = 1.66, SDS = 0.32,

and SD1 = 0.14, indicating that a Seismic Design Category C may be used for a site with an Occupancy

Category of I, II, or III.

4.4.3 Liquefaction Potential Analysis

The liquefaction potential analysis for the site was conducted using data from the field exploration and

laboratory test results and the techniques outlined in the National Center for Earthquake Engineering

(NCEER) Technical Report NCEER-97-0022. Based on our analyses, the soils at the project site have

sufficient strength values to resist liquefaction and/or a PI that make the threat of liquefaction minimal

during the design earthquake. While the amount of the seismically induced settlement is dependent on the

magnitude and distance from the seismic event, some vertical and horizontal movement may be experienced

during a major earthquake event, particularly if the earthquake occurs during a period of elevated

groundwater, even with proper seismic design.

4.5 Floor Slab

The following recommendations assume a floor slab load of 150 psf or less. If sections of the floor slab

will support loads greater than the assumed floor slab loads, underlying subgrade soils below these sections

may need to be removed and replaced with compacted/engineered fill. SCI recommends that if the proposed

building will include heavily-loaded floor slab sections, SCI should be provided the opportunity to review

the final design plans and specifications to determine if the underlying subsurface soils can adequately

support the loads. Proofrolling, as discussed in Section 5.1, should be accomplished to identify soft or

unstable soils that should be removed from the floor slab area prior to fill placement and/or floor slab

construction.

We recommend that the floor slab be designed using a modulus of subgrade reaction (k) of 150 pounds per

square inch per inch of deflection (pci) if bearing on native lean clay or newly placed low plastic structural

fill; or 100 pci if bearing on the existing fill. The floor slab should be supported on a minimum

4-inch-thick layer of crushed stone. This will help to distribute concentrated loads and equalize moisture

conditions beneath the slab.

It is generally preferable to maintain structural separation between the floor slab and the foundation walls

and column pads using isolation joints. We also suggest that joints be placed in the floor slab on no more

than 15-foot intervals in any direction. Such joints permit slight movements of the independent elements



and help reduce random cracking that might otherwise be caused by restraint of shrinkage, slight rotations,

heave, or settlement. Where occupied space or moisture sensitive floor coverings are planned, we recommend

a 6-mil-thick polyethylene sheeting be placed immediately beneath the floor slab and above the crushed

rock or gravel to reduce the transfer of capillary moisture to the slab. However, without careful attention

to curing of the floor slab, the polyethylene sheeting can cause excessive shrinkage cracking and "curling."

The precautions listed below should be followed for construction of slab-on-grade pads. These details will

not reduce the amount of movement, but are intended to reduce potential damage, should some settlement

of the supporting subgrade take place. Some increase in moisture content is inevitable as a result of

development and associated landscaping. However, extreme moisture content increases can be largely

controlled by proper and responsible site drainage, building maintenance and irrigation practices.

• Cracking of slab-on-grade concrete is normal and should be expected. Cracking can occur not only as a result of heaving of the supporting soil, but also as a result of concrete curing stresses. The occurrence of concrete shrinkage cracking, and problems associated with concrete curing may be reduced and/or controlled by limiting the slump of the concrete, proper concrete placement, finishing, curing, and by the placement of crack control joints at frequent intervals, particularly where re-entrant slab corners occur. The American Concrete Institute recommends a maximum panel size (in feet) equal to approximately three times the thickness of the slab (in inches) in both directions. For example, joints are recommended at a maximum spacing of 12 feet based on having a 4-inch slab. SCI also recommends that the slab be independent of the foundation walls.

• Areas supporting slabs should be properly moisture conditioned and compacted. Backfill in all interior and exterior water and sewer line trenches should be carefully compacted to reduce the shear stress in the concrete extending over these areas.

Exterior slabs should be isolated from the building. These slabs should be reinforced to function as

independent units. Movement of these slabs should not be transmitted to the building foundation or

superstructure.

4.6 Below-Grade Walls

Below-grade walls required at this site may include minor retaining walls to accommodate grade changes

around the building and paved areas. The maximum toe pressure for below-grade walls should not exceed

the bearing pressure previously given for continuous strip footings. Retaining walls may be designed with

an ultimate coefficient of friction between the base of the concrete footing and the soil subgrade of 0.3.



Below-grade walls should also be designed to withstand lateral earth pressures caused by the weight of the

backfill, including slopes behind the walls; and any surcharge, such as adjacent floor loads. We recommend

the equivalent fluid unit weights tabulated below for lateral earth pressures, in pounds per cubic foot (pcf),

be used in the design of below-grade walls. The indicated values assume that positive drainage is provided

to prevent buildup of hydrostatic pressure. Fat clay should not be used to backfill the wall excavations.

Values for granular material should only be used if the granular backfill extends upwards and outwards the

full height of the wall at a slope of 45 degrees or flatter from its base. In this case, exterior granular backfill

should be capped with approximately 2 feet of cohesive soil to reduce the potential for surface water

infiltration into the granular backfill. With clean granular backfill, filter fabric, such as Mirafi 140N,

should be placed along the interface between the soil and granular backfill to reduce the potential for

infiltration of the soil into the granular material.

Table 4.1 - Recommended Lateral Earth Pressures

Backfill Type Equivalent Fluid Unit Weights

At-Rest Earth Pressures (pcf)

Active Earth Pressures (pcf)

Cohesive Soil 70 50

Granular Material (1-inch minus) 60 40

Free-Draining, Granular Material (1-inch clean) 50 30 At-rest earth pressures should be used for restrained or fixed-head walls that are restricted from rotation, such as loading dock or basement walls connected to floor joists or beams, or a wing wall attached to a basement wall. Active earth pressures should be used for free-head walls where the base remains fixed and deflection at the top of the wall of approximately 1-inch for each 10 feet of wall height is allowed, such as a retaining wall.

The above values are applicable when the surface of the backfill behind the wall is horizontal.

Upward sloped or loaded backfill will result in increased values. In addition to lateral earth pressures,

below-grade walls should be designed to resist any surcharge loads, including shallow building foundations

and traffic. These surface loads can be modeled as uniform lateral loads, equivalent to one-half of the

surface load, acting at the halfway point on the wall.

A passive soil resistance modeled by an equivalent fluid unit weight of 250 pcf may be used for native soil

against the face of the exterior base or a key below the base of the wall. The upper 2 feet of soil backfilled

against the exterior face of the walls and uncontrolled backfill soils should be ignored when calculating the

lateral resistance. Lower passive pressure should be used if the ground surface slopes downward away

from the face of the wall.



We recommend that all below-grade walls be provided with a drainage system. A minimum 4-inch

diameter, perforated drainpipe should be used, and placed at foundation level. Granular drainage material,

consisting of 1-inch clean crushed rock, classified as GP by ASTM D 2487, with less than 5 percent of the

rock passing the No. 200 sieve, should be placed a minimum of 6 inches in all directions around the drainage

pipe. Synthetic filter fabric, such as Mirafi 140N or equivalent, should encapsulate the drainpipe and

granular drainage material. The pipe should be sloped to drain by gravity to daylight or to a sump with a

pump for below-grade walls where positive drainage by gravity cannot be achieved. Alternately, drainage

can be provided directly through weepholes, spaced on approximately 10-foot centers, without a drain pipe

provided that filter fabric is used or other measures are taken to prevent the granular backfill from migrating

out through the weepholes. Any interior sumps must be isolated “watertight” from the interior subgrade to

prevent the movement of moisture from the sump into the underlying soils.

4.7 Site Grading and Drainage

Positive site drainage should be provided to reduce surface water infiltration around the perimeter of the

building and beneath the floor slab. All grades should be sloped away from the building. Roof and surface

drainage should be collected and discharged such that water is not permitted to infiltrate the backfill of the

building.

Large trees and shrubs should be planted away from exterior footings as they may cause drying and

shrinkage of the foundation soils and, with the passage of time, potentially detrimental settlement of the

building floor slab and foundations. A minimum distance of 20 feet or the mature tree’s dripline, whichever

is greater, is suggested.

We recommend that all final slopes have a maximum inclination of 3 horizontal to 1 vertical (3H:1V),

and that a crest of at least 10 feet in width or a distance equivalent to the total height of the slope,

whichever is less, be provided around the building before the surface slopes down and away. Cut and fill

slopes of less than 15 feet in total height should perform satisfactorily at this inclination, or flatter.

However, if they are proposed, the slopes should be brought to our attention and individually addressed and

evaluated by SCI on a case-by-case basis.



4.8 Underground Utilities

Underground utilities can provide a pathway for water to migrate below the floor slab. Drain and utility

pipes beneath floors should have tight joints to prevent leakage. If utility excavations are backfilled with

free-draining granular materials, then cutoffs should be provided at the exterior walls to reduce the potential

for water to migrate beneath the building. Impermeable cutoffs may consist of a 3-foot-long “plug” of

cohesive soil or bentonite soil mix, or a 1-foot-long plug of lean concrete. Soil may be used for the balance

of the backfill.

With the exception of individual service lines to the building that intersect foundations perpendicularly,

below-grade utilities should not be located within the stress influence zone of the building foundations.

Accordingly, below-grade utilities should be located outside a zone extending 45 degrees downward and

outward from the edge of the footings.

4.9 Pavements

Selection of the pavement section is dependent on the design life, traffic loads, subgrade strength, drainage

characteristics, and the desired level of maintenance. Neither California Bearing Ratio testing nor formal

pavement design was a part of our scope for this project. However, for planning purposes, the following

recommendations typically result in pavements that perform satisfactorily on similar subgrades under

automobile and pickup truck loads. They are intended to roughly provide a pavement requiring routine

maintenance for a 5-year period, minor repair and maintenance during the 5- to 10-year life of the pavement,

and possibly major repairs and restoration after a 10-year service life.

A flexible pavement section may be used for parking areas and driveways. Parking areas for automobiles

and light trucks should consist of a minimum 6-inch-thick crushed stone base with a minimum

3-inch-thick asphaltic concrete wearing surface. The crushed stone base should be thickened to at least

8 inches in drive areas. Care should be taken to provide drains or drainable transition at locations where

pavement sections of varying thickness abut, so as not to trap water within the crushed stone base,

which could saturate and soften the subgrade.

Alternately, a rigid concrete pavement section may be used, with less anticipated long-term maintenance.

Parking areas for automobiles and light trucks should consist of a minimum 6-inch-thick, non-reinforced

concrete pavement. Crushed stone base is not required under this light-duty pavement section. For more

heavily trafficked areas, we recommend that the section consist of an 8-inch-thick, non-reinforced concrete



pavement, over 4 inches of compacted base rock. This concrete pavement section should also be used to

support concentrated wheel loads for trash dumpster pads, approaches, and other areas where trucks will

maneuver. To provide resistance against salt and freeze-thaw cycles, we recommend the concrete have a

minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4,000 pounds per square inch and air entrainment of 5 to 7 percent

by volume. We also recommend that the maximum joint spacing be approximately 15 feet.

Pavement subgrades may be subjected to construction traffic and exposure to weather for an extended

period and significant problems may be incurred. Soft areas or otherwise unacceptable materials,

if encountered, should be removed and replaced with structural fill or stabilized prior to placing additional

fill. If removal of soft soils is impractical due to their excessive depth, they should be stabilized or

“bridged over” in a manner approved by SCI.

The parking lot subgrade should be proofrolled prior the placement of crushed rock base. Any soft areas

identified during the proofroll should be removed to firmer soils and backfilled with engineered fill material

in accordance with Sections 5.1 and 5.2.

5.0 SITE DEVELOPMENT AND CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS

5.1 Site Preparation

Areas to be cut, or to receive fill, should be stripped of any surface vegetation or organic topsoil.

The stripping’s should be removed and stockpiled for later placement in landscaped or common ground

areas, as appropriate.

After removal of the existing improvements and stripping, the site should be proofrolled by systematically

passing over the subgrade to achieve complete coverage with proper compaction or loaded construction

equipment, and observing the subgrade for pockets of excessively soft, wet or disturbed soil, or otherwise

unacceptable materials. In particular, any soft areas in the existing fill, if it is to remain in place.

Soft areas or otherwise unacceptable materials, if encountered, should be removed and replaced with

structural fill or stabilized prior to placing additional fill. If removal of soft soils is impractical due to their

excessive depth, they should be stabilized or “bridged over” in a manner approved by SCI. “Bridging” of

the soft soils can often be accomplished by working 2- to 4-inch clean crushed rock into the softer soils and

then placing a geofabric, such as Mirafi 600X or equivalent, prior to placing additional fill.



Slopes to receive fill which are steeper than 5H:1V should be benched prior to the placement of fill.

Benching will provide level surfaces for compaction and reduce the potential for development of inclined

planes of weakness between the natural soil and compacted fill. The benches should be spaced such that

the height of the cut at the up-slope end of the bench is less than 5 feet.

5.2 Fill Materials and Compaction

Prior to fill placement and compaction, the upper 8 inches of the exposed subgrade should be scarified,

moisture conditioned and recompacted. Structural fill should be placed in maximum 8-inch-thick loose

lifts and mechanically compacted in accordance with Table 5.1. We recommend that any fill placed in

building addition areas have a LL less than 45 and a PI less than 25. If higher plasticity soils are placed

within 3 feet of the floor slab subgrade, or 2 feet of the bottom of the footings, then remediation will be

required. Acceptable non-organic fill soils include materials designated CL, ML, CL-ML, SP, SW, GP,

and GW by ASTM D 2487-11. Masonry rubble, demolished pavements, or concrete debris is typically

suitable for use as structural fill provided the materials are broken to less than 4 inches in maximum

dimension and properly blended with acceptable soil and placed as approved by SCI.

Table 5.1 - Typical Compaction Requirements for Fill

Material Tested Proctor Type Minimum Percentage Dry Density

Structural Fill (Cohesive) Modified (ASTM D 1557) 90

Standard (ASTM D 698) 95

Structural Fill (Granular) Modified 95

Standard 98

Landscaped Areas (non-load bearing) Modified 88

Standard 92

Utility Trench Backfill Modified 90

Standard 95

Prior to compaction, the soil may require moisture adjustment. During warm weather, moisture reduction

can generally be accomplished by disking or otherwise aerating the soil. When air drying is not feasible,

a moisture reducing chemical additive, such as hydrated lime, could be incorporated into the soil.

During dry weather, some addition of moisture may be required to facilitate compaction. This should also

be done in a controlled manner using a tank truck with a spray bar. The moistened soil should be thoroughly



blended with a disk or pulverizer to produce a uniform moisture content. If construction is performed

during the winter season, fill materials should be carefully observed to see that no frozen soil is placed as

fill or remains in the base materials upon which fill is placed.

Backfill for foundation walls may consist of lean clay, one-inch minus crushed limestone, or controlled low

strength material. We advise performing field density tests on at least every other lift to monitor

compaction. As an alternate, we suggest using one-inch clean crushed limestone to provide improved

drainage and to reduce lateral pressures on the walls. Due to a slight risk of migration of soil fines into the

clean rock, a synthetic filter fabric, such as Mirafi 140N or equivalent, should be placed between the soil

face of the excavation and the crushed limestone. If clean rock is used, it may be placed in 2-foot-thick

lifts and tamped or tracked to achieve adequate densification. Exterior clean rock backfill should be capped

with cohesive soil to reduce the potential for surface water infiltration.

Backfill placed next to walls should be compacted with hand operated equipment and not large

self-propelled or machine operated equipment, which could result in potential overcompaction and higher

lateral pressures. Compaction should be reduced within approximately one-foot of the walls, and the walls

should be observed periodically for signs of movement. If movement is detected, it may be necessary to

provide bracing and/or change backfill procedures.

In addition to the minimum density requirements listed above, the soil must be stable, i.e., not “pumping”

or rutting excessively under construction traffic, prior to placing additional fill or constructing foundations,

floor slab, or pavements. Field density tests should be performed on each lift of fill to document that proper

compaction is achieved.

5.3 Shallow Foundation Excavations

SCI should observe all footing and floor slab excavations for problem areas, such as soft zones and areas

of unsuitable existing fill. Excessive disturbance of siltier soils in footing excavations should be avoided

and could complicate construction. The potential for such disturbance will increase during wetter times of

the year. Footing excavations that have been excessively disturbed should be overdeepened to approved

undisturbed soils. Overexcavation and replacement with structural fill should be performed where

inadequate bearing materials are present in footing excavations.



The base of all excavations should be clean, free of loose soil or uncompacted fill, relatively dry,

and maintained near their optimum moisture content. Excavations should be protected from extreme

temperatures, precipitation, and construction disturbances. To reduce the possibility of desiccation or

saturation of the foundation soils, we recommend that the concrete be placed as soon as possible after

excavations are made.

Groundwater may contribute to unstable subgrade conditions in foundation excavations in the center and

western cut areas of the building. However, in most situations, small amounts of groundwater seepage into

the excavations can be handled by means of gravity ditching and a sump pump. If greater flows are

experienced, SCI should be retained to provide additional consultation.

5.4 Subgrade Considerations

Floor slab and pavement subgrades may be subjected to construction traffic and exposure to weather for an

extended period and significant problems may be incurred. It will likely be necessary to proofroll the

subgrade, in both cut and fill areas, and recompact the subgrade immediately prior to placing base rock for

the floor slab or pavement. In addition, subgrades covered with base rock may be very slow to dry if

precipitation occurs after placing the base rock. Therefore, we recommend that proofrolling and placement

of the base rock be done as close to the time of pouring the floor slab or paving as is practical. Proofroll

passes should be limited, particularly on silty subgrades, to reduce the potential for pumping of moisture

from deeper within the soil profile.

Special measures may be required to facilitate construction during wet or cold weather, or where excessive

areas of soft soils are identified. These measures may include, but are not limited to, the addition of lime

to the subgrade soils for drying purposes, or the removal of soft spongy soils and their replacement with

crushed limestone. Soft areas should be selectively undercut and backfilled with properly compacted

cohesive soil. A geotextile, such as Mirafi 600X, or geogrid, such as Tensar TriAx-140, or equivalents,

may be used to help stabilize particularly soft areas. Where possible, the subgrade should be sloped to

provide drainage.

5.5 Excavation Bracing Requirements

In the Federal Register, Volume 54, No. 209 (October 1989), the United States Department of Labor,

Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) amended its "Construction Standards for

Excavations, 29 CFR, Part 1926, Subpart P". This document was issued to provide for the safety of



workers entering excavations, including utility trenches, basements, footings and others. All operations

should be performed under the supervision of qualified site personnel in accordance with OSHA regulations.

5.6 Erosion Control and Land Disturbance Monitoring Program

Appropriate erosion and sediment control measures, such as proper contouring during site grading

activities, the installation of siltation fences and/or inlet protection, should be used during construction to

keep eroded materials from being carried onto adjacent properties or waterbodies. Depending on the length

of time the subgrade is exposed and the amount of siltation that occurs, it may be necessary to periodically

remove materials collected by the sediment control systems. Timely sodding and/or seeding of sloped

surfaces will help reduce this potential problem.

SCI recommends following the procedures detailed in the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP).

Any site disturbing more than one acre of ground must obtain a Land Disturbance Permit from the

Missouri Department of Natural Resources. As part of the permit compliance procedures, weekly and

rain-event site observations must be performed to document the changing site conditions and maintenance

of control measures.

6.0 CONSTRUCTION MONITORING PROGRAM

The following list summarizes SCI’s recommendations for a construction monitoring program.

These services are recommended to provide quality assurance in assessing design assumptions and to

document earth-related construction procedures for compliance with plans, specifications, and good

engineering practice. SCI should be retained to:

• Review final grading/development plans;

• Participate in a formal preconstruction meeting with the Owner’s Representative, Civil Engineer,

and Contractor, prior to construction at the site;

• Observe site preparation activities prior to construction, including stripping and proofrolling;

• Conduct and document weekly and rain-event observations at the site, maintain and update on-site paperwork, and provide submittals required by the SWPPP and Land Disturbance Permit;

• Assess the suitability of potential fill materials, including both on-site and off-site sources;

• Monitor placement and compaction of structural fill and backfill;



• Observe foundation excavations and the floor slab subgrades to assess the impact of existing fill (if it remains) or any soft native soils and to recommend the extent of remedial measures;

• Observe footing excavations for adequacy of bearing materials;

• Observe the floor slab subgrades prior to placing base rock;

• Observe backfilling of below-grade utility excavations;

• Observe pavement subgrade preparation and provide observation and testing services for the base course and pavement section;

• Check the thickness of pavement sections and, for asphaltic concrete, its density; and

• Provide quality assurance testing of structural concrete and pavement materials.

7.0 LIMITATIONS

The recommendations provided herein are for the exclusive use of Fort Zumwalt School District. It is

imperative that SCI be contacted by any third-party interests to evaluate the applicability of this report

relative to use by anyone other than Fort Zumwalt School District. Our recommendations are specific only

to the project described, and are not meant to supersede more stringent requirements of local ordinances.

They are based on subsurface information obtained at eight specific, widely-spaced, sounding locations

within the project area; and our understanding of the project as presented in Section 2.0, “Site and Project

Description”; and geotechnical engineering practice consistent with the standard of care. No other warranty

is expressed or implied. SCI should be contacted if conditions encountered are not consistent with those

described.

We should also be provided with a set of final development plans, once they are available, to review whether

our recommendations have been understood and applied correctly, and to assess the need for additional

exploration or analysis. Failure to provide these documents to SCI may nullify some or all the

recommendations provided herein. In addition, any changes in the planned project or changed site

conditions may require revised or additional recommendations on our part.

The final part of our geotechnical service should consist of direct observation during construction,

to observe that conditions actually encountered are consistent with those described in this report, and to

assess the appropriateness of the analyses and recommendations contained herein. SCI cannot assume

responsibility or liability for the adequacy of its recommendations without being retained to observe

construction.

1

VICINITY AND TOPOGRAPHIC MAP

DATE JOB NUMBER DRAWN BY

CHECKED BY

1138 TOM GINNEVER AVENUEO’FALLON, MISSOURI

PROJECT NAME GENERAL NOTES/LEGEND

FIGURE

12/2019 2018-0583.10RCV

JAM

®USGS TOPOGRAPHIC MAPO'FALLON, MISSOURI QUADRANGLEDATED 200210' CONTOURS

STREET MAPHTTP://GOTO.ARCGISONLINE.COM/MAPS/WORLD_STREET_MAP

SITE

SITE

NOT TO SCALE

0 1,000 2,000

ft1"=2,000'SCALE

AERIA

L PHOTOGRAPH

2

GENERAL NOTES/LE

GEND

DATE

JOB NUMBER

CHECKED BY

DRAWN BY

FIGURE

1138 TOM GIN

NEVER AVENUE

O’FALLON, M

ISSOURI

PROJE

CT N

AME

12/2019

2018-0583.10

RCV

JAM

AERIA

L PHOTOGRAPH OBTA

INED FROM EDR DATED 1996.

DIM

ENSIO

NS AND LOCATIO

NS ARE APPROXIM

ATE; A

CTUAL M

AY VARY. DRAWIN

G SHALL

NOT BE USED OUTSID

E THE CONTEXT OF THE REPORT FOR W

HICH IT W

AS GENERATED.

!U!U

!U!U!U

!U

!U!U

DIAMONDRIDGECT

PLATINUM CT

CRYSTA

L RIDGE CT

CRYSTAL RIDGE DR

TOMGINNEVERAVE

B-2

B-1

B-8B-3B-6

B-4

B-5B-7

0 40 80

ft1"=80'SCALE

PROPOSED SOIL BORIN

G LOCATIO

NS

!U

HISTORICAL AERIA

L PHOTOGRAPH

3

GENERAL NOTES/LE

GEND

DATE

JOB NUMBER

CHECKED BY

DRAWN BY

FIGURE

1138 TOM GIN

NEVER AVENUE

O’FALLON, M

ISSOURI

PROJE

CT N

AME

12/2019

2018-0583.10

RCV

JAM

AERIA

L PHOTOGRAPH OBTA


DIM

ENSIO

NS AND LOCATIO

NS ARE APPROXIM

ATE; A

CTUAL M

AY VARY. DRAWIN

G SHALL

NOT BE USED OUTSID


HICH IT W

AS GENERATED.

!U!U

!U!U!U

!U

!U!U

B-2

B-1

B-8B-3B-6

B-4

B-5B-7

0 50 100

ft1"=100'SCALE

!U PROPOSED SOIL BORING LOCATIONS

SITE PLAN

4

GENERAL NOTES/LE

GEND

DATE

JOB NUMBER

CHECKED BY

DRAWN BY

FIGURE

1138 TOM GIN

NEVER AVENUE

O’FALLON, M

ISSOURI

PROJE

CT N

AME

12/2019

2018-0583.10

RCV

JAM

AERIA

L PHOTOGRAPH OBTA


DIM

ENSIO

NS AND LOCATIO

NS ARE APPROXIM

ATE; A

CTUAL M

AY VARY. DRAWIN

G SHALL

NOT BE USED OUTSID


HICH IT W

AS GENERATED.

!U!U

!U!U!U

!U

!U!U

B-2

B-1

B-8B-3B-6

B-4

B-5B-7

0 40 80

ft1"=80'SCALE

PROPOSED SOIL BORIN

G LOCATIO

NS

!U

SITE

Appendix A

USE and UNDERSTANDING of CPTu Logs

SCI Engineering, Inc 1 | P a g e 5/2018

The CPTu logs show the corrected Tip Resistance (qt), Friction (fs), Porewater Pressure (U2), SPT N60 correlation (N60), and the Soil Behavior interpretation results. The corrected cone tip resistance (qt) is measured as the maximum force over the projected area of the cone tip. It is a point stress related to the bearing capacity of the soil. The measured uncorrected tip value (qc) must be corrected for porewater pressure effects (Lunne et al, 1997), especially in clays and silts where porewater pressures typically vary greatly from hydrostatic. The sleeve friction (fs) is used as a measure of soil type and can be expressed by friction ratio (RF) which is used in the soil behavior classification. The u2 position element is required for the measurement of penetration porewater pressures and the correction of tip resistance. Calculations of qt, RF, and the SPT N60 calculation are discussed below.

The estimated stratigraphic profiles included in the CPTu logs are based on relationships between qt, fs, and U2 as shown graphically in the figure below.

Non-normalized CPT Soil Behavior Type (SBT) chart

* Heavily overconsolidated or cemented

Pa = atmospheric pressure = 100 kPa = 1 tsf

Derived Values from CPT Corrected cone resistance: qt = qc + u2(1-a) Friction ratio: Rf = (fs/qt) x 100%

Equivalent SPT N60, (blows/ft) Lunne et al. (1997)

= 8.5 X

Where Ic = ((3.47 – log Qt1)2 + (log RF + 1.22)2)0.5 And Qtn = ((qt - svo)/pa) x (pa/(s'vo)n, and recalculate Ic, then iterate for n:

Iterate until the change in n, ∆n < 0.01

Z Soil Behavior Type 1 Sensitive, fine grained 2 Organic soils - clay 3 Clay – silty clay to clay 4 Silt mixtures – clayey silt to silty clay 5 Sand mixtures – silty sand to sandy silt 6 Sands – clean sand to silty sand 7 Gravelly sand to dense sand 8 Very stiff sand to clayey sand* 9 Very stiff fine grained*

Project: 1138 Tom Ginnever Avenue: 2018-0583.10

SCI Engineering, Inc.

650 Pierce Boulevard, O'Fallon, Illinois 62269

Geotechnical Engineers

www.sciengineering.com

Total depth: 14.93 ft, Date: 11/5/2019

Surface Elevation: 486.70 ftO'Fallon, Missouri

CPT: B-1

Location:

Cone resistance qt

Tip resistance (tsf)100806040200

Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Cone resistance qt Sleeve friction

Friction (tsf)21.510.50

Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Sleeve friction Pore pressure u

Pressure (psi)151050-5

Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Pore pressure u SPT N60

N60 (blows/ft)50403020100

Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

SPT N60 Soil Behaviour Type

SBT (Robertson, 2010)181614121086420

Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Soil Behaviour Type

Clay

Clay & silty clay

Clay

Clay & silty clay

Clay

Clay & silty clay

Clay

CPeT-IT v.2.1.1.8 - CPTU data presentation & interpretation software - Report created on: 11/26/2019, 5:03:23 PM 1

Project file: \\scieng\shared\StCharles\shared\1soils\1NEW\PROJECT FILES\2018 PROJECTS\2018-0583 1138 Tom Ginnever Avenue\GS\10\CPT\CPTall.cpt








CPT: B-2

Location:

Cone resistance qt


Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1



Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1



Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1


N60 (blows/ft)50403020100

Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1


SBT (Robertson, 2010)181614121086420

Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Soil Behaviour Type

Clay

Clay & silty clay

Silty sand & sandy silt

Clay & silty clay

Clay

Clay & silty clay

Clay










CPT: B-3

Location:

Cone resistance qt


Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1



Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1



Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1


N60 (blows/ft)50403020100

Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1


SBT (Robertson, 2010)181614121086420

Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Soil Behaviour Type

Clay

Clay & silty clay

Clay

Clay & silty clay










CPT: B-4

Location:

Cone resistance qt


Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1



Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1



Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1


N60 (blows/ft)50403020100

Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1


SBT (Robertson, 2010)181614121086420

Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Soil Behaviour Type

Clay & silty clayClay

Clay & silty clay

Clay

Clay

Clay

Clay & silty clay

Clay

Clay & silty clay

Clay

Clay










CPT: B-5

Location:

Cone resistance qt


Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1



Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1



Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1


N60 (blows/ft)50403020100

Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1


SBT (Robertson, 2010)181614121086420

Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Soil Behaviour Type

Clay

Clay & silty clay

Clay

Clay & silty clay

Clay










CPT: B-6

Location:

Cone resistance qt


Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1



Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1



Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1


N60 (blows/ft)50403020100

Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1


SBT (Robertson, 2010)181614121086420

Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Soil Behaviour Type

Clay

Clay & silty clay


Clay & silty clay

Clay










CPT: B-7

Location:

Cone resistance qt


Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1



Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1



Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1


N60 (blows/ft)50403020100

Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1


SBT (Robertson, 2010)181614121086420

Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Soil Behaviour Type

Clay

Clay & silty clay

Clay

Clay & silty clay

Clay & silty clay


Clay & silty clay










CPT: B-8

Location:

Cone resistance qt


Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1



Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1



Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1


N60 (blows/ft)50403020100

Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1


SBT (Robertson, 2010)181614121086420

Depth

(ft

)

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Soil Behaviour Type

Clay

Clay & silty clay

Clay

Clay & silty clay

Clay



Appendix B

SCI ENGINEERING, INC. 130 Point West Boulevard

St. Charles, Missouri 63301 636-949-8200


BORING LOG LEGEND AND NOMENCLATURE

Depth is in feet below ground surface. Elevation is in feet mean sea level, site datum, or as otherwise noted.

Sample Type SS Split-spoon sample, disturbed, obtained by driving a 2-inch-O.D. split-spoon sampler (ASTM D 1586). NX Diamond core bit, nominal 2-inch-diameter rock sample (ASTM D 2113). ST Thin-walled (Shelby) tube sample, relatively undisturbed, obtained by pushing a 3-inch-diameter,

tube (ASTM D 1587). CS Continuous sample tube system, relatively undisturbed, obtained by split-barrel sampler in conjunction

with auger advancement. SV Shear vane, field test to determine strength of cohesive soil by pushing or driving a 2-inch-diameter

vane, and then shearing by torquing soil in existing and remolded states (ASTM D 2573). BS Bag sample, disturbed, obtained from cuttings.

Recovery is expressed as a ratio of the length recovered to the total length pushed, driven, cored.

Blows Numbers indicate blows per 6 inches of split-spoon sampler penetration when driven with a 140-

pound hammer falling freely 30 inches. The number of total blows obtained for the second and third 6-inch increments is the N value (Standard Penetration Test or SPT) in blows per foot (ASTM D 1586). Practical refusal is considered to be 50 or more blows without achieving 6 inches of penetration, and is expressed as a ratio of 50 to actual penetration, e.g., 50/2 (50 blows for 2 inches).

For analysis, the N value is used when obtained by a cathead and rope system. When obtained by an automatic hammer, the N value may be increased by a factor of 1.3.

Vane Shear Strength is expressed as the peak strength (existing state) / the residual strength (remolded state).

Description indicates soil constituents and other classification characteristics (ASTM D 2488) and the Unified Soil Classification (ASTM D 2487). Secondary soil constituents (expressed as a percentage) are described as follows:

Trace <5 Few 5-15 With >15-30

Stratigraphic Breaks may be observed or interpreted, and are indicated by a dashed line. Transition between described materials may be gradual.

Laboratory Test Results

- Natural moisture content (ASTM D 2216) in percent. - Dry density in pounds per cubic foot (pcf). - Hand penetrometer value of apparently intact cohesive sample in kips per square foot (ksf). - Unconfined compressive strength (ASTM D 2166) in kips per square foot (ksf). - Liquid and Plastic Limits (ASTM D 4318) in percent.

RQD (Rock Quality Designation) is the ratio between the total length of core segments 4 inches or more in length and the total length of core drilled. RQD (expressed as a percentage) indicates insitu rock quality as follows:

Excellent 90 to 100 Good 75 to 90 Fair 50 to 75 Poor 25 to 50 Very Poor 0 to 25

8.0

6.0

8.0

6.0

1

17

21

DP

17

21 1335

2" TOPSOILLEAN CLAY (CL): Brown, trace gray, tracefine sand and roots

Boring terminated at 4 feet.

3

6

9

12

15

18

REMARKS:

DE

PT

H (

ft)

NONE OBSERVED WHILE DRILLING

UN

CO

NF

INE

DC

OM

PR

ES

SIV

ES

TR

EN

GT

H (

ksf)

DAYS AFTER DRILLING

DESCRIPTION

(UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION)

WATER LEVEL:

486

483

480

477

474

471

468

LABORATORY TEST RESULTS

ft

ELEVATION 486.7±

HAMMER N/A PROJECT NO. 2018-0583.10

SHEET 1

HRS AFTER DRILLING

SE

E R

EM

AR

K N

O.

NU

MB

ER

X

PROJECT 1138 Tom Ginneer Ave

LOCATION O'Fallon, Missouri

EL

EV

AT

ION

(ft

)

EQUIPMENT Vertek S4 CPT-Direct Push

DR

YD

EN

SIT

Y(p

cf)

RE

CO

VE

RY

(in/in

)

MO

IST

UR

EC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

ft WHILE DRILLING

ft

TY

PE

DRILLER SCI Engineering, Inc.

PLA

ST

ICIT

YIN

DE

X

BORING LOG

GR

AP

HIC

SAMPLE

BORING NUMBER B-1

HA

ND

PE

NE

TR

OM

ET

ER

(ksf

)

DATE DRILLED 11/05/19

of 1

BLO

WS

(per

6 in

)

7.0

5.0

4.0

>9.0

7.0

5.0

4.0

>9.0

1

2

21

17

24

22

DP

DP

21

17

24

22

2" TOPSOILFILL: Brown, with gray, lean clay, trace finesand and fine roots

Becomes gray

LEAN CLAY (CL): Brown, trace gray, tracefine sand and rootsBoring terminated at 8 feet.

3

6

9

12

15

18

REMARKS:

DE

PT

H (

ft)


UN

CO

NF

INE

DC

OM

PR

ES

SIV

ES

TR

EN

GT

H (

ksf)

DAYS AFTER DRILLING

DESCRIPTION


WATER LEVEL:

483

480

477

474

471

468

465


ft

ELEVATION 483.9±


SHEET 1

HRS AFTER DRILLING

SE

E R

EM

AR

K N

O.

NU

MB

ER

X



EL

EV

AT

ION

(ft

)


DR

YD

EN

SIT

Y(p

cf)

RE

CO

VE

RY

(in/in

)

MO

IST

UR

EC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

ft WHILE DRILLING

ft

TY

PE


PLA

ST

ICIT

YIN

DE

X

BORING LOG

GR

AP

HIC

SAMPLE

BORING NUMBER B-2

HA

ND

PE

NE

TR

OM

ET

ER

(ksf

)


of 1

BLO

WS

(per

6 in

)

4.5

1.5

4.5

1.5

1

25

26

DP

25

26



3

6

9

12

15

18

REMARKS:

DE

PT

H (

ft)


UN

CO

NF

INE

DC

OM

PR

ES

SIV

ES

TR

EN

GT

H (

ksf)

DAYS AFTER DRILLING

DESCRIPTION


WATER LEVEL:

483

480

477

474

471

468

465


ft

ELEVATION 484.5±


SHEET 1

HRS AFTER DRILLING

SE

E R

EM

AR

K N

O.

NU

MB

ER

X



EL

EV

AT

ION

(ft

)


DR

YD

EN

SIT

Y(p

cf)

RE

CO

VE

RY

(in/in

)

MO

IST

UR

EC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

ft WHILE DRILLING

ft

TY

PE


PLA

ST

ICIT

YIN

DE

X

BORING LOG

GR

AP

HIC

SAMPLE

BORING NUMBER B-3

HA

ND

PE

NE

TR

OM

ET

ER

(ksf

)


of 1

BLO

WS

(per

6 in

)

3.0

0.5

3.0

0.5

1

27

29

DP

27

29



3

6

9

12

15

18

REMARKS:

DE

PT

H (

ft)


UN

CO

NF

INE

DC

OM

PR

ES

SIV

ES

TR

EN

GT

H (

ksf)

DAYS AFTER DRILLING

DESCRIPTION


WATER LEVEL:

486

483

480

477

474

471

468


ft

ELEVATION 486.2±


SHEET 1

HRS AFTER DRILLING

SE

E R

EM

AR

K N

O.

NU

MB

ER

X



EL

EV

AT

ION

(ft

)


DR

YD

EN

SIT

Y(p

cf)

RE

CO

VE

RY

(in/in

)

MO

IST

UR

EC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

ft WHILE DRILLING

ft

TY

PE


PLA

ST

ICIT

YIN

DE

X

BORING LOG

GR

AP

HIC

SAMPLE

BORING NUMBER B-4

HA

ND

PE

NE

TR

OM

ET

ER

(ksf

)


of 1

BLO

WS

(per

6 in

)

8.0

2.5

1.5

2.5

8.0

2.5

1.5

2.5

1

2

23

25

26

26

DP

DP

23

25

26

26

1335



3

6

9

12

15

18

REMARKS:

DE

PT

H (

ft)


UN

CO

NF

INE

DC

OM

PR

ES

SIV

ES

TR

EN

GT

H (

ksf)

DAYS AFTER DRILLING

DESCRIPTION


WATER LEVEL:

480

477

474

471

468

465


ft

ELEVATION 483±


SHEET 1

HRS AFTER DRILLING

SE

E R

EM

AR

K N

O.

NU

MB

ER

X



EL

EV

AT

ION

(ft

)


DR

YD

EN

SIT

Y(p

cf)

RE

CO

VE

RY

(in/in

)

MO

IST

UR

EC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

ft WHILE DRILLING

ft

TY

PE


PLA

ST

ICIT

YIN

DE

X

BORING LOG

GR

AP

HIC

SAMPLE

BORING NUMBER B-5

HA

ND

PE

NE

TR

OM

ET

ER

(ksf

)


of 1

BLO

WS

(per

6 in

)

4.0

4.5

4.0

4.5

1

21

23

DP

21

23



3

6

9

12

15

18

REMARKS:

DE

PT

H (

ft)


UN

CO

NF

INE

DC

OM

PR

ES

SIV

ES

TR

EN

GT

H (

ksf)

DAYS AFTER DRILLING

DESCRIPTION


WATER LEVEL:

489

486

483

480

477

474

471


ft

ELEVATION 489.3±


SHEET 1

HRS AFTER DRILLING

SE

E R

EM

AR

K N

O.

NU

MB

ER

X



EL

EV

AT

ION

(ft

)


DR

YD

EN

SIT

Y(p

cf)

RE

CO

VE

RY

(in/in

)

MO

IST

UR

EC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

ft WHILE DRILLING

ft

TY

PE


PLA

ST

ICIT

YIN

DE

X

BORING LOG

GR

AP

HIC

SAMPLE

BORING NUMBER B-6

HA

ND

PE

NE

TR

OM

ET

ER

(ksf

)


of 1

BLO

WS

(per

6 in

)

8.0

5.0

8.0

5.0

1

21

19

DP

21

19



3

6

9

12

15

18

REMARKS:

DE

PT

H (

ft)


UN

CO

NF

INE

DC

OM

PR

ES

SIV

ES

TR

EN

GT

H (

ksf)

DAYS AFTER DRILLING

DESCRIPTION


WATER LEVEL:

477

474

471

468

465

462

459


ft

ELEVATION 477.5±


SHEET 1

HRS AFTER DRILLING

SE

E R

EM

AR

K N

O.

NU

MB

ER

X



EL

EV

AT

ION

(ft

)


DR

YD

EN

SIT

Y(p

cf)

RE

CO

VE

RY

(in/in

)

MO

IST

UR

EC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

ft WHILE DRILLING

ft

TY

PE


PLA

ST

ICIT

YIN

DE

X

BORING LOG

GR

AP

HIC

SAMPLE

BORING NUMBER B-7

HA

ND

PE

NE

TR

OM

ET

ER

(ksf

)


of 1

BLO

WS

(per

6 in

)

8.0

4.0

8.0

4.0

1

22

26

DP

22

26



3

6

9

12

15

18

REMARKS:

DE

PT

H (

ft)


UN

CO

NF

INE

DC

OM

PR

ES

SIV

ES

TR

EN

GT

H (

ksf)

DAYS AFTER DRILLING

DESCRIPTION


WATER LEVEL:

480

477

474

471

468

465


ft

ELEVATION 482.6±


SHEET 1

HRS AFTER DRILLING

SE

E R

EM

AR

K N

O.

NU

MB

ER

X



EL

EV

AT

ION

(ft

)


DR

YD

EN

SIT

Y(p

cf)

RE

CO

VE

RY

(in/in

)

MO

IST

UR

EC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

LIQ

UID

LIM

IT

ft WHILE DRILLING

ft

TY

PE


PLA

ST

ICIT

YIN

DE

X

BORING LOG

GR

AP

HIC

SAMPLE

BORING NUMBER B-8

HA

ND

PE

NE

TR

OM

ET

ER

(ksf

)


of 1

BLO

WS

(per

6 in

)

Appendix C

Project Name: 1138 Tom Ginnever Ave Date:

Project #: 2018-0583.10 Test Method

Location: O'Fallon, Missouri ASTM:

Traverse: T-1 Geophone Spacing (m):

Operator: BDG Latitude: n/a # of Geophones:

Engineer: JAM Longitude n/a Elevation:

Depth Vs

feet ft/s

4 538

8 538

12 538

16 538

20 538

24 1052

28 1052

32 1052

36 2757

40 2757

44 2757

48 2757

52 2757

56 2757

60 2757

64 2757

68 2757

72 3282

76 3282

80 3282

84 3282

88 3282

92 3282

96 3282

100 3282

V S30 = 1379 ft/s

Site Class*: C

11/4/2019

n/a

*Per IBC Weighted Shear Wave Velocity Criterion

(Liquefaction, Soft Clay, etc, Not Considered In

This Calculation)

12

8

D 7400

REMI

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

0 1000 2000 3000 4000

De

pth

(ft

)

Vs (ft/s)

Project Name: 1138 Tom Ginnever Ave Date:

Project #: 2018-0583.10 Test Method

Location: O'Fallon, Missouri ASTM:

Traverse: T-2 Geophone Spacing (m):

Operator: BDG Latitude: n/a # of Geophones:

Engineer: JAM Longitude n/a Elevation:

Depth Vs

feet ft/s

4 555

8 555

12 555

16 621

20 621

24 838

28 838

32 1418

36 1418

40 1418

44 1418

48 1418

52 3211

56 3211

60 3211

64 3211

68 3211

72 3211

76 3211

80 3211

84 3211

88 3211

92 3211

96 3211

100 3211

V S30 = 1359 ft/s

Site Class*: C

11/4/2019

n/a

*Per IBC Weighted Shear Wave Velocity Criterion

(Liquefaction, Soft Clay, etc, Not Considered In

This Calculation)

12

8

D 7400

REMI

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

0 1000 2000 3000 4000

De

pth

(ft

)

Vs (ft/s)

SECTION 01 1000 – GENERAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 1

SECTION 01 1000 – GENERAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

1. SUMMARY OF THE WORK A. Project Identification: The Project name is Professional Development Center for Fort Zumwalt

School District as indicated on the drawings and in the project manual dated February 28, 2020. In general, the project consists of a new building to be located 1138 Tom Ginnever Avenue, O’Fallon, MO 63366 and will contain about 21,000 sq. ft. and site development to include a large parking lot area. Construction is a single story, slab-on-grade building to include limited kitchen equipment, HVAC, plumbing, fire protection and electrical systems. In addition to the base bid, there are 4 ADD alternate bids, which include ADD alternate options for an additional 3,655 sq. ft.

B. Contractor Use of Premises 1. General: The Contractors shall limit their use of the premises to the work areas indicated

in the contract documents and as directed by the Owner. 2. Use of the site: Confine operations at the site to the areas permitted under the Contract.

Conform to site rules and regulations, as directed by the Owner, while engaged in project construction. a. Keep existing roads and entrances serving the premises clear and available for

use. b. Do not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. Confine

stock piling of materials and locations of storage sheds to the areas indicated or directed by the Owner. If additional storage is necessary, obtain and pay for such storage off site.

c. Prevent unauthorized use of vehicles, cars, trucks, and construction equipment. C. Contractor Use of Existing Site and Improvements: Maintain the existing site and site

improvements in a safe, weather-tight and secure condition throughout the construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Take all precautions necessary to protect the site, site improvements and occupants during the construction period.

D. Owner Occupancy: The Owner will not occupy the site during the period of construction. Cooperate fully with the Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and to facilitate Owner access when necessary. Perform the work so as not to interfere with the Owner’s operations.

E. Workmanship: It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that his workmen and the workmen of his Subcontractors and sub-subcontractors are skilled and experienced in the tasks they are assigned. The Contractor shall immediately remove his workmen or cause his subcontractors or sub-subcontractors to immediately remove their workmen from the Project if the work is not being performed in a timely, skilled, careful, or workmanlike manner. Such workmen shall be replaced by skilled and experienced workmen capable of performing the work in an acceptable and timely manner. Likewise, the Contractor shall terminate the contracts of his subcontractors and sub-subcontractors who fail to perform the work in a timely, skilled and workmanlike manner. Such subcontractors and sub-subcontractors shall be replaced with acceptable subcontractors and sub-subcontractors at no additional cost to the Owner and without adjustment to the time of the Contract.

F. Work by Owner: 1. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without

interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner.

2. Subsequent Work: Owner will perform the following additional work at site after Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory Work under this Contract. a. Technology equipment installation. b. Furniture installation.

G. Work Under Separate Contracts


1. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying Work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

2. Concurrent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at the Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. a. Plaques, Room ID Signage, Window Treatments, Security Cameras, Burglar

Alarm Equipment and Site Furnishings. H. Owner Furnished Products:

1. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections.

2. Owner-Furnished Products: a. Toilet accessories to include: Soap dispensers, paper towel dispensers, sanitary

napkin dispensers (OFOI) b. Residential appliance to include: refrigerators and dishwashers (OFCI) c. Wall Mounted Television monitors (OFOI in areas as indicated on drawings)

I. Access to Site: 1. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during

construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

2. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.

3. Condition of Existing Grounds: Maintain portions of existing grounds, landscaping, and hardscaping affected by construction operations throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.

J. Work Restrictions: 1. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

a. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS A. Accompanying these specifications are drawings which illustrate the project and are part of the

Contract Documents. B. These drawings and specifications are intended to be so coordinated that any work included in one

and not in the other shall be executed as if included in both. C. All work contemplated and described in the specifications shall be carried out in accordance with

the general and detail drawings made a part thereof, and with such additional detail drawings and directions as may be given from time to time during the progress of the work.

D. Requirements of Sections in Division 01 General & Administrative Requirements apply to the work of all Sections in the Specifications.

E. Specification and Drawing Conventions: 1. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of

language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: a. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the

Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

b. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

2. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:


a. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

b. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings.

c. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

3. DRAWING SYMBOLS A. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols used on the drawings are those symbols

recognized in the construction industry for purposes indicated. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Architect for clarifications before proceeding.

4. DEFINITIONS A. Certain terms used in contract Documents are defined in this article. Definitions and explanations

contained in this section are not necessarily complete or exclusive, but are general for the work to the extent that they are not stated more explicitly in another element of the Contract Documents.

B. Drawings: The Drawings are diagrammatic in nature and are not intended to be completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon.

C. Indicated: The term “indicated” is a cross-reference to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the specifications, and to similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where terms such as “shown”, “noted”, and “specified” are used in lieu of “indicated”, it is for purpose of helping reader locate cross-reference, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted.

D. Directed, Requested, etc.: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as “directed”, “requested”, “authorized”, “selected”, “approved”, “required”, “accepted”, and “permitted” mean “directed by Architect and/or Construction Manager, requested by Architect and/or Construction Manager”, and similar phrases. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect’s or Construction Manager’s representative responsibility into the Contractor’s area of construction supervision, means, methods, techniques and other areas which are defined as exclusively the responsibility of the Contractor.

E. Approve: Where used in conjunction with the Architect’s/Construction Manager’s response to submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports, and claims by Contractor, the meaning of the term “approved” will be held to limitations of Architect’s/Construction Manager’s responsibilities and duties as specified in General Conditions, and not be interpreted as a release of Contractor from responsibilities to fulfill requirements of Contract Documents.

F. Project Site: The term “project site” is defined as the space available to the Contractor for performance of work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the project. The extent of the project site is shown on drawings, and may or may not be identical with the description of land upon which project is to be built.

G. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term “furnish” is used to mean supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance.

H. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term “install” is used to describe operations at project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance.

I. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater details, term “provide” means furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance.

J. Installer: The term “installer” is defined as the entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including installation, erection, application and similar required operations. It is a general requirement that such entities (installers) be expert in operations they are engaged to perform.

K. Regulations: Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.


L. Testing Laboratories: The term “testing laboratory” is defined as an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests of the work, either at the project site or elsewhere, and to report, and (if required) interpret results of those inspections or tests.

M. Contractor: Except as indicated otherwise, the terms “Contractor”, “Trade Contractor”, “Prime Contractor” and “General Contractor” shall be interchangeable and mean the party to an Owner-Contractor Agreement for the project.

N. Equal Product and Approved Equal Product: These terms mean a product that was not originally specified but was subsequently determined by the architect to be equal to a product that was specified, such determination having been made prior to the bid date in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 1000 – GENERAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS, Paragraph 5.G Approved Equal Request Submittal.

O. Voluntary Alternate Product: This term means a product of the bidder’s choice that was not specified or was not determined by the architect to be equal to a product specified prior to the bid date, and incorporated into the bidder’s bid in accordance with the requirements of Section 011000 – GENERAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS, Paragraph 5.H Voluntary Alternate Proposal.

P. Subject to Compliance with Requirements, Products that May Be Incorporated into the Work Include, but are Not Limited to, the Following: This phrase means – 1. The architect will determine, in his sole judgment, whether a product not named or not included in the specifications, complies with the requirements of the bidding documents. 2. If bidder bases his bid on products not named or not specified, he runs the risk that the product may be determined by the architect to be not in compliance with the requirements of the bidding documents. In such instance, the bidder will then have to provide, at no additional cost to the Owner, a product that is named or specified, or is determined by the architect to be in compliance with the requirements of the bidding documents.

Q. Subject to Compliance with Requirements, Provide Products by One of the Following: This phrase means –

1. Only the products named in the specifications will be considered, and 2. The named products must meet the requirements of the bidding documents 3. The architect will be the sole judge as to whether a product meets the requirements of the

bidding documents. R. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved by Architect through submittal

process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

S. Delegated-Design Services Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit

a written request for additional information to Architect. T. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other

required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed and certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the

Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

U. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer’s product is named and accompanied by the words “basis-of-design product”, including make or model number or other designation. In addition to the basis-of-design product description, product attributes and characteristics may be listed to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other special features and requirements for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturer’s names in specifications.


5. PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. The term “product” as used herein includes the terms “material”, “equipment”, “system”, and

other terms of similar intent. Named Products are products identified by use of the manufacturer’s name for a product or make or model designation, as recorded in published product literature.

B. Materials are products that must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form units of work.

C. Equipment is defined as a product with operational parts, regardless of whether motorized or manually operated, and in particular, a product that requires service connections such as wiring and piping.

D. Substitutions: Requests for changes in the products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by the contract Documents are considered requests for “substitutions”, and are subject to the requirements specified herein. The following are not considered as substitutions: 1. Revisions to the Contract Documents, where requested by the Owner, are considered as

“changes”. 2. Changes requested and approved prior to the Contract date are included in the Contract

Documents. 3. Specified Contractor options on products and construction methods included in the

Contract Documents are choices available to the Contractor. 4. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor’s determination

of and compliance with governing regulations and orders as issued by governing authorities do not constitute “substitutions” and do not constitute a basis for change orders.

E. Quality Assurance 1. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same generic

kind, from a single source. 2. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between

two or more products for use on the project, the product selected shall be compatible with other products previously selected, even if the products previously selected were also Contractor options. Compatibility among choices selected shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

3. Compatibility With Other Materials: If through either the specified substitution process or through voluntary alternates a substitution is accepted, it shall remain the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the substitution is compatible with other materials and systems. Coordinate changes in requirements with other Contractors. The Contractor proposing the substitution shall be responsible for all costs associated with the substitution.

4. Foreign Product Limitations: “Foreign products” as distinguished from “domestic products” are defined as products that are either manufactured substantially (50% or more of value) outside of the United States and its possessions, or produced or supplied by entities known to be substantially owned (more than 50%) by persons who are not citizens of nor living within the United States and its possessions. Except under one or more of the following conditions, select and provide domestic, not foreign, products for inclusion in the work: a. There is no domestic product available that complies with the requirements of

the Contract Documents. b. Available domestic products that comply with requirements of the Contract

Documents are available only at prices or other procurement terms that are substantially higher (25% or more including freight and duty factors) than for available foreign products that comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.


5. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to specify materials to be incorporated in the work that are free from asbestos or other potentially hazardous materials. Compliance with this requirement shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. At the end of the project, the Contractor shall submit a letter addressed to the Owner certifying that none of the materials incorporated in the work contain asbestos or other known hazardous materials currently regulated or controlled by the EPA, Missouri Department of Natural Resources or other governmental agency having jurisdiction.

F. Submittals 1. Materials Schedule: Prepare a product-listing schedule in a form acceptable to the

Architect. Show names of the principal products required for the Work, by generic name. Show proprietary product names and the name of the manufacturer for each item listed that is to be purchased and incorporated into the work.

2. Submittal: Submit the Materials Schedule within two (2) weeks of the contract date. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for known variations from Contract requirements.

G. Approved Equal or Comparable Product Request Submittal 1. If the Contractor desires to substitute any material as an approved equal or comparable

product, he shall make his request in writing to the Architect for approval and obtain approval at least 7 days prior to the date set for opening of the bids. The request must be accompanied by data substantiating the claim that the material or product is equal to that specified and the Contractor shall include all adjustments as required by such changes. Approval of the Architect shall be by Addendum sent to all bidders.

2. Previous approval by the Architect or Owner of materials and products for other projects does not constitute approval for this project.

H. Voluntary Alternate Proposal. Materials, systems and products of the Bidder’s choice may be offered as a voluntary alternate to the items named in the specifications. The procedure for submitting a voluntary alternate proposal is as follows: 1. Bidder must first prepare a complying bid using the bid form provided in the project

manual. Such complying bid must be in strict accordance with the requirements of the drawings and project manual, incorporating the materials, systems and products named in the specifications.

2. Once the above requirement is satisfied, bidder may then offer a voluntary alternate proposal using materials, systems and products NOT named in the specifications. Such voluntary alternate proposal must be prepared in writing on bidder’s letterhead, and must be attached to and submitted along with the complying bid prepared in step “1” above.

3. Each voluntary alternate proposal must be accompanied by full descriptive and technical data on the proposed alternate materials, systems and products.

4. Each voluntary alternate proposal must be accompanied by a statement of the cost to be ADDED TO or DEDUCTED FROM the complying bid prepared under step “1” above if the voluntary alternate(s) is accepted.

5. Prior approval by the Architect and is not required on items submitted as a voluntary alternate proposal.

6. Fort Zumwalt School District reserves the right to accept or reject voluntary alternate proposals.

I. Product Delivery, Storage and Handling: Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft. Deliver, store and handle materials in manner to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. In particular, coordinate delivery and installation to ensure minimum holding of hazardous or easily damaged materials. Neither the Architect nor the Owner will be responsible for receiving or handling products or materials delivered for the project. 1. Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer’s sealed container or other packaging

system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing.

2. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.


3. Store heavy materials away from the project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction.

J. General Product Compliance 1. Requirements for individual products are indicated in the Contract Documents.

Compliance with these requirements is in itself a contract requirement. These requirements may be specified in any one or combination of specifying methods. These methods include: a. Proprietary b. Descriptive c. Performance d. Compliance with Reference Standards

2. Contractor’s options in selecting products are limited by requirements of the Contract Documents and governing regulations. They are not controlled by industry traditions or procedures experienced by Contractor on previous projects. Required procedures include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following for various indicated methods of specifying: a. Proprietary and Semi-proprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or

more products or manufacturers are named, provide one of the products named, at the Contractor’s option. Exclude products that do not comply with specification requirements. Do not provide or offer to provide an unnamed product, unless the specification indicates possible consideration of other products and product has been approved prior to receipt of bids in accordance with requirements above. Advise Architect prior to bidding where none of the named products comply with specification requirements, or are feasible for use.

b. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where the specifications describe a product or assembly generically listing the characteristics required, but without use of a brand or trade name, provide products or assemblies that meet the characteristics indicated and otherwise comply with contract requirements.

c. Performance Specifications Requirements: Where the specifications require compliance with indicated performance requirements, provide products that comply with the specific performance requirements indicated, and that are recommended by the manufacturers for application indicated.

d. Compliance with standards, Codes and Regulations: Where the specifications require only compliance with standards, codes or regulations, select a product that complies with requirements.

e. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product names.

3. Visual Matching: Where matching an established sample is required, the final judgment of whether a proposed product satisfactorily matches the established sample will be determined by the Architect. Where there is no product available within the specified product category that matches the sample satisfactorily and also complies with other specified requirements, comply with the provision of the Contract Documents concerning “substitutions” and “change” for the selection of a matching product in another product category, or for non-compliance with the specified requirements.

4. Visual Selection: Where specifications include the phrase “as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range” or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer’s product line that includes both standard and premium items.

K. Substitutions 1. Conditions: Requests for substitution will be received and considered when extensive

revisions to the Contract Documents are not required, when the proposed changes are in


keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents, when the requests are timely, fully documented and properly submitted, and when one or more of the following conditions is satisfied, all as judged by the Architect. Otherwise, requests will be returned without action except to record non-compliance with these requirements. a. Specified product or method cannot be provided within the Contract Time, or

the product is no longer available, and the Contractor can demonstrate conclusively that this is the case. However, the request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of the Contractor’s failure to pursue the work promptly or to coordinate the various activities properly.

b. Where the specified product or method cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution may be approved.

c. Where a substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear.

d. When the specified product or material cannot be provided in a manner which is compatible with other materials of the work, and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.

e. When the specified product or material cannot be properly coordinated with other materials in the work, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be properly coordinated.

f. When the specified product or material cannot receive a warranty as required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can receive the required warranty.

2. Work-Related Submittals: The Contractor’s submittal of and the Architect’s approval of shop drawings, product data or samples which relate to work not complying with requirements of the Contract Documents, does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for a substitution, or approval thereof. The Architect’s review of a product that has not been approved as a substitution shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to provide products, materials, systems and equipment in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

L. General Product Requirements 1. General: Provide products that comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents

and that are undamaged and unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time of installation. Provide products that are complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. Where Contractor is given an option of materials, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully.

2. Continued Availability: Where, because of the nature or application, the Owner is likely to need replacement parts or additional amounts of a product at a later date, either for maintenance and repair or replacement, provide standard, domestically produced products for which the manufacturer has published assurances that the products and its parts are likely to be available to the Owner at a later date.

3. Nameplates: Except as otherwise indicated for required labels and operating data, do not permanently attach or imprint manufacturer’s or producer’s nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to view either in occupied spaces or on the exterior of the completed installation. a. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or,

where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface which, in occupied spaces, is not conspicuous.

b. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate the nameplate on an easily accessible surface which is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other operating data: (1) Name of manufacturer (2) Name of product (3) Model number


(4) Serial number (5) Capacity (6) Speed (7) Ratings

M. Installation of Products: Except as otherwise indicated in individual sections of these specifications, comply with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for installation of the products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other work. Clean exposed surfaces and protect surfaces as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of acceptance.

6. SUBMITTALS A. Specific submittal requirements for individual units of work are specified in the applicable specification sections. B. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. C. Architect’s Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be

provided by Architect for Contractor’s use in preparing submittals. 1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract

Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital

data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in

AutoCAD or Revit digital drawing software program and operating system. c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement

form acceptable to Owner and Architect. E. Web-Based Project Management Software Package: Provide, administer, and use web-based

Project management software package for purposes of hosting and managing Project communication and documentation until Final Completion.

1. At completion of Project, provide digital archive in format that is readable by common desktop software applications in format acceptable to Architect. Provide data in locked format to prevent further changes.

2. Provide the following Project management software packages under their current published licensing agreements: a. Autodesk; Constructware or BIM 360. b. Procore Technologies, Inc. c. Oracle Primavera Submittal Exchange. d. OR other system approved by Owner and Architect prior to bidding.

3. Costs: a. Include the cost of Submittal Exchange project subscription in bid sum. Contact

Submittal Exchange to verify subscription cost prior to bid due date. E. Allow time for submittal review by Architect, including time for resubmittals. Time for review shall commence on Architect’s receipt of submittal. No extension of the contract time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. 2. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Allow 14 days for review of each resubmittal. F. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Provide means for insertion to permanently record contractor’s review and approval markings and action taken by architect. G. Identify options requiring selection by architect. H. Deviations and additional information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on contractor’s letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by


architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the contract documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. I. Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. J. Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and other as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. K. Retain complete copies of submittals on project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from architect’s action stamp. L. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual specification sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual specification sections. 1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Dropbox (cloud file sharing) folder specifically established by architect for the project. M. Submit actual samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture to architect. 1. Submit one full set (unless architect requests additional sets) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer’s product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. N. Execution 1 Contractor to review each submittal and check for compliance with contract documents. Mark with contractor’s approval stamp before submitting to architect. 2. Include project name, submittal number, specification section title and number, name of reviewer, date of contractor’s approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with contract documents. 3. Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action required of contractor. O. It is expressly understood by the contractor that the Architect’s actions regarding submittals shall

in no way relieve the contractor from performing work in accordance with the contract documents. Any and all errors on submittals are and shall remain the responsibility of the contractor.

7. REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the

Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by

Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor’s

work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or

interpretation. C. Architect’s Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.

Allow seven working days for Architect’s response for each RFI. 1. Architect’s action may include a request for additional information, in which case

Architect’s time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 2. Architect’s action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the

Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal. a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or

the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within five days of receipt of the RFI response.

F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log insert time.

G. On receipt of Architect’s action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within three days if Contractor disagrees with response.


8. INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Except where more explicit or more stringent requirements are written

directly into the Contract Documents, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if copied directly into Contract Documents. Such industry standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. Individual specification sections indicate which codes and standards the Contractor must keep available at the project site for reference.

B. Referenced Standards (standards referenced directly in Contract Documents) take precedence over non-referenced standards which are recognized in industry for applicability to the Work.

C. Except as otherwise limited by the Contract Document, non-referenced standards recognized in the construction industry are defined as having direct applicability to the Work and will be enforced for the performance of the Work. The decision as to whether an industry code or standard is applicable to the Work, or as to which of several standards are applicable, is the sole authority of the Architect and Construction Manager.

D. Except as otherwise indicated, where compliance with an industry standard is required, comply with standards in effect as of date of Contract Documents. At the request of the Architect, Owner, or governing authority, submit a change order proposal where an applicable industry code or standard has been revised and reissued after the date of the Contract Documents and before the performance of the work affected. The Architect will decide whether to issue the change order to proceed with the updated standard.

E. Where compliance with two or more standards is specified, and where these standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, the most stringent requirement will be enforced, unless the Contract Documents specifically indicate a less stringent requirement. Refer requirements that are different, but apparently equal, and uncertainties as to which quality level is more stringent to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. In every instance the quantity or quality level shown or specified is intended to be minimum for the work to be provided or performed. Unless otherwise indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly, within specified tolerance, with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or may exceed that minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with these requirements, the indicated numeric values are either maximum or minimum values, as noted, or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Architect through the Construction Manager for decision before proceeding.

F. The Contract Documents require that each entity performing work be experienced in that part of the work being performed. Each entity is also required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to that part of the work. 1. Where copies of standards are needed for proper performance of the work, the Contractor

is required to obtain such copies directly from the publication source. 2. Although certain copies of standards needed for enforcement of the requirements may be

required submittals, the Architect reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit additional copies of these standards as necessary for enforcement of the requirements.

G. Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where acronyms or abbreviations are used in the specifications or other Contract Documents they are defined to mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards generating organization, governing authority or other entity applicable to the context of the test provision.

9. GOVERNING REGULATIONS/AUTHORITIES A. Comply with governing regulations, codes, and standards required for the work. These

requirements include obtaining permits, licenses, inspections, releases, and similar documentation, as well as payments, statements, and similar requirements associated with regulations, codes and standards. The term “Regulations” is defined to include laws, statutes, ordinances, and lawful orders issued by governing authorities, as well as those rules, covenants, and agreements within the construction industry which effectively control the performance of the work regardless of whether they are lawfully imposed by governing authority or not.

B. Contact governing authorities directly for necessary information and decisions having a bearing on performance of the work.

C. For the Owner’s records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar


documents, correspondence, and records established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the work. The Owner will pay the cost of the construction permits issued by the City and the local Fire Protection District. The cost of any/all other permits and licenses is the responsibility of the Contractor.

10. SCHEDULES, REPORTS, AND PAYMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate both the listing and timing of reports and other activities required by

provisions of this and other sections, so as to provide consistency and logical coordination between the reports. Maintain coordination and correlation between separate reports by updating at monthly or shorter time intervals. Make appropriate distribution of each report and updated report to all parties involved in the work including the Architect and Owner. In particular, provide close coordination of the progress schedule, schedule of values, listing of subcontracts, schedule of submittals, progress reports, and payment requests.

B. Progress Schedule: Within five working days after being awarded the Contract, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a Contractor’s construction schedule. The Contractor shall participate with and cooperate with other Contractors, Subcontractors and Owner in reviewing and coordinating all schedules for incorporation into the Project schedule. The Contractor shall make revisions to the construction schedule as deemed necessary by the Owner.

C. Contractor shall include in the bid any overtime work deemed necessary to complete the Project by the Substantial Completion deadline.

D. Requests for time extensions due to weather delays will be considered only when the contractor can document that such delays have been excessive and atypical for the season and region in which the work is being performed.

E. Schedule of Values: Prepare and submit to the Architect and Owner a schedule of values, as required by the General Conditions. Provide listing of Subcontractors, listing of products and principal suppliers and fabricators. Provide breakdown of the Contract sum by both labor and material. Break down principal subcontract amounts into several line items. Round off to nearest whole dollar, but with total equal to Contract Sum.

F. Payment Requests: 1. Application Transmittal: Submit 2 executed copies of each payment application, one

copy of which is completed with waivers of lien, certified payroll reports, and similar attachments. Send the payment applications with a transmittal form listing those attachments, and recording appropriate information related to the payment application in a manner acceptable to the Owner. Transmit to the Architect by means ensuring receipt within 24 hours and an electronic copy to be sent to the Owner.

2. Except as otherwise indicated, the progress payment cycle is to be regular. Each application shall be consistent with previous applications and payments. Certain applications for payment, such as the initial application, the application at substantial completion, and the final payment application involve additional requirements: a. Contractors shall use standard AIA payment application forms. b. Waivers of Lien: For each payment application, submit waivers of lien from

every entity in excess of $100 arising out of the Contract, and related to work covered by the payment. Submit partial waivers for the amount requested, prior to deduction of retainage, on each item. When the application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.

c. Waiver Delays: At the Contractor’s option, each progress payment may be submitted with waivers from the Subcontractors or Sub-Subcontractors and suppliers for the previous period of construction covered by the previous application. The final payment application shall be submitted together with or preceded by final or complete waivers from every entity involved with performance of the work covered by the payment request.

d. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers on forms and executed in a manner acceptable to the Owner.

e. Payments on account of the Contract Sum will be made to the Contractor by the Owner approximately 30 days after approval of the application for payment by the Owner. The amount of the payment will be as follows:


1.) Ninety Five Percent (95%) of the amount claimed by the contractor and approved by the Architect and Owner which is properly allocable to labor expended in completing the work.

2.) Ninety Five Percent (95%) of the amount claimed by the Contractor and approved by the Architect and Owner which is properly allocated to materials and equipment incorporated in the Work or suitably stored at the site or at some other location agreed upon in writing. Contractors submitting invoices for material stored at any location other than on the job site must submit with the application for payment the location of the stored materials and equipment, proof of delivery, and a Certificate of Insurance to cover such material. Documentation shall be to the satisfaction of and approved by the Architect and Owner. Late applications for payment will not be processed for payment until the next regular payment cycle.

3.) Five Percent (5%) retainage will be held on the Contract Amount until such time as Substantial Completion and Owner acceptance. See “Project Closeout”, below, for items to be completed and documentation to be submitted to the Owner before final payment.

f. Contractor shall submit Certified Payroll Reports in compliance with the Prevailing Wage Law with each monthly pay application.

G. EXTRA WORK 1. Where applicable, Unit Prices as established in the Contract may be used in arriving at

the cost of any extra work, or in the absence of unit prices, the cost of extra work may be determined as follows: a. The combined overhead and profit markup shall include all contractor

compensation (overhead & profit, general conditions, supervision, estimating, procurement, safety, quality control/assurance, protection, security, temporary utilities/facilities, cleanup, small tools, radios, vehicles, and all home/jobsite office costs and expenses) except for trade labor to perform the Work and materials installed as part of the Work that is retained by the Owner. The combined overhead and profit markup included in the total cost to the Owner for a change in the Work, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, shall be based on the following schedule:

i. For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor’s own forces, 10% of the cost.

ii. For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor’s Subcontractors, 5% of the amount due the Subcontractors.

iii. For each Subcontractor involved, for Work performed by that Subcontractor’s own forces, 10% of the cost

iv. For each change in the Work, overhead and profit shall not exceed 15% of the total cos for Contractor and Subcontractors combined.

b. In determining the cost of extra work the Contractor will not be allowed additional compensation for supervision or other such help as is already at the site unless the Architect also authorizes an extension of time for the completion of the Contractor’s extra work.

2. If the Owner decides to proceed with the work, the Architect will deliver a written order for the lump sum figures agreed upon. NO EXTRA WORK shall be done by Contractor until he has received a written order authorizing such work or is specifically directed in writing by the Owner to proceed with the extra work.

3. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Architect and the Owner to obtain the lowest market prices on suitable materials and labor involved.

4. Claims and/or invoices for extra work must be submitted monthly as the work progresses based on the percentage of work completed. Any/all claims for extras MUST be submitted during the monthly pay period that the need for such extra work arises or the claim will be denied.


5. ALL FINAL BILLINGS AND EXTRAS ARE TO BE SUBMITTED NO LATER THAN TEN (10) DAYS AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. ANY BILLINGS OR EXTRAS RECEIVED AFTER THIS DATE WILL BE DENIED.

H. Payment Application Times: The date for submitting each payment application to the Owner/Architect is as indicated in the Owner-Contractor Agreement, or if none is indicated therein, no later than the last day of the month for work completed through the 25th day of the month. For pay applications submitted on-time and processed and approved in a timely manner by the Architect and Owner, payment will be issued by the Owner to the Contractor within thirty (30) days.

I. Application Preparation: Complete application including notarization and execution by authorized persons. Incomplete applications will be returned without action. Entries must match current schedule of values and progress schedule and report. Listing must include separate line items for any allowances and for amounts of change orders issued prior to last day of the “period of construction” covered by application.

J. Initial Payment Application: The principal administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with submittal of Contractor’s first payment application can be summarized as follows, but not necessarily by way of limitation. 1. Listing of Subcontractors and principal suppliers and fabricators. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Schedule of submittals (preliminary if not final). 4. Listing of Contractor’s staff assignments and principal consultants. 5. Construction progress schedule

K. Application at Time of Substantial Completion: Following issuance of Architect’s final Certificate of Substantial Completion, the documents to be submitted by the Contractor with the monthly pay application shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Occupancy permits and similar approvals or certifications by governing authorities and

franchised services, assuring Owner’s full access and use of completed work. 2. Warranties, guarantees, maintenance agreements and similar provisions of Contract

Documents. 3. Test/adjust/balance records and reports, maintenance instructions, meter readings, start-

up performance reports, and similar change-over information germane to Owner’s occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance of completed work.

4. Application for reduction of retainage. 5. Advice to Owner on coordination of shifting insurance coverages, including proof of

extended coverages as required. 6. Listing of Contractor’s incomplete work, recognized as exceptions to the certificate of

substantial completion. L. Final Payment Application: The required actions and submittals which must precede or coincide

with submittal of Contractor’s final payment application can be summarized as follows, but not necessarily by way of limitation: 1. Completion of project closeout requirements contained in Article 14 of these General and

Administrative Requirements 2. Completion of items specified for completion beyond time of Substantial Completion 3. Assurance, satisfactory to Owner, that unsettled claims will be settled 4. Removal of temporary facilities, services, surplus materials, rubbish and similar

elements. 5. Change-over of door locks and other contractor’s access provisions to Owner’s property.

11. PROJECT MEETINGS A. A Pre-Construction Conference will be held at a place and time to be determined by the Owner.

The Contractor and major Subcontractors shall attend. The purpose of the conference is to review procedures (as required by the Contract Documents) and to discuss questions regarding the Contract Documents. The Owner and Architect will make all possible clarifications.

B. Progress meetings will be held weekly or bi-weekly throughout the project. The purpose of the meetings will be to review progress, needed manpower to maintain the construction schedule, discuss delivery and scheduling requirements, and to resolve problems or issues affecting the


project. Progress meetings will be held at the job site at a time to be determined by the Owner. All contractors and subcontractors must be represented at these meetings as dictated by the progress of the work and scheduling requirements and/or as required by the Owner. Representatives of the contractors and subcontractors shall be thoroughly familiar with the project, and shall have authority to speak and act on behalf of the contractor or subcontractor they represent. The Contractor shall prepare minutes of the progress meetings and distribute copies to the subcontractors.

12. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND SERVICES A. This section specifies the Contractor’s administrative and procedural requirements for providing

temporary services and facilities, including such items as temporary utility service, temporary construction and support facilities, and project security and protection, are indicated below.

B. No cost or usage charges for temporary services or facilities are chargeable to the Owner. Cost or use charges for temporary services or facilities are to be included in the Contractor’s bid and will not be accepted as a basis of claim for a change-order extra.

C. Comply with requirements of local laws and regulations governing construction and local industry standards in the installation and maintenance of temporary services and facilities.

D. Provide each temporary service or facility ready for use when the service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in performance of the work. Maintain, expand as required, and modify temporary facilities and services as needed throughout the progress of the work. Do not remove until services or facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by the authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

E. Operate temporary services and facilities in a safe and efficient manner. Do not overload facilities and do not permit them to interfere with the progress of the work. Do not allow unsanitary conditions, public nuisances or hazardous conditions to develop or persist on the site.

F. The temporary facilities and services required of the Contractor are as follows: 1. Bracing and Shoring

a. Provide bracing and shoring as required to maintain work in a safe and acceptable condition.

b. For structural work requiring bracing or shoring, maintain final design deflection limits throughout course of construction until final bracing work is installed.

c. Provide shoring and bracing as required to meet OSHA and other governmental and regulatory requirements, and as directed by the Architect.

d. If required or requested by the Architect, provide design drawings for bracing work. Design drawings for bracing shall be prepared by a structural engineer licensed in the State of Missouri, and shall bear the seal of the structural engineer preparing bracing design.

2. Field offices and all office equipment, furniture, and supplies 3. Temporary telephone service. 4. Temporary heat and cold weather protection for field office and for construction

activities. 5. Temporary toilets. Contractor to provide and maintain adequate number of temporary

toilet facilities for all workmen. Contractor will be responsible for maintaining and cleaning toilets on a regular basis.

6. Project cleanup, including general housekeeping throughout construction and final cleanup.

7. Temporary enclosures. Provide tight and secure temporary enclosures including temporary fences, to all openings and areas as required to protect the building and materials therein from vandalism and/or as directed by the Architect.

8. Storage facilities. Provide storage facilities of adequate capacity on the premises for safe storage of materials or as determined necessary by the Architect.

9. Barriers. Properly barricade any openings or excavations and provide all guards, lights and signals for the safety of the public or required by ordinances and as directed by the Architect.


10. Pay for necessary inspection fees required by local governing authorities. Owner will obtain and pay for the general construction permits issued by the City of O’Fallon and the O’Fallon Fire Department. Any and all other permits or licenses required are the responsibility of the Contractor.

11. Dumpsters. Provide and pay all costs for dumpsters, trash removal, disposal, and any associated fees.

12. Supervision. Provide a knowledgeable and qualified superintendent full-time at the job site. Project superintendent shall be present at site when any of the work is being performed.

13. Drinking water. Provide drinking water and ice throughout the duration of the project. 14. Layout. Provide layout for all trades, including, but not limited to, building site and

location of all improvements including establishing and maintaining all grades, lines and elevations for all trades. If applicable, employ registered surveyor or professional engineer to establish grades, elevations and benchmarks for building construction and site grading work. Erect and maintain with batter boards. If batter boards or benchmarks become dislocated, have surveyor or engineer reestablish. Maintain benchmarks and batter boards for as long as required for completion of the work. Establish and layout partitions, slabs and forms as work progresses.

15. Temporary structures, barricades, enclosures and dust and security control. Provide temporary ladders, runways, barricades, closures, railings and other temporary structures required throughout the work to protect and secure new work, existing construction and improvements, persons and property from damage and injury. Protect work from damage due to construction operations, weather, dust and dirt. Provide barriers at excavations. Provide guards, lights, signals and other devices required to ensure the safety of the public, in accordance with governing agencies having jurisdiction and as directed by the Architect.

16. Demolition, cutting and patching as indicated, required, or as directed by the Architect. 17. Temporary water. Furnish and maintain temporary water service for construction

including necessary connections and extensions throughout construction. 18. Temporary electricity. Furnish and maintain necessary power connections and

extensions required throughout the project. Make power available to all subcontractors. 19. The Owner will pay for the utility metered cost for both temporary electric and water

needed for construction purposes, and will pay tap-on fees required by utility companies for water, sewers, electricity and gas.

20. Temporary lighting. Furnish and maintain temporary lighting throughout the project where required for performance of the work and where deemed necessary by the Architect. Temporary lighting shall provide a uniform lighting level adequate for work being performed. Upon completion, remove temporary lighting including wires, fixtures and lamps.

21. Provide and maintain temporary on-site construction and access roads and parking areas. Clean adjoining public roads and streets when mud or dirt is tracked onto such areas. At completion of work, repair to Owner’s satisfaction all areas damaged by contractor’s performance of the work.

22. Safety. Provide all safety equipment, railing, guards and the like, and take all necessary measures to ensure the safety of Contractor’s workmen and all workmen who may be impacted by Contractor’s work.

23. De-watering necessary for the construction of the footings & foundations and all other work.

24. All erosion and siltation control, and providing a vehicle wash-down area and necessary street cleaning.

25. Any other items/services/materials/equipment required to carry out the work. 13. QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES A. Required inspection and testing services are intended to assist in the determination of probable

compliance of the work with requirements specified or indicated. These required services do not


relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with these requirements or for compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. The requirements of this article relate primarily to on-site quality control and contract compliance of the work, not to the production of standard products. Quality control services include inspections and tests and related actions performed by independent agencies and governing authorities. 1. Specific quality control requirements for individual units of work are specified in

applicable sections. 2. Inspections, tests and related actions specified in this section and elsewhere in the

Contract Documents are not intended to limit the Contractor’s own quality control procedures.

3. This section does not limit requirements for quality control services required by the Owner, governing authorities or other authorized entities.

C. Contractor Responsibilities: Except where indicated as the Contractor’s responsibility, or to be provided by another identified entity, quality control services are the Owner’s responsibility. These services include those specified to be performed by an independent agency and not directly by the Contractor. Costs for these services are the Owner’s responsibility. Re-testing of work revised or replaced by the Contractor is the Contractor’s responsibility, where tests were performed on original work. A copy of any/all quality control reports shall be sent to the Architect and the Owner.

D. Responsibility for Associated Services: The Contractor is required to cooperate with the agencies performing inspections, tests and similar services. Provide such auxiliary services as requested. These auxiliary services include but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Notifying testing agency sufficiently in advance of work requiring testing to allow time

to assign testing agency personnel. 2. Coordinating timing of work requiring test results to ensure no work is covered until test

results are determined. 3. Providing access to the work. 4. Taking samples or assistance with taking samples. 5. Delivery of samples to test laboratories. 6. Security for and protection of samples and test equipment at the project site.

E. Coordination: Contractor shall coordinate work with each quality control agency to avoid delays in the work and need to remove or replace work.

F. Repair and Protection: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking and similar services performed on the work, repair damaged work and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in the visual qualities of exposed finishes. Repair and protection of work is the Contractor’s responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services.

14. CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Definition: “Cutting & patching” includes cutting into existing construction to provide for the

installation or performance of new work and subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. “Cutting and patching” is performed for coordination of the work, to uncover work for access or inspection, to obtain samples for testing, to permit alterations to be performed or for other similar purposes.

C. Cutting and patching performed during the manufacture of products, or during the initial fabrication, erection or installation processes is not considered to be “cutting and patching” under this definition.

D. “Demolition” is a related-but-separate item of work, which may or may not require cutting and patching.

E. Refer to other sections of these specifications for specific cutting and patching requirements and limitations applicable to individual units of work.

F. Quality Assurance


1. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural work in a manner that would result in a reduction of load-carrying capacity or of load-deflection ratio. Do not cut and patch foundations and structural work without Construction Manager’s approval.

2. Do not cut and patch operational elements or safety related components in a manner that would result in a reduction of their capacity to perform in the manner intended, including energy performance, or that would result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or decreased safety.

G. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch exposed work in a manner that would, in the Architect’s opinion, result in lessening the building’s aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch work in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cut and patch work. Remove and replace work judged by the Architect to be cut and patched in an unsatisfactory manner.

H. Where prior approval of cutting and patching is required, submit proposed procedures for this work well in advance of the time work will be performed and request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the submittal: 1. Describe nature of the work and how it is to be performed, indicating why cutting and

patching cannot be avoided. Describe anticipated results of the work in terms of changes to existing work, including structural, operation and visual changes as well as other significant elements.

2. List products to be used and firms that will perform work. 3. Give dates when work is expected to be performed. 4. List utilities that will be affected by work, including those that will be relocated and those

that will be out-of-service temporarily. Indicate how long utility service will be disrupted.

I. Materials: Except as otherwise indicated or as directed by the Architect, use materials for cutting and patching that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available, or cannot be used, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials for cutting and patching that will result in equal-or-better performance characteristics.

J. Inspection: Before cutting, examine the surfaces to be cut and patched and the conditions under which the work is to be performed. If unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding with the work. Before the start of cutting work, meet at the work site with all parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades when applicable. Review areas of potential interference and conflict between the various trades. Coordinate layout of the work and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding with the work.

K. Preparation 1. Provide temporary support of work to be cut. 2. Protection: Protect other work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide

protection from adverse weather conditions for that part of the project that may be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

3. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

L. Performance 1. Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching work. Except as otherwise

indicated or as approved by the Architect, proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete work without delay.

2. Cutting: Cut the work using methods that are least likely to damage adjoining work to remain. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with original installer’s recommendations. a. In general, where cutting is required use hand or small power tools designed for

sawing or grinding. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

3. By-pass pipes, conduits, and utilities before cutting, where such services are indicated to be removed, relocated or abandoned. Cut off conduit and pipe in walls or partitions to be


removed. After by-pass and cutting, cap, valve or plug and seal tight remaining portion of pipe and conduit.

4. Remove any paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

15. PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Guarantees: If, within the time limits of guarantee specified, any of the work is found to be

defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly. Guarantees are specified under the appropriate sections. If not specified, minimum guarantee is one year.

B. Final Payment: Final payment will not be made until the following items have been completed, as applicable: 1. Closeout Documents Required from Contractors:

a. Letter from contractor certifying that all punch list items have been completed. b. Letter from contractor certifying that no asbestos-containing materials were used or

incorporated into the project. c. Operation/maintenance instruction & service manuals d. Manufacturers’ warranties for applicable materials and equipment (one copy each) e. Test and balance report from mechanical contractor for HVAC system f. Roofing warranty from manufacturer g. Typed list of paint colors used including name of manufacturer, manufacturer’s color

name and number, and type of sheen. h. Contractor’s and subcontractors’ guarantees (minimum 1 year) submitted on

company letter head i. Affidavit of Compliance with Prevailing Wage Law j. Certified Payroll Reports k. Certificate of Substantial Completion, AIA G704 l. Consent of Surety to Final Payment, AIA G707 m. Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debs and Claims, AIA G706 n. Documentation substantiating final adjustment of allowances, if any o. Final claims for extras/change orders with substantiating documentation p. Signed copies of all change orders q. Final application for payment r. Waivers of lien marked “FINAL” s. As-built drawings in electronic and paper format t. Final approval/occupancy permit from local building officials u. Final approval/occupancy permit from local fire protection district v. Closeout materials and equipment including any and all keys for doors and/or

casework, tagged and labeled, owner’s stock delivered and stored at job site including filters and belts for mechanical equipment

w. Closeout demonstrations by Contractors to include HVAC systems, equipment and DDC controls, plumbing systems and equipment, electrical systems and equipment, voice and data systems and equipment, food service equipment, and fire protection system.

16. OWNER’S STOCK A. Contractors are to furnish extra materials identified below to match products installed. Deliver

products to the project site in manufacturer’s original, unopened cartons and containers, each bearing the name of the product and manufacturer, project identification, and handling instructions. Obtain written proof of delivery from Owner. Product Quantity 1 Paint, stain, varnish 1 un-opened gallon each color, type and sheen 2 LVT 5 cartons each field color, 2 cartons each accent color

(if applicable)


3 Vinyl/rubber base 1 carton each color, type, and size 4 Treads & risers 1 carton each color and type 5 Ceramic tile 3 cartons each field color, 1 carton each accent color 6 Ceramic base 1 carton each color, type, and size 7 Carpet One 6’ x 6’ remnant each color and type and/or One

box of each color and style modular carpet tiles 8 Acoustical ceiling pads 2 cartons each type 9 Belts, filters, etc. See mechanical specifications requirements

17. ALLOWANCES A Bidders are to include in their bid the following allowance. A change order will be issued at the

end of the project for either an add to the contract if the allowance is exceeded or a deduct to the contract for the portion not used.

1. $15,000 for remediating unsuitable soil conditions that may be encountered in areas under the

building or parking lot. 18. Unit Pricing Not applicable

19. ALTERNATES A. The amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding

requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the

Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract

Sum to incorporate alternates into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

B. It is the responsibility of the Contractors to examine the drawings and specifications for alternate work

required and to include all adjustments for such work with their bids. The following is a general description of the 5 Alternate Bids:

Alternate #1: IT Addition Shell Only Indicate the amount to be ADDED to the Base Bid to construct the exterior shell only for the IT Addition as indicated per the plans and specs.

Alternate #2: IT Addition Interior Finish Indicate the amount to be ADDED to the Base Bid to construct the IT Addition as indicated per the plans and specs. Alternate #3: Skylights at Meeting Room 112 Indicate the amount to be ADDED to the Base Bid to add four (4) skylights AND skylight shades at the large meeting room as indicated on the plans and specs. Alternate #4: Skylights at Work Room Area 234 Indicate the amount to be ADDED to the Base Bid to add two (2) skylights at the open office area as indicated on the plans and specs.


20. GUARANTEES Unless indicated otherwise, the contractor shall provide a one (1) year guarantee for all parts, labor, materials, and equipment from the date of substantial completion. The contractor shall make all corrections, replacements, and repairs without additional cost to the Owner during the period of guarantee.

21. SAFETY

The Contractor is responsible for and must take all steps necessary to ensure the safety of all workers, and ensure that the work is performed in accordance with current requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). All on-site workers must have proof of successful completion of a ten-hour OSHA construction safety program. Contractors shall conduct a weekly safety tool box safety talk. An accident report must be furnished to the Owner on any injury requiring medical treatment.

22. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS The Contractor is to submit to the Owner one (1) copy of marked-up record prints reflecting changes to the contractor’s scope of work. Record prints are to be marked showing the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Contractor to also provide as-built documents required by governing authorities.

23. CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME

A. If the contractor wishes to make a claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice for such claims must be submitted to the Owner. The contractor’s claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the work. In the case of continuing delay, only one claim is necessary.

B. If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a claim for additional time, such claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. (1) The contractor shall notify the Owner and Architect by phone, fax or email on or before the

day of the adverse weather condition. (2) The notification identifies the time critical trades which will be delayed by the adverse

weather conditions (3) The contractor demonstrates the schedule impact of the weather day (4) The contractor submits documentation of the adverse weather condition based on National

Weather Service (NOAA) reports (5) The adverse weather condition prevents the Contractor from working on the Project more than

six (6) hours of the work day in question; and (6) The contractor demonstrates that lost time cannot be recovered by adding additional

manpower in the affected trades or other trades during standard pay rate work periods, or that additional manpower is not available when needed.

C. The following chart of average monthly lost work days due to adverse weather are to be incorporated into the construction schedule and shall be the basis for determination of the number of lost work days due to adverse weather conditions.

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec

9 6 8 6 7 7 6 5 6 7 8 8

END OF SECTION 01 1000

FORT ZUMWALT SCHOOL DISTRICT 201810.00 PROFFESIONAL DEVELOPMENT CENTER

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Specifications on the Structural Drawings shall take precedence over the requirements of this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including but not limited to formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Concrete. 2. Footings. 3. Foundation walls. 4. Slabs-on-grade.

B. Related Sections include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Division 3 Section “Polished Concrete”. 2. See civil engineering documents "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 3. See civil engineering documents for "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete

pavement and walks.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Samples: For waterstops and vapor barrier.

E. Welding certificates.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

G. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:



1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Waterstops. 6. Curing compounds. 7. Bonding agents. 8. Vapor barriers. 9. Semirigid joint filler. 10. Joint-filler strips. 11. Repair materials.

H. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements to determine compliance with specified tolerances.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

1. Qualified installer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience with projects similar in scope.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."

E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

F. Concrete Testing Service: Owner shall engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to perform special inspections.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.



B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

B. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.

C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.



2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I , gray.

a. Fly Ash: Maximum 15% of total cement content..

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches for slabs-on-grade, 3/4 inch nominal for all other cast-in-place concrete.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.6 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.

2.7 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, with factory-installed metal eyelets, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Greenstreak.



b. Progress Unlimited, Inc. c. Williams Products, Inc.

B. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572,[ with factory-installed metal eyelets,] for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Bometals, Inc. b. Greenstreak. c. Meadows, W. R., Inc. d. Murphy, Paul Plastics Co. e. Progress Unlimited, Inc. f. Tamms Industries, Inc. g. Vinylex Corp.

2.8 VAPOR BARRIERS

A. Plastic Vapor Barriers: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape and mastic sealant accessories.

1. Available Products:

a. Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Ultra A, 15 mils. b. Insulation Solutions, Inc. (ISI); Viper Vaporcheck, 16 mils. c. Meadows, W.R., Inc.; Perminator, 15 mils. d. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 15 mils.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not exceeding 0.02 grains/h x sq. ft. x inches Hg; ASTM E 154.

2.9 CURING MATERIALS

A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

B. Water: Potable.

2.10 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber .

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.



1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. No water-soluble, chloride-ion content shall be present in hardened concrete.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 517 lb/cu. yd. 3. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 . 4. Slump Limit: 2 to 4 inches , plus or minus 1 inch. 5. Air Content: 6.0 percent, plus or minus 1.0 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch

nominal maximum aggregate size.

B. Foundation Walls and Concrete Frames: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 517 lb/cu. yd.



3. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 . 4. Slump Limit: 3 to 5 inches , plus or minus 1 inch. 5. Air Content: 6.0 percent, plus or minus 1.0 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch

nominal maximum aggregate size.

C. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 564 lb/cu. yd.. 3. Slump Limit: 3 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 6.0 percent, plus or minus 1.0 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch

nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of interior troweled finished floors to exceed 2

percent for 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

2.14 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.15 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

E. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.



F. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

G. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

H. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

I. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

J. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

K. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

3.3 VAPOR BARRIERS

A. Plastic Vapor Barriers: Place, protect, and repair vapor barriers according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

2. Seal closely spaced multi-pipe/conduit penetrations with manufacturer’s recommended mastic sealant.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.



1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets 8 inches, minimum. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Space vertical joints in walls at 100 feet maximum. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

3. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.6 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.



3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of



ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, .

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 40; and of levelness, F(L) 35; with

minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 28; and of levelness, F(L) 21; for slabs-on-grade.



3. Use steel reinforced plastic trowel blade to avoid black-burnish marks at areas to received ground and polished concrete floor finish. Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.



3.12 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. For areas to received ground and polished concrete finish, refer to manufacturer’s recommendations prior to the installation of any sealing coat.

3.13 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that



penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and/or qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Inspections include, but may not be limited to the following:

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Verification of use of required design mixture. 4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 6. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 50 cu. yd. or fraction

thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.



a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

8. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply with the Contract Documents.



UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 1

SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).

2. Face brick.

3. Mortar and grout.

4. Steel reinforcing bars.

5. Masonry joint reinforcement.

6. Ties and anchors.

7. Embedded flashing.

8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

9. Furnish and install “Knox-Box”es in locations, quantities and types as required by

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles for unit

masonry.

2. Section 071919 "Silicone Water Repellents" applied to masonry veneers.

3. Section 072100 “Thermal Insulation” for continuous insulation installed behind masonry

veneers.

4. Section 072726 “Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barrier” applied to sheathing in cavity

walls.

5. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing and for

furnishing manufactured reg lets installed in masonry joints.

6. Section 078413 “Penetration Firestopping” for firestopping at openings in masonry walls.

7. Section 078446 “Fire-Resistive Joint System” for fire-resistive joint system at heads of

masonry walls.

8. Section 079200 “Joint Sealants” for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.



1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days.

1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive

strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1

and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.

2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.

Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show

elevations of reinforced walls.

3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

C. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Colored mortar.

2. Weep holes/vents.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:

1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks.

2. Special brick shapes.

3. Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on

Project.

4. Weep vents.

5. Accessories embedded in masonry.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with

manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers,

source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix

proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.

1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup

constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations

are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.



a. Include data on material properties and material test reports substantiating

compliance with requirements.

b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls

within specified tolerances.

c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67.

d. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations

establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.

2. Integral water repellent used in CMUs.

3. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.

4. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

5. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

6. Reinforcing bars.

7. Joint reinforcement.

8. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of

ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test

according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water

retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with

compressive strength requirement.

E. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type

and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units,

mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to

Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

F. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and

equipment to be used to comply with requirements.


A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and

color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source

from single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,

including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious

component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

C. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by

requirements in the Contract Documents.

D. Fire-Resistive Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those

of assemblies with fire-resistive ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting

agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.



E. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality

Requirements" for mockups.

1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes

approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high by full thickness.

2. Where masonry is to match existing, erect panels adjacent and parallel to existing

surface.

3. Clean one-half of exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated.

4. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.

5. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;

relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints;

aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities

specifically approved by Architect in writing.

a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are


6. Leave sample panel in place as required to allow field application test of field applied

sealer specified in a separate section.

F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for each type of exposed unit masonry construction, typical exterior wall

in sizes approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high by full

thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories.

a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches (400 mm) long mockup.

b. Include lower corner of window opening at upper corner of exterior wall mockup.

Make opening approximately 12 inches (300 mm) wide by 16 inches (400 mm)

high.

c. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch (600-mm) length in corner of

exterior wall mockup approximately 16 inches (400 mm) down from top of

mockup, with a 12-inch (300-mm) length of flashing left exposed to view (omit

masonry above half of flashing).

d. Include CMU substrate, veneer anchors, flashing, cavity drainage material, fluid-

applied membrane air barriers and weep holes in exterior masonry-veneer wall

mockup.

e. Include metal studs, sheathing, building wrap, sheathing joint-and-penetration

treatment, veneer anchors, flashing, cavity drainage material, and weep holes in

exterior masonry-veneer wall mockup.

2. Where masonry is to match existing, erect mockups adjacent and parallel to existing

surface.

3. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated.

4. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.

5. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of

mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities

of workmanship.



a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities


b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved

by Architect in writing.

6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an

enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If

units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not

use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and

contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with

dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms,

under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt

and oil.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with

waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when

construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold cover

securely in place.

2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,

secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe

and hold cover in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least

three days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left

exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such

masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading

coverings on ground and over wall surface.



2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings.

4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice

or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost

or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40

deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than

seven days after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to

contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units

where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-

resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent

masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed

faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,

bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units

and backup, substrate or structural bearing units in exterior wall assemblies.

1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does

not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested

according to ASTM E 514 as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral

water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours,

shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:



1) ACM Chemistries; RainBloc.

2) BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Plus.

3) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block.

C. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive

strength of 2,800 = psi.

2. Density Classification: Normal weight (max 135 pcf) unless otherwise indicated.

3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.

4. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's

sample.

5. U.L. Design number rating as indicated on drawings.

2.3 MASONRY LINTELS

A. General: Provide one of the following:

B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs

with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels

before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured. Masonry

contractor is responsible for designing and supplying temporary masonry support.

2.4 BRICK

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and

color of exposed faces of adjacent units:

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose

unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces

finished.

2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special

conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels.

3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on

exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.

4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in

sawed surfaces being exposed to view.

B. Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Brick: Gray color brick and texture as selected by Architect from full range of

options.

1) Local Distributor is Midwest Block and Brick. Contact: Mark Wilhelms @

314.226.3780.

2. Grade: SW.

3. Type: FBS.



4. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive

strength of approximately 10,000 psi.

5. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when

tested per ASTM C 67.

6. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated

"not effloresced."

7. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4inches high by 7-5/8 inches long.

2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide natural color or white cement as

required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type M.

C. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 91.

1. Products:

a. Holman Masonry Cement.

b. Lafarge North American, Inc.

D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use

in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of

satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors.

b. Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments.

c. Solomon Colors, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors.

2. CMU Veneers Mortar Color: As selected by Architect from full range of options.

E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or

crushed stone.

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing

the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.

3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.

4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce

required mortar color.

F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

G. Cold-Weather Admixture: NOT ALLOWED.

H. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with

CMUs containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.



1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. ACM Chemistries; RainBloc for Mortar.

b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture.

c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar

Admixture.

I. Water: Potable.

2.6 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.

2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.

3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter (UNO).

4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter (UNO).

5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter (UNO).

6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c.

(UNO).

7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder type with single pair of side

rods.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the

following:

a. #220 Lap-Rite Ladder Mesh reinforcing: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. or comparable

product from one of the following:

1) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division.

2) Wire Bond.

2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that

comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with

ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,

with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.

3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway

through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires

are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches (50 mm) parallel to face of veneer.

C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches (100 mm)

wide.



1. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

D. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:

1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and

compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, and as follows:

a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf (445-

N) load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in

excess of 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).

2. Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a metal anchor section and a

connector section designed to engage a continuous wire embedded in the veneer mortar

joint.


1) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 213S.

2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; DW-10-X-Seismiclip.

3) Wire-Bond; RJ-711 with Wire-Bond clip.

b. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 1.05-inch-

(2.66-mm-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.

c. Fabricate wire connector sections from 0.187-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip

galvanized, carbonsteel wire.

3. Polymer-Coated, Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer

head and neoprene or EPDM washer, No. 10 (4.83-mm) diameter, and with organic

polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per

ASTM B 117.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide only screws approved

by the anchor manufacturer.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Anchor Bolts: As indicated.

B. Postinstalled Anchors: As indicated.

2.9 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and interlocking CMU

web covers made from UV-resistant, high-density polyethylene. Cell flashing pans have integral

weep spouts designed to be built into mortar bed joints and that extend into the cell to prevent

clogging with mortar.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mortar Net

Solutions; Blok-Flash, or a comparable product.



B. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal

Manual" and as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.

2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not

exceeding 12 feet (3.7 m). Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal

flashing.

3. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated

to receive counterflashing.

4. Fabricate through-wall flashing and end dams with drip edge unless otherwise indicated.

Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent

down 30 degrees and hemmed.

5. Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) into

wall and 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and

hemmed.

C. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: 7-oz./sq. ft. (2-kg/sq. m) copper sheet bonded between 2

layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.


1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing.

2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Copper Fabric Thru-

Wall Flashing.

3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Fab Flashing.

4) Phoenix Building Products; Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper.

5) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing.

6) York Manufacturing, Inc.; Multi-Flash 500.

D. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:

1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing.

2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal

flashing.

3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal

flashing with a drip edge or flexible flashing with a metal drip edge.

4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing or flexible flashing.

E. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:

1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type

recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.

2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type, grade,

class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and

remain watertight.

F. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products

or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other

and to substrates.



2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;

compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from PVC.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287,

Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in

masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,

Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Weep/Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant

polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm)

less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.


1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent.

2) Blok-Lok Limited; Cell-Vent.

3) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents.

4) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent.

5) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent.

6) Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.

E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not

degrade within the wall cavity.


a. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.

F. Single-Wythe CMU Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that

will not degrade.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mortar Net

Solutions ; BlockNet Drainage Mat, or a comparable product.

G. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry

unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch (3.77-

mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars

indicated.


a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or

D/A 817.

b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner.

c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner.

d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.



2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing

mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without

discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by

cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

b. EaCo Chem, Inc.

c. ProSoCo, Inc.

2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.

Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients

before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the

following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to

provide required compressive strength of masonry.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.

2. For reinforced masonry above grade, use Type S.

D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other

ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.

1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

2. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:

a. Face brick.

E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will

comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces

and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476.

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (203 to 279 mm) as measured according to

ASTM C 143/C 143M.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental

to performance of work.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.

3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness

shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths

indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing

equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous

pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,

unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install

cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and

textures.

1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30

g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so

they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12

mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).



2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or

minus 1/2 inch (12 mm).

3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or

minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4

inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary

from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6

m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6

mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and

expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3

mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in

3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4

inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more

than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances

specified for warpage of units.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch

(3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm).

2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more

than 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8

inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus

1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more

than 1/8 inch (3 mm).

5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line

by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint

thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.

Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at

other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in

running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face

dimensions at corners or jambs.



C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less

than 4-inches (100-mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use

units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in

course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive

mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh

masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.

Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with thermal break per details on drawings.

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of

metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels,

posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof

structure above unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure

above.

2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells

of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to

provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space

anchors 48 inches (1200 mm)o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate,

or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches

final position.

4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure

above to comply with Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."

J. Return CMU veneers 6” min. at all doors, windows and other openings unless noted otherwise

on drawings.

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay brick and CMUs as follows:

1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints.

2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.

3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.

4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where

cells are not grouted.

5. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully embed

anchors and ties in mortar.



B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient

mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head

joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint

thickness unless otherwise indicated.

D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than

paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 CAVITY WALLS

A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:

1. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.

a. Use adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcing eye and pintel to allow for differential

movement regardless of whether bed joints align.

2. Masonry Veneer Anchors.

a. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up

and down.

b. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (406mm) o.c. vertically

and 16 inches (406mm) o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.0

sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of

openings and at intervals, not exceeding 6 inches (914 mm), around perimeter.

B. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using bonding system indicated on Drawings.

C. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds

away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or

remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.

3.7 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8

inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a

minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. (UNO)

2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings

and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous

reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.



3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE

A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or

concrete to comply with the following:

1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide between masonry and

structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar

and other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36

inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally.

3.9 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to metal stud backup with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the

following requirements:

1. Fasten screw-attached and anchors to metal stud backup with metal fasteners of type

indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.

2. Insert slip-in anchors in metal studs as sheathing is installed. Provide one anchor at each

stud in each horizontal joint between sheathing boards.

3. Embed tie sections, connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide

not less than 2 inches (50 mm) of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of

sheathing.

4. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and

down.

5. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically and 16

inches (406 mm) o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.0 sq. ft. of wall

area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals,

not exceeding 6 inches (914 mm), around perimeter.

3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses.

Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-

plane wall or partition movement.

1. Joint Spacing: as indicated on drawings (20’ maximum).

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:

1. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.

2. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint.

Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant.

C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows:

1. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 1/2

inch (13 mm) for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 "Joint

Sealants."



D. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a

compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," but not less than 1/2 inch.

1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.

3.11 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated.

1. Provide horizontal control joints where vertical control joints intersect steel lintels,

installed in accordance with BIA Technotes 18A, Fig. 7, with sealant and backer rod

specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants”, but not less than 3/8 inch joint width.

B. Provide concrete or masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 24 inches

(610 mm) for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

3.12 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,

other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at

shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where

indicated.

1. Install corners and end dams in accordance with BIA Technotes 21B.

B. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to

comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges

located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of

wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU

webs and extend from face shell to face shell.

C. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could

puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on

sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal

penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing

manufacturer.

2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer

wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm), and through inner wythe to within

1/2 inch (13 mm) of the interior face of wall in exposed masonry.

3. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer,

and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm); with upper edge tucked under

building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches (100 mm).

4. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into

masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and

turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.



5. Install metal drip edges and end dams with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking

hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with

requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.

D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be

built into masonry.

E. Install weep vents in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately

above embedded flashing and as follows:

1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.

2. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

F. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity

drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

3.13 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support

reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as

indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,

tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of

reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened

sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during

construction.

3. The masonry contractor is responsible for designing, providing and installing the

temporary formwork and shores.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough

strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout

placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections

and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to

perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified

requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Level 2 special inspections according to the "International Building Code." and




1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-

prepared mortar.

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades,

sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

4. Verify placement of reinforcing steel including joint reinforcement.

C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 1000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion

thereof.

D. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for

compressive strength.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for

compressive strength.

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to

ASTM C 780.

G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test

mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.

H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.

3.15 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise

damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install

in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and

completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent

construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,

where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove

mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes

or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for

comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding

with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering

them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking

tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by

rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.



5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical

Notes 20.

6. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A.

7. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

3.16 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's

property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-

contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill

material as fill is placed.

1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension.

2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of

masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as

described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200 - 1

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes, but is not limited to the following:

1. Structural steel. 2. Grout.

B. Related Sections include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for concrete fill. 2. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck" for field installation. 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels or shelf angles not attached to

structural-steel frame miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as structural steel.

4. Division 5 Section “Pipe and Tube Railing” for handrail framing.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads.


A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand ASD-service loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Load and Resistance Factor Design," Volume 2, Part 9 and AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design," Part 4.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Fabricator's responsibilities include using a qualified professional engineer to prepare structural analysis data for structural-steel connections.

B. Construction: Type 2, simple framing.



1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.

Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. 5. For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural

analysis data prepared by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.

E. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements:

1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Direct-tension indicators. 4. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout.

F. Source quality-control test reports.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" and "Supplement No. 2 from

May 2002." 3. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic

Design ." 4. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections." 5. AISC's "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members ." 6. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.



1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.

2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M , Grade 50.

B. Channels, Angles, Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M .

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M .

D. Corrosion-Resisting Structural Steel: ASTM A 588/A 588M, Grade 50.

E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. 8 inch Diameter and Greater: ASTM A500, Grade B, Fy=46ksi. 2. Less than 8 inch Diameter: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or S, Grade B. 3. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized.

G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain. 2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 compressible-washer type.

a. Finish: Plain.

B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers, plain.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490 , compressible-washer type, plain.



C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, round head steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain.

D. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 .

1. Configuration: Hooked. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain .

E. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 , straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain .

F. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain .

G. Clevises and Turnbuckles: ASTM A 108, Grade 1035, cold-finished carbon steel.

H. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1030, cold-finished carbon steel.

I. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1018, cold-finished carbon steel.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type II, iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil, and alkyd.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20.

2.4 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design."

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.



2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/ A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected.

3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-

priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning."

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened Slip critical at all brace connections.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes

without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.

2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces to be field welded. 2. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 3. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. 4. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:.

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.



2. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

2.8 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/ A 123M.

1. Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing. 2. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in

exterior walls.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.

Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in



intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design."

B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates.

1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or shims. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened Slip critical at all brace connections.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design " for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.



3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show-through on exposed steel surfaces.

a. Grind butt welds flush. b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.

B. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1.

1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories, bearing plates, and abutting structural steel.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.

2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.



STEEL DECK 053100 - 1

SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECK

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes, but may not be limited to the following:

1. Roof deck.

B. Related Sections include, but may not be limited to the following:

1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel". 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous

steel shapes.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements:

1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners.

F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."



B. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Steel Deck:

a. ASC Profiles, Inc. b. Canam Steel Corp.;The Canam Manac Group. c. Consolidated Systems, Inc. d. DACS, Inc. e. D-Mac Industries Inc. f. Epic Metals Corporation. g. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. h. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. i. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division. j. Roof Deck, Inc. k. United Steel Deck, Inc. l. Valley Joist; Division of EBSCO Industries, Inc. m. Verco Manufacturing Co. n. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.

2.2 ROOF DECK

A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and with the following:

1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 80 minimum, shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.

a. Color: Manufacturer's standard . 2. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inch. 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated . 4. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 5. Side Laps: Overlapped .



2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.

C. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

D. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

E. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.



3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches long, and as follows:

1. Screw down application to light gauge metal trusses.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 18 inches, and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws space as indicated on drawings.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum .

D. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.

1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.


A. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.

1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom surfaces of deck exposed to view.



B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 1

SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior non-load bearing wall framing.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" soffit framing and ceiling-suspension

assemblies.


A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: Interior non-bearing wall framing. Exterior load-bearing wall framing has been completed and is indicated on the contract drawings.


A. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1. Power-actuated anchors. 2. Mechanical fasteners. 3. Vertical deflection clips. 4. Horizontal drift deflection clips 5. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.


A. Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc. 2. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. 3. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. 4. MarinoWARE. 5. Nuconsteel; a Nucor Company. 6. Olmar Supply, Inc. 7. Steel Network, Inc. (The).


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design cold-formed steel framing ceiling trusses.

B. Structural Performance: Cold-formed steel framing shall be capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Deflection Limits: Framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater

than the following: a. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall

height under a horizontal load of 6 lbf/sq. ft.. b. Soffit joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span for live loads and

1/240 for total loads of the span.

3. Framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F.

4. Framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:

a. Upward and downward movement of 1 inch.

2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:

1. Grade: ST33H ST50H. 2. Coating: G60.

B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: 50, Class 1. 2. Coating: G60.



2.4 EXTERIOR LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on contract drawings. 2. Flange Width: As indicated on contract drawings. 3. Section Properties: As indicated on contract drawings.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc. b. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. c. MarinoWARE. d. Steel Network, Inc. (The).

2.5 SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Exterior Soffit Frame: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on contract drawings. 2. Flange Width: As indicated on contract drawings. 3. Section Properties: As indicated on contract drawings.

2.6 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers and knee braces. 9. Joist hangers and end closures.



10. Hole reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates.

2.7 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

C. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold-formed steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims.

E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,

pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.



a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

B. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.


A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.



1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.

D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,

or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

H. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.4 EXTERIOR WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: As indicated on contract drawings.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.



D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing or infill studs and anchor to building

structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within [12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.

2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.

3. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

4. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.


A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



COLD-FORMED METAL TRUSSES 054400 - 1

SECTION 054400 - COLD-FORMED METAL TRUSSES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cold-formed steel framing in the form of the following:

1. Cold-formed steel trusses for roofs.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for cold-formed steel studs, joists, and

rafters.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel trusses;

fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping,

bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining

work.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel trusses.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Welding certificates.



C. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by manufacturer and

witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

1. Steel sheet.

2. Expansion anchors.

3. Power-actuated anchors.

4. Mechanical fasteners.

5. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.

D. Evaluation Reports: For power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating

steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile

strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design cold-formed steel trusses.

B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel trusses capable of withstanding design loads

within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Deflection Limits: Design trusses to withstand design loads without deflections greater

than the following:

a. Roof Trusses: Vertical Live/Snow load deflection of 1/480 of the span.

b. Vaulted Roof Trusses: Horizontal deflection of 1-1/2 inches at reactions.

3. Design trusses to provide for movement of truss members located outside the insulated

building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure,

undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a

maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F (67 deg C).



C. Cold-Formed Steel Truss Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, trusses

shall comply with the following:

1. Lateral Design: AISI S213.

2. Roof Trusses: AISI S214.

D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.

Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL or from the listings of another qualified testing

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 COLD-FORMED STEEL TRUSS MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and

coating designation as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance.

2. Coating: G60 (Z180).

2.3 ROOF TRUSSES

A. Roof Truss Members: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections.

1. Connecting Flange Width: 1-1/2 inches, minimum at top and bottom chords connecting

to sheathing or other directly fastened construction.

2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm).

2.4 TRUSS ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-truss accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade,

Type H, metallic coated steel sheet, of same grade and coating designation used for truss

members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration unless otherwise

indicated.

2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to

ASTM A 123/A 123M.

1. Uses: Securing cold-formed steel trusses to structure.

2. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise

indicated.



B. Power-Actuated Fasteners: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the

design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,

based on ICC-ES AC70.

C. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping

steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.


A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. Shims: Load-bearing, high-density multimonomer, nonleaching plastic; or cold-formed steel of

same grade and metallic coating as truss members supported by shims.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed steel trusses and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with

connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards,

manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate trusses using jigs or templates.

2. Cut truss members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

3. Fasten cold-formed steel truss members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,

pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding,

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel trusses by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin

fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace trusses to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift

fabricated trusses by means that prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable

variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual truss members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm)

from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements

of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel truss to a maximum out-of-square tolerance

of 1/8 inch (3 mm).



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, conditions, and abutting trusses and framing for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install bridge, and brace cold-formed steel trusses according to AISI S200, AISI S202,

AISI S214, and manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are

indicated.

1. Coordinate with wall framing to align webs of bottom chords and load-bearing studs or

continuously reinforce track to transfer loads to structure.

2. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points.

3. Install continuous bridging and permanently brace trusses as indicated on Shop Drawings

and designed according to CFSEI's Technical Note 551e, "Design Guide: Permanent

Bracing of Cold-Formed Steel Trusses.".

B. Install cold-formed steel trusses and accessories true to line and location, and with connections

securely fastened.

1. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs plumb and parallel to each other. Align and

accurately position trusses at required spacings.

2. Erect trusses without damaging truss members or connections.

3. Fasten cold-formed steel trusses by welding or mechanical fasteners.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding,

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners, install according to Shop Drawings, and comply with

requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

C. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure trusses and support loads equal to those for

which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire

integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to trusses are

secured.

D. Truss Spacing: 48 inches (1220 mm).

E. Do not alter, cut, or remove truss members or connections of trusses.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Install cold-formed steel trusses level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance

variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:



1. Space individual trusses no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location.

Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other

finishing materials.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following

special inspections:

1. Cold-Formed Steel Trusses: Verify temporary installation restraint/bracing and the

permanent individual truss member restraint/bracing are installed according to the

approved truss submittal package.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections, and provide

a certificate of compliance.

C. Cold-formed metal trusses will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.


A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and

installed cold-formed steel trusses with galvanized repair paint according to

ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and

Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel trusses are without damage or deterioration at time

of Substantial Completion.



METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes, but may not be limited to the following:

1. Steel framing and supports for overhead moveable partitions. 2. Steel framing and supports for overhead coiling doors. 3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections. 5. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 6. Metal ladders. 7. Steel framing supports at the solid surface lavatory counter tops.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into

concrete or built into unit masonry.

C. Related Sections include, but may not be limited to the following:

1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, wedge-type inserts and other items indicated to be cast into concrete.

2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items indicated to be built into unit masonry.

3. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel." 4. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry " for metal framing anchors.


A. Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.



1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Paint products. 2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 3. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis

data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel sheet certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.2 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.3 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 992; Grade 50.

B. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 Grade B, cold-formed steel tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A500 Grade B cold-formed steel pipe.

E. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot complying with MFMA-3.

1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Material: Steel complying with ASTM A 570, structural steel, Grade 33; 0.0677-inch

minimum thickness; coated with rust-inhibitive, baked-on, acrylic enamel.

F. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads.

2.4 NONFERROUS METALS

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.



B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

1. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

D. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.

E. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.

F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

G. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.

H. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.

I. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.

J. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.

K. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and wedge assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.



F. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.



B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed.

C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes indicated with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.

D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports for all exterior applications.

2.9 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.

B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

2.10 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

B. Galvanize plates after fabrication at steel lintels and beams located within exterior wall assemblies, or as shown on drawings.

2.11 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.12 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction.



C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim and interior miscellaneous steel trim, where indicated.

2.13 METAL LADDERS

A. General:

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1. 3. Space siderails 18 inches apart, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or

bolted brackets, made from same metal as ladder.

B. Steel Ladders:

1. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges. 2. Rungs: 3/4-inch- diameter steel bars. 3. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 4. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-oxide

granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout.

5. Available Products:

a. IKG Industries, a Harsco company; Mebac. b. W. S. Molnar Company; SlipNOT.

6. Galvanize exterior ladders and interior ladders, where indicated, including brackets and fasteners.

2.14 STEEL FRAMING SUPPORTS AT THE SOLID SURFACE LAVATORY COUNTER TOPS

A. Provide steel framing supports and fasteners as indicated with size and shape to accommodate the counter tops.

2.15 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.16 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below:

1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.



B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.



3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.

C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.

1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled.

3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.4 STEEL FRAMING SUPPORTS AT THE SOLID SURFACE LAVATORY COUNTER TOPS

A. Clean bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.



ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes but not limited to:

1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Plywood backing panels. 3. Wood sleepers fastened to metal roof deck.


1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for plywood roof sheathing installed over wood sleepers specified in this section.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for

moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Wood sleepers at roof shall be pressure treated southern pine #1 or better.

a. Minimum thickness: 3/4”.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat -items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.



2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

E. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 1. Applies to all members at asphalt roof assemblies.

2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, , fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

C. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

D. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

E. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

F. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and

ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.



Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

3.3 WOOD SLEEPERS AT ROOF ASSEMBLIES

A. Fasten wood sleepers to metal roof decking with #10-16x1 3/4" stainless steel screws at 12-inch on center.



SHEATHING 061600 - 1

SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior Wall and Soffit Sheathing. 2. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment. 3. Roof sheathing at asphalt shingle roofs.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels. 2. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood sleepers installed under plywood roof

sheathing specified in this section. 3. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for continuous insulation applied over wall

sheathing.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.


A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



2.2 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Application: Treat items plywood in exterior envelope assemblies, in contact with masonry or concrete, or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-

retardant-treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

E. Application: Treat all plywood unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 EXTERIOR WALL AND SOFFIT SHEATHING

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :

a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc. b. G-P Gypsum Corporation; Dens-Glass Gold. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond e(2)XP. d. United States Gypsum Co.; Securock.

2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch thick.



2.5 ROOF SHEATHING

A. Plywood Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing.

1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm).

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.

2.7 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners.

1. Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."



D. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

F. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Roof Sheathing Installation: a. Wood Sleepers: see section 061000 “Rough Carpentry”. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. c. Fasten plywood roof sheathing to wood sleepers with #8-16x1 3/4" stainless steel

screws at 6-inch on center at edges and 12-inch on center at intermediate supports.

3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural

elements. 3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might

retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing.

C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards.

D. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards.



E. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings.

2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings.



EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY (COMPOSITE DECKING) 062013 - 1

062013 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY (COMPOSITE DECKING)

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plastic composite decking installed on trash enclosure gates.


1. Section 055000 “Metal Fabrications” for galvanized steel gate frames to support finish

composite materials.


A. Product Data: Plastic composite decking and metal framing anchors.

B. Samples: For plastic composite decking, not less than 24 inches long, showing the range of

variation to be expected in appearance, including surface texture.


A. Evaluation Reports: For plastic composite decking and fasteners, from ICC-ES.


A. Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.

Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air

circulation around stacks and under coverings.

B. Handle and store plastic lumber to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace plastic

composite decking that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.



1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including cracking, deforming, and fading.

b. Deterioration of finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Fading is defined as loss of color, after cleaning with product recommended by

manufacturer, of more than 5 Hunter color-difference units as measured according to

ASTM D 2244.

3. Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPOSITE DECKING

A. Plastic Lumber: Products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current

model code evaluation reports exit that show compliance with building codes in effect for the

project for indicated occupancy and type of construction.

1. Allowable loads and spans, as documented in evaluation reports or in information

referenced in evaluation reports, shall not be less than design loads and spans indicated.

B. Composite Plastic Lumber: Solid shapes made from a mixture of cellulose fiber and

polyethylene or polypropylene.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide EverGrain

Composite Decking by Tamko Building Products or as approved by Architect prior to

bidding.

2. Decking Width: 6-inch nominal.

3. Surface Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of options.

4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of options including

standard and custom colors.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction and that comply with the composite manufacturer’s requirements, and that comply

with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Provide stainless steel screws or appropriate fasteners, in sufficient length, to penetrate

not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into substrates.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with the installer present, for compliance with requirements

for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substrates detrimental to application.


A. Install plastic lumber to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Secure decking to framing face screwed to framing.

C. Securely attach exterior rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as

indicated.

D. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with

fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.



INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 1

SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Interior board paneling. 3. Closet shelving and clothes rods.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view.

2. Section 064116 “Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets” for plastic laminate to be applied to closet shelving.

3. Section 099300 “Staining and Transparent Finishing” for finishing of interior finish carpentry.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical-treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product involving selection of colors, profiles, or textures.


A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.

1. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. 2. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.



B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions comply with requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified for installation areas.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the American Lumber Standard Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC's Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece.

2.2 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM AND PANELING

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product(s)

indicated on the drawings, or an Architect-approved comparable product.

B. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish:

1. Species and Grade: See Drawings. Walnut Premium by Elmwood Reclaim Timber. 2. Widths: Random 4 inch to 8 inches. 3. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 4. Lengths: Random 2 foot to 12 foot. 5. Milled Profile: Tongue and Groove. 6. Edge: Square. 7. Finish: Unfinished with field applied Stain and/or Clear Finish as specified in section

099300 “Staining and Transparent Finishing”.



C. Board Paneling: Interior wood-board paneling complying with MMPA WM 9.

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested according to ASTM E 84: a. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less.

2.3 CLOSET SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS

A. Exposed Shelving: Made from the following material, 3/4 inch thick:

1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate-faced particleboard with applied-PVC front edge.

B. Shelf Cleats: 3/4-by-3-1/2-inch boards, as specified above for hardwood lumber trim for transparent finish.

C. Clothes Rods: 1-5/16-inch-diameter, aluminum tubes.

D. Rod Flanges: Aluminum.

E. Laminate and Edge Banding Color: As indicated on Drawings.


A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible.

B. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use.

C. Paneling Adhesive: Comply with paneling manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives.

D. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation, complying with ASTM D 3498, that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate interior finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles, and details indicatd.

B. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except those with ends exposed in finished work:

1. Interior trim. 2. Wood-board paneling.

C. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.

B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer.


A. Do not use materials that are unsound; warped; improperly treated or finished; inadequately seasoned; too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements; or with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.

B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials.

1. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 2. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as

recommended by manufacturer. 3. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand

unless otherwise indicated. 4. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior

finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation.

5. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry.

3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION

A. Install trim with minimum number of joints as is practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available.

1. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary. 2. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. 3. Miter at returns, miter at outside corners, and cope at inside corners to produce tight-

fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. 4. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.



5. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for alignment.

6. Match color and grain pattern of trim for transparent finish (stain or clear finish) across joints.

7. Install trim after gypsum-board joint finishing operations are completed. 8. Install without splitting; drill pilot holes before fastening where necessary to prevent

splitting. 9. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. 10. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.

3.5 PANELING INSTALLATION

A. Board Paneling: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Arrange in random-width pattern suggested by manufacturer unless boards or planks are of uniform width.

2. Install in full lengths without end joints. 3. Stagger end joints in random pattern to uniformly distribute joints on each wall. 4. Select and arrange boards on each wall to minimize noticeable variations in grain

character and color between adjacent boards. 5. Install with uniform tight joints between boards. 6. Fasten paneling by blind nailing through tongues.

3.6 SHELVING AND CLOTHES ROD INSTALLATION

A. Cut shelf cleats at ends of shelves about 1/2 inch less than width of shelves and sand exposed ends smooth.

1. Install shelf cleats by fastening to framing or backing with finish nails or trim screws, set below face and filled.

2. Space fasteners not more than 16 inches o.c. 3. Apply a bead of multipurpose construction adhesive to back of shelf cleats before

installing. 4. Remove adhesive that is squeezed out after fastening shelf cleats in place.

B. Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and reinstalled.

1. Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and supports. 2. Fasten shelves to cleats with finish nails or trim screws, set flush.

C. Install rod flanges for rods as indicated.

1. Fasten to shelf cleats, framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors.

2. Install rods in rod flanges.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements.



1. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.

B. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.

B. Restore damaged or soiled areas and touch up factory-applied finishes if any.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction.

B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 1

SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets. 2. Plastic-laminate-clad coat racks. 3. Plastic-laminate-clad closet and utility shelving. 4. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-clad

architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets that are concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.

2. Section 113100 “Residential Appliances” for appliances installed in architectural cabinets. 3. Section 123623.13 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops." 4. Section 123661.16 “Solid-Surfacing Countertops.”

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded cabinets.

B. Verify dimensions of appliances installed in cabinets.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic-laminate

architectural cabinets.



C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's or manufacturer's standard size.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.


A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage architectural cabinets have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the AWI Architectural Woodwork Standards for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard.

B. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom.

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard and to match existing.

D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:



1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 3. Edges: PVC edge banding, 3-mm thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

E. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels.

a. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding. b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide

surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge banding.

3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels.

F. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops.

G. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.

H. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.

1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints.

I. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated on Drawings.

2.2 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening, self-closing.

B. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.

C. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.

D. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; two-pin plastic with shelf hold-down clip.

E. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.



1. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-overtravel-extension type; zinc-plated-steel ball-bearing slides.

F. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

G. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

H. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.

I. Grommets for Cable Passage: 2-inch OD, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

1. Color: Match Existing.

J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.

K. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

2.4 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COAT RACKS, CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING, AND WINDOW STOOLS/SILLS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the AWI Architectural Woodwork Standards for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard.

B. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom.

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard and to match existing.

D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:


A. Coat Racks, Closet Shelving, and Window Stools/sills: Made from one of the following materials, 3/4 inch thick:

1. Particleboard or plywood with plastic-laminate cladding.

B. Standards for Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04102; zinc-plated steel.

C. Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04112; zinc-plated steel.

D. Coat Hooks: Chromium-plated steel.




A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate architectural cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Trial fit assemblies at manufacturer's shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment.

C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed.

B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer-head cabinet installation screws.

D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches using concealed shims.



1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.

3.3 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING INSTALLATION

A. Install standards for adjustable shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more than 36 inches o.c. and within 6 inches of ends of shelves. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors.

B. Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and reinstalled.

1. Fasten shelves to brackets to comply with bracket manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace architectural cabinets. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.



PLASTIC PANELING (FRP) 066400 - 1

SECTION 066400 - PLASTIC PANELING (FRP)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall paneling and trim accessories.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring for installing plastic paneling.




A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 3. Testing Agency: UL.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING

A. General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319.



1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Kemlite Company Inc. b. Marlite. c. Nudo Products, Inc.

2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch. 3. Surface Finish: Molded pebble texture. 4. Color: White.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges.

1. Color: As indicated on drawing or as selected by Architect from full range of options.

B. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer.

C. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even surface for panel installation.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust.

C. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

D. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls not less than half the width of full panels.

1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at panel joint locations for accurate installation.



2. Locate trim accessories to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.

C. Install trim accessories with adhesive and nails or staples. Do not fasten through panels.

D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant.

E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.

F. Maintain uniform space between adjacent panels and between panels and floors, ceilings, and fixtures. Fill space with sealant.

G. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.



COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 1

SECTION 071416 - COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Polyurethane reinforced 120 mils waterproofing with molded-sheet drainage panels and rigid insulation along exterior building walls adjacent to raised planter.

2. Polyurethane non-reinforced 60 mils waterproofing with molded-sheet drainage panels along other walls of raised planter.


1. Division 22 “Plumbing” and civil engineering drawings for waterproofing systems tied to drain tile.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing.

2. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show locations and extent of waterproofing types and thicknesses. 2. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and

outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, including the following products:

1. Insulation, 10 by 8 inches. 2. Drainage panel, 4 by 4 inches.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.




A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by waterproofing manufacturer.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to set quality standards for installation.

1. Build mockup for each typical waterproofing installation including accessories to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatments, inside and outside corner treatments, and protection.

a. Size: 100 sq. ft. in area.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

1. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point.

2. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during application and curing period.

B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace waterproofing that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Installer's Special Warranty: Specified form, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of two years.

1. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels, and insulation.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-COMPONENT POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING (USED IN PLATER ALONG

EXTERIOR BUILDING WALLS)

A. Single-Component, Reinforced, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing: ASTM C836/C836M and coal-tar free.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Miraseal as

manufactured by Carlisle Coating & Waterproofing or comparable product as approved by Architect prior to bidding.

a. Thickness: 120 Mils.

2.2 SINGLE-COMPONENT POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING (USED IN PLATER ALONG

OTHER WALLS)

A. Single-Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing: ASTM C836/C836M and Coal-tar

free.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Miraseal as

manufactured by Carlisle Coating & Waterproofing or comparable product as approved by Architect prior to bidding.

a. Thickness: 60 Mils.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with one another and with waterproofing.

B. Primer: Manufacturer's standard primer, sealer, or surface conditioner; factory-formulated.

C. Membrane-Reinforcing Fabric: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric, manufacturer's standard weight.

D. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric.

E. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent polyurethane sealant, compatible with waterproofing; ASTM C920, Type M, Class 25 or greater; Grade NS for sloping and vertical applications and Grade P for deck applications; Use NT exposure; and as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and joint conditions.

1. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam.

2.4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS (USED ALONG ALL PLANTER WALLS)

A. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Composite subsurface drainage panel consisting of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core; with a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 sieve laminated to one side of the core and a polymeric film bonded to the other side; and with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 18 gpm per ft..



1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CCW

MiraDrain 6200 Drainage Composites as manufactured by Carlisle Coating &

Waterproofing or comparable product as approved by Architect prior to bidding.

2.5 INSULATION (USED IN PLATER ALONG EXTERIOR BUILDING WALLS)

A. Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation according to ASTM C 578, square edged.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Corporation.

2. Type IV, 25-psi minimum compressive strength.

3. Thickness: 2 1/2-inch minimum (R-12.5).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and within the moisture limits recommended in writing by manufacturer. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections, and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids.



3.3 PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS, PENETRATIONS, AND CORNERS

A. Prepare surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, sleeves, and corners according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 1471.

B. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT

A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 1471. Before coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.

1. Comply with ASTM C1193 for joint-sealant installation. 2. Apply bond breaker on sealant surface, beneath preparation strip. 3. Prime substrate along each side of joint and apply a single thickness of preparation strip

at least 6 inches wide along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat.

3.5 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION

A. Apply waterproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 1471.

B. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.

C. Reinforced Waterproofing Applications (along exterior building walls in planter): Mix materials and apply waterproofing by roller, notched squeegee, trowel, or other suitable application method.

1. Apply first coat of waterproofing, embed membrane-reinforcing fabric, and apply second coat of waterproofing to completely saturate reinforcing fabric and to obtain a seamless reinforced membrane free of entrapped gases and pinholes, with an average dry film total thickness of 120 mils.

2. Apply reinforced waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces. 3. Verify manufacturer's recommended wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft..

D. Unreinforced Waterproofing Applications (along all other walls in planter): Mix materials and apply waterproofing by spray, roller, notched squeegee, trowel, or other application method suitable to slope of substrate.

1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases and pinholes, with a dry film thickness of 60 mils.

2. Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces. 3. Verify manufacturer's recommended wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft..

E. Cure waterproofing, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application and curing.

F. Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing before starting subsequent construction operations.



3.6 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION (USED ALONG ALL PLANTER

WALLS)

A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive or another method that does not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction.

3.7 INSULATION INSTALLATION (USED IN PLATER ALONG EXTERIOR BUILDING WALLS)

A. Install one or more layers of board insulation to achieve required thickness over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch of projections and penetrations.

B. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a site representative qualified by waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components and to furnish daily reports to Architect.

B. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform additional tests and inspections.

C. Waterproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections and shall be corrected at the contractor’s expense.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Protect installed board insulation from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

C. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.

D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.



SILICONE WATER REPELLENTS 071919 - 1

SECTION 071919 - SILICONE WATER REPELLENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Scope of work:

1. Apply silicone water repellent to all masonry veneers including but not limited to all exposed edges, corners, and masonry returns at window and door openings.

B. This Section includes the following:

1. Preparation, materials, services, and equipment required in conjunction with the application of a clear water repellent on all above grade, vertical, exterior exposed surfaces of masonry veneers.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 042000 “Unit Masonry” for brick masonry veneers to receive water repellents specified in this section.


A. Provide water repellents with the following properties based on testing manufacturer's standard products, according to test methods indicated, applied to substrates simulating Project conditions using same materials and application methods to be used for Project.

1. Water-Vapor Transmission: Maximum 10 percent reduction in rate of vapor transmission in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM E-96.

2. Water Penetration and Leakage through masonry: No dampness or water leakage of wall after 4 hours of water exposure, per ASTM E-514.

3. Durability: No sign of deterioration after 4000 hours exposure, per ASTM C 795

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Submit certification stating applicator has a minimum of three (3) years experience using the specified product. Provide a list of several most recently completed projects where the specified material was used. Include the project name, location, architect and method of application




A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary clear water repellent materials and primers through one source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.

B. Manufacturer: A firm with no less than ten (10) years experience in manufacturing the products specified in this section.

C. Applicator Qualification: A firm with no less than three (3) years experience in the application of the products specified in this section. In addition, applicator must state the intended use of the proper application equipment and that it has been well maintained.

D. Mock-Up:

1. Apply water repellent per manufacturer's application instructions as directed by the Architect to substrate material that matches actual job conditions. Determine the acceptability of appearance and optimum coverage rate required for application.

2. After sample treatment has cured in accordance with manufacturers recommendations, water test to verify that substrate is coated with sufficient water repellent to effectively repel liquid water from the surface.

3. Obtain Architect and/or Project Owner approval prior to full scale application of water repellents.


A. Material Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in original sealed containers, clearly marked with manufacturer's name, brand name, and type of material. Verify the product matches that of the original sample applied on the mock - up wall.

B. Record Keeping: Contractor / applicator shall record product batch number or lot number for warranty purposes.

C. Storage & Protection: Store materials inside if possible, away from sparks and open flame. Store in a secure area to avoid tampering and contamination. Water based materials must be kept from freezing. Store and handle in accordance with manufactures written instructions.


A. Surface Preparation: Surface must be free of cracks, dirt, oils, paint or other contaminants which may affect the appearance or performance of the water repellent material.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit clear water repellent to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Air and substrate temperature must be above 40° F ( 4° C) or below 100° F ( 38° C)

unless otherwise specified by manufacturer. 2. Do not proceed with application if the substrate is wet or contains frozen water.



3. Do not apply material when rain is predicted within 24 hours; or earlier that five (5) days after the substrate became wet.

4. Do not apply materials in high or gusty winds.

C. Protection: 1. Special precautions should be taken to avoid vapor transmission (fumes) from entering

the building being treated. Ventilation systems and fresh air intakes should be turned off and closed.

2. Protect shrubs, metal, wood trim, glass, asphalt and other building hardware during application from over-spray.

3. Do not permit spray mist or liquid to drift onto surrounding properties.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Architect shall be notified not less than 48 hours before each application of water repellent is scheduled.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. The contractor shall provide a warranty against water intrusion through above grade concrete and masonry surfaces for a period of one (1) year from the date of application. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of coating due to unusual weather phenomena, failure of prepared and treated substrate, formation of new joints or cracks in excess of 1/16 inch, fire, vandalism, or abuse by maintenance equipment.

B. Complete and submit the manufacturer's "Pre-Application Warranty Form" to manufacturer a minimum of ten (10) days prior to application.

C. After completion of the water repellent application, submit manufacturer's "Warranty Application" to manufacturer for processing. Include material batch number / lot number previously recorded. Upon receiving a validated warranty, submit copies to Architect and building owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SILICONE WATER REPELLENTS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dur-A-Pell GS

Series 626 as manufactured by Chemprobe Coating Systems, L.P. or comparable product as approved by Architect prior to bidding.

Chemprobe Coating Systems, L.P. Masonry Division of Tnemec Company, Inc. 2805 Industrial Lane Garland, TX 75041 PH: 800/760-6776 PH: 972/271-5551 FX: 972/271-5553



B. Solvent based 15% solids RTV Silicone Rubber Water Repellent and Graffiti Protection System.

C. All products shall be solvent based, RTV Silicone Rubber with less than 700 grams per liter VOC. All products shall contain a minimum of 15 percent solids.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work including but not limited to: 1. All sealant joints have been properly installed and cured. 2. New masonry and mortar has cured a minimum of twenty-eight (28) days. 3. Surface to be treated is clean, dry and contains no frozen water. 4. Environmental conditions are appropriate for application.

B. Proceed with silicone water repellent application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated with silicone water repellents. Prevent silicone water repellents materials from entering and clogging weep holes and drains. 1. Special precautions should be taken to avoid vapor transmission (fumes) from entering

the building being treated. Ventilation systems and fresh air intakes should be turned off and closed.

2. Protect shrubs, metal, wood trim, glass, asphalt and other building hardware during application from over-spray.

3. Do not permit spray mist or liquid to drift onto surrounding properties or parking lots.

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of silicone water repellents. 1. Material must be applied using solvent resistant, low-pressure application equipment

designed for water repellent application. 2. Apply material as shipped by the manufacturer. Do not dilute or thin. 3. Apply using a low-pressure sprayer with a fan tip that allows for an application pressure

of 20 to 40 psi. Apply first coat in a saturating spray application from bottom up. Apply sufficient material to create a 4” to 6” rundown below the contact point. Caution should be used on dense substrates to not over-apply. On dense substrates, minimal rundown is required to avoid over application. Backroll all areas that appear to be fully saturated. A second coat is required for graffiti protection; apply once first coat appears dry (30 minutes to 2 hours) depending on temperatures and substrate. All coats should be examined for areas of over application and such areas should be brushed or backrolled to avoid excessive film build and unsightly darkening.




A. The architect shall be contacted 48 hours prior to application so as to provide supervision as required. The architect or the architect's representative shall inspect the progress as the work proceeds.

B. After water repellent has cured for five (5) days at low humidity and temperature between 70°-90° F or eight (8) days at high humidity and low temperature between 50°-69° F, all surfaces shall be tested with a light water spray. Recoat any area that indicates water absorption after the water test has completely dried.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces and other protected areas.

B. Immediately clean water repellent coating from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled by water-repellent application as work progresses.

C. At completion, remove from the job site, all excess material, debris, and waste resulting from this work. Dispose of water repellent containers according to state and local environmental regulations.



THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 3. Mineral-wood blanket insulation. 4. Mineral-wool board insulation. 5. Spray polyurethane foam insulation. 6. Vapor retarders. 7. Loose-fill insulation at roof attic spaces.


1. Section 071416 "Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing" for insulated drainage panels installed with waterproofing.

2. Section 075423 "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing " for insulation specified as part of roofing construction.

3. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sound attenuation blanket used as acoustic insulation.




A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:



1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site before installation time.

3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation (for use as Perimeter Insulation at slabs and foundatoins): ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. OR


a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products.

2. Type IV, 25 psi.

B. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation (for use as Perimeter Insulation at slabs and foundations): ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.


a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Plymouth Foam, Inc. c. ACH Foam Technologies.

2. Type II, 15 psi.

C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.

2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Building Products, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Insulation. 5. Owens Corning.



B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation (used in framed exterior walls): ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

2.3 BATT BLANKET INSULATION (ALTERNATE)

A. Alternate: Provide mineral fiber batt insulation in lieu of glass fiber batt at all exterior walls.

B. Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation (used in framed exterior walls): Flexible preformed batt or blanket complying with ASTM C665; friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, are indicated below or as approved by Architect prior to bidding:

a. Johns Manville. b. Thermafiber, Inc. c. ROXUL, Inc.

2.4 MINERAL-WOOL BOARD

A. Mineral-Wool Board, Unfaced (for use as Continuous Insulation in exterior wall assembles): ASTM C612; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 15 and zero, respectively, per ASTM E84; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics. Nominal density of 11 lb/cu. ft..

2.5 LOOSE-FILL INSULATION

A. Cellulosic-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 739, chemically treated for flame-resistance, processing, and handling characteristics.

1. Minimum density of 1.5 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 6.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F.

2.6 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION

A. Closed-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.


a. BASF Corporation. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Henry Company.

2. Minimum density of 1.5 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 6.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F.



2.7 LOOSE-FILL ROOF/ATTIC INSULATION

A. Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation (R-38 minimum): ASTM C 764, Type I for pneumatic application or Type II for poured application; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.

B. Provide R-Value plastic or metal measuring sticks (20” long) with 1” increment ruler for each attic access door or hatch.

2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Foil-Polyester-Film Vapor Retarders: Two layers of 0.5-mil- thick polyester film laminated to an inner layer of 1-mil- thick aluminum foil, with maximum water-vapor transmission rate in flat condition of 0.0 g/h x sq. m and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Alumiseal Corporation; Zero Perm Vapor Barrier.

B. Roof/Attic Spaces: Vapor Retarders having a transmission rate not exceeding 1 perm in accordance with ASTM E 96 shall be provided and installed on the warm side of attic insulation for the entire roof area.

C. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

D. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.

E. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates.

F. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.



C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION

A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line.

B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 36 inches in from exterior walls.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

C. Loose-Fill Insulation: Apply according to ASTM C 1015 and manufacturer's written instructions. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively.

1. For cellulosic-fiber loose-fill insulation, comply with CIMA's Bulletin #2, "Standard Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation."

D. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft..



2. Sprayed Foam Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION

A. Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install blanket insulation over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated. Extend insulation 48 inches up either side of partitions.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs.

1. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c.

2. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.

3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.

C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders.

D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

3.8 INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Slab and Foundation (Perimeter) Insulation.

1. Type: Extruded polystyrene board OR molded polystyrene board. 2. Thickness/R-Factor Rating: 2 inches, R-10 min.

B. Roof/Attic Insulation.

1. Type: Loose-Fill Insulation.



2. Thickness/R-Factor Rating: Depth as required to achieve minimum R-38, but not less than 12 inches.

3. Vapor Retarder on warm side of insulation.

C. Exterior Framed Walls.

1. Type: Glass-Fiber Blanket (Batt) unfaced Insulation OR Mineral Fiber (Batt) Insulation. 2. Thickness/R-Factor Rating: Depth as manufactured to fill nominal 6-inch framing cavity;

achieve minimum R-19. 3. Type: Continuous insulation (outboard of sheathing), Stone Wool Board Insulation

behind veneer panels. 4. Thickness/R-factor Rating: 1-1/2 inch, R-6 min. 5. Vapor Retarder on warm side of insulation.

D. Miscellaneous Voids.

1. Type: Glass-fiber blanket (batt) insulation, or spray polyurethane foam insulation. 2. Thickness: Depth as required to fill void.



FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 072726 - 1

SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fluid-applied air barriers applied to exterior wall sheathing.


1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for wall sheathings and wall sheathing joint-and-penetration treatments.



1. Review air-barrier requirements and installation, special details, mockups, air-leakage and bond testing, air-barrier protection, and work scheduling that covers air barriers.


A. Installed product and accessories shall constitute a continuous air barrier.

B. Installed product and accessories shall perform as a liquid water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior any incidental condensation or water penetration.

C. Installed product and accessories shall exhibit an air leakage rate, infiltration and exfiltration modes, measured after pressure cycling, not to exceed 0.2 L/s*m2 at 75 Pa [0.040 CFM/ft2 at 1.57 PSF] according to ASTM E 2357.

D. Exterior wall assemblies incorporating the product and accessories shall be tested in accordance with and comply with the acceptance criteria of NFPA 285.

E. Product shall be of non-asphalt synthetic polymer composition.

F. Product shall be a nominal 0.060 inch (60 mils) thickness membrane, with dry film thickness of installed product measuring a minimum of 0.050 inch (50 mils) with a comb gauge or pin gauge.





1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating each substrate; technical data; dry film thickness; and tested physical and performance properties of products.

B. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier assemblies.

1. Show locations and extent of air-barrier materials, accessories, and assemblies specific to Project conditions.

2. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction.

3. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier.


A. Qualification Data: Installer include list of ABAA-certified installers and supervisors employed by Installer, who work on Project.

B. Product Certificates: From air-barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the barrier.

C. Product Test Reports: For each air-barrier assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

1. Installer shall be licensed by ABAA according to ABAA's Quality Assurance Program and shall employ ABAA-certified installers and supervisors on Project.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build integrated mockups of exterior wall assembly 150 sq. ft. (14 sq. m), incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding, window, storefront, door frame and sill, insulation, ties and other penetrations, and flashing to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, application of air barriers, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air-barrier assembly.

a. Coordinate construction of mockups to permit inspection and testing of air barrier before external insulation and cladding are installed.

b. Include junction with roofing membrane, building corner condition, and foundation wall intersection.

c. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct mockups and apply air barrier until mockups are approved.






A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer.

1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air-barrier performance. 2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Air-Barrier Performance: Air-barrier assembly and seals with adjacent construction shall be capable of performing as a continuous air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.

B. Air-Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (0.2 L/s x sq. m of surface area at 75 Pa), when tested according to ASTM E 2357.

2.3 AIR BARRIERS, VAPOR RETARDING

A. Vapor-Retarding Air Barrier: synthetic polymer membrane with an installed dry film thickness, according to manufacturer's written instructions, of 35 mils (0.9 mm) or thicker over smooth, void-free substrates.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Fire Resist

Barritech VP by Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Incorporated or comparable product listed below or as approved by Architect prior to bidding.



a. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier VP. b. Henry Company, Sealants Division; Air-Bloc 31MR. c. Tremco Incorporated; ExoAir 230. d. ProSoCo, Inc.; R-Guard Spray Wrap MVP. e. Sto Corp; Sto Guard Systems – Emerald Coat. f. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Sealtite Air-Shield LMP. g. TK Products; TK-AirMax 2104 Vapor Permeable.

h. GE Performance Coatings; GE Elemax 2600 AWB.

2. Physical and Performance Properties:

a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. (0.02 L/s x sq. m of surface area at 75-Pa) pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.

a. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 10 perms; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method, Procedure A.

b. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 200 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C. c. Adhesion to Substrate: Minimum 16 lbf/sq. in. when tested according to

ASTM D 4541. d. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved

assembly. e. UV Resistance: Can be exposed to sunlight for 180 days according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Requirement: Provide primers, transition strips, termination strips, joint reinforcing fabric and strips, joint sealants, counterflashing strips, flashing sheets and metal termination bars, termination mastic, substrate patching materials, adhesives, tapes, foam sealants, lap sealants, and other accessory materials that are recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air-barrier assembly and that are compatible with primary air-barrier material and adjacent construction to which they may seal.

B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air-barrier material manufacturer.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0250 inch (0.64 mm) thick, and Series 300 stainless-steel fasteners.

D. Preformed Silicone Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of cured low-modulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with a single-component, neutral-curing, Class 100/50 (low-modulus) silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.

E. Self-Adhered Sheet Air and Vapor Barrier Flashing: composite membrane consisting of rubberized-asphalt adhesive laminated to fire resistant aluminum foil/HDPE composite facer (6” wide minimum).

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Fire Resist

705FR-A by Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Incorporated or comparable product as approved by Architect prior to bidding.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants.

2. Verify that substrates have cured and aged for minimum time recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer.

3. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture. 4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar.


3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, treat, fill, and seal substrate and joints and cracks in substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions and details. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching material.

E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.

F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.

G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier.

H. Bridge isolation joints, expansion joints, and discontinuous wall-to-wall, deck-to-wall, and deck-to-deck joints with air-barrier accessory material that accommodates joint movement according to manufacturer's written instructions and details.

3.3 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

A. Install accessory materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions and details to form a seal with adjacent construction and ensure continuity of air and water barrier.

1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.



2. Install transition strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) of coverage is achieved over each substrate.

3. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.

4. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

B. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.

C. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with termination mastic.

D. Apply joint sealants forming part of air-barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

E. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply transition strip so that a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches (75 mm) of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames, with not less than 1 inch (25 mm) of full contact.

1. Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion. 2. Preformed Silicone Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to walls, frame,

and air-barrier material.

F. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant.

G. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with termination mastic.

H. Seal top of through-wall flashings and other dissimilar surfaces or materials to air barrier with 6-inch-wide transition strip of self-adhered sheet air and vapor barrier flashing.

I. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.

J. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond repaired areas in strip direction.

3.4 PRIMARY AIR-BARRIER MATERIAL INSTALLATION

A. Apply air-barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions and details. Apply air-barrier material within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges.

1. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.



2. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

3. Where multiple prime coats are needed to achieve required bond, allow adequate drying time between coats.

B. High-Build Air Barriers: Apply continuous unbroken air-barrier material to substrates according to the following thickness. Apply air-barrier material in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties. 1. Vapor-Permeable, High-Build Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as recommended in

writing by manufacturer to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 60 mils, applied in one or more equal coats. Apply additional material as needed to achieve void and pinhole-free surface, but do not exceed thickness on which required vapor permeability is based.

C. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air-barrier components.


A. Inspections: Air-barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following:

1. Continuity of air-barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps or holes.

2. Air-barrier dry film thickness. 3. Continuous structural support of air-barrier system has been provided. 4. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean, and free of cavities, protrusions, and

mortar droppings. 5. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been

maintained. 6. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded. 7. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable. 8. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and have

been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths.

9. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges. 10. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate. 11. Compatible materials have been used. 12. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided. 13. Connections between assemblies (air-barrier and sealants) have complied with

requirements for cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal.

14. All penetrations have been sealed.

B. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

1. Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness.

2. Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified above.

C. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions.



3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as recommended in writing by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for longer than recommended, remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full-thickness, air-barrier application after repairing and preparing the overexposed materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air-barrier manufacturer.

B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.

C. Remove masking materials after installation.



ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 1

SECTION 073113 - ASPHALT SHINGLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Granular asphalt shingles.

2. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment

3. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment

4. Sheet metal flashing and trim.

5. Ridge Vents.

6. Roof Accessories.


1. Division 06 for roof sheathing over wood trusses.

2. Section 075423 “Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing” for single-ply membrane

roofing systems.

3. Section 077253 “Snow Guards” for snow guards installed in asphalt shingle roofing

systems.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and

Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.



B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to verify color

selected:

1. Asphalt Shingle: Full size.

2. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Full size.

3. Ridge Vent: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Sample.

4. Exposed Valley Lining: 12 inches (300 mm) square.

5. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: 12 inches (300 mm) square.

6. Self-Adhering Underlayment: 12 inches (300 mm) square.




A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer

and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for asphalt shingles.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of asphalt shingle required, from the ICC.

D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For each type of asphalt shingle to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Asphalt Shingles: 100 sq. ft (9.3 sq. m) of each type, in unbroken bundles.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved

for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles ridge vents, felt underlayment and self-

adhering sheet underlayment from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide asphalt shingles and related roofing

materials identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per test method below by UL

or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify

products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof

slopes indicated.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for asphalt shingles including related roofing materials.

a. Size: 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) wide.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations

in writing.



3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight location according to asphalt

shingle manufacturer's written instructions. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other

raised surfaces. Do not double stack rolls.

1. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent

damage to roof deck or structural supporting members.

B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when

roofing work is not in progress.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install asphalt shingles until spaces are enclosed

and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is

operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels

during the remainder of the construction period.

1. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate

temperatures recommended by manufacturer.

B. Take special care when applying WinterGuard Waterproofing Shingle Underlayment and

shingles when ambient or wind chill temperature is below 45 deg. F.. Tack WinterGuard in

place if it does not adhere immediately to the roof deck.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt

shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Manufacturing defects.

b. Structural failures including failure of asphalt shingles to self-seal after a

reasonable time.

2. Material Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with

first five years nonprorated.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES

A. Laminated-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462, laminated, multi-ply overlay construction,

glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products the

following:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; Certain Teed Landmark AR Architectural Shingles

(formerly Landmark 30).

2. Butt Edge: Straight cut.

3. Strip Size: Manufacturer's standard.

4. Algae Resistance: Granules treated to resist algae discoloration.

5. Color and Blends: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles.

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced : ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40-mil-

(1.0-mm-) thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBS-

modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied.


following:

a. Certain Teed "WinterGuard".

b. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn.

B. Underlayment: CertainTeed Diamond Deck ASTM D 226 and ASTM D 4869 synthetic

polymer-based scrim reinforced underlayment designed for use on roof decks as a water-

resistant layer beneath asphalt shingles.

C. Granular-Surfaced Valley Lining: ASTM D 3909, mineral-granular-surfaced, glass-felt-based,

asphalt roll roofing; 36 inches (914 mm) wide.

2.3 RIDGE VENTS

A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard, rigid section high-density polypropylene or other

UV-stabilized plastic ridge vent with nonwoven geotextile filter strips and external deflector

baffles; for use under ridge shingles.


following:

a. Venturi-Vent Plus by Air Vent, Inc.; a Gibraltar Industries company.



B. Free Venting Area: See roof ventilation calculations on roof plan for free venting area required

per linear foot of ridge vents.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.

B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized-steel

wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch- (3-mm-) diameter, barbed shank, sharp-pointed, with a

minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch

(19 mm) into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) through OSB or plywood

sheathing.

1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as

flashing. Use stainless steel nails at all other locations.

C. Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire with low-

profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch (25-mm) minimum diameter.

2.5 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. General: Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

1. Sheet Metal: Anodized aluminum.

B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's

"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other

characteristics of the item.

1. Apron Flashings: Fabricate with lower flange a minimum of 5 inches (125 mm) over and

4 inches (100 mm) beyond each side of downslope asphalt shingles and[ 6 inches (150

mm)] up the vertical surface.

2. Step Flashings: Fabricate with a headlap of 2 inches (50 mm) and a minimum extension

of 5 inches (125 mm) over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface.

3. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet (3 mm with 2-inch (50-mm) roof-

deck flange and 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) fascia flange with 3/8-inch (9.6-mm) drip at lower

edge.

C. Vent Pipe Flashings: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, at least 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. Provide

lead sleeve sized to slip over and turn down into pipe, soldered to skirt at slope of roof, and

extending at least 4 inches (100 mm) from pipe onto roof.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and

blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely

anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through

asphalt shingles.

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work.


3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable

to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-

temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at

locations indicated below, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2

inches (89 mm). Lap ends not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm)

between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days.

1. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 36 inches (914 mm) beyond interior face of exterior

wall.

2. Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches (450 mm) on each side.

3. Hips: Extend 18 inches (450 mm) on each side.

4. Ridges: Extend 36 inches (914 mm) on each side without obstructing continuous ridge

vent slot.

5. Sidewalls: Extend beyond sidewall 18 inches (450 mm), and return vertically against

sidewall not less than 4 inches (100 mm).

6. Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and Other Roof-Penetrating Elements: Extend beyond

penetrating element 18 inches (450 mm), and return vertically against penetrating

element not less than 4 inches (100 mm).

7. Roof Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches (450 mm) on each roof slope.

C. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves.

Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4

inches (100 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches (1830 mm).

Fasten with roofing nails.

1. Install felt underlayment on roof deck on entire roof area after the Self-Adhering Sheet

Underlayment has been installed.

2. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches (75 mm) in

direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches (150 mm) over self-

adhering sheet underlayment.

3. Install fasteners at no more than 36 inch (900 mm) o.c.

D. Concealed, Closed-Cut Valley Lining: Comply with NRCA's recommendations. Install a 36-

inch- (914-mm-) wide felt underlayment centered in valley. Fasten to roof deck with roofing

nails.



1. Lap roof-deck felt underlayment over valley felt underlayment at least 12 inches .

3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in

Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt

Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing

and Waterproofing Manual."

B. Apron Flashings: Extend lower flange over and beyond each side of downslope asphalt

shingles and up the vertical surface.

C. Step Flashings: Install with a headlap of 2 inches (50 mm) and extend over the underlying

asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. Fasten to roof deck only.

D. Cricket Flashings: Install against the roof-penetrating element extending concealed flange

beneath upslope asphalt shingles and beyond each side.

E. Eave Drip Edges: Install eave drip edge flashings below underlayment and fasten to roof

sheathing.

F. Pipe Flashings: Form flashing around pipe penetrations and asphalt shingles. Fasten and seal to

asphalt shingles as recommended by manufacturer.

3.4 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions,

recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle

recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."

B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip at least 7 inches

(175 mm) wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge.

1. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch (13 mm) over fasciae at eaves and rakes.

2. Install starter strip along rake edge.

C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck

with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform

exposure.

D. Install asphalt shingles by single-strip column or racking method, maintaining uniform

exposure. Install full-length first course followed by cut second course, repeating alternating

pattern in succeeding courses.

E. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with the quantity of roofing nails located according to

manufacturer's written instructions.



1. Where roof slope is less than 4:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement

spots.

2. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50 deg F (10 deg C), seal asphalt

shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots.

F. Closed-Cut Valleys: Extend asphalt shingle strips from one side of valley 12 inches (300 mm)

beyond center of valley. Use one-piece shingle strips without joints in valley. Fasten with extra

nail in upper end of shingle. Install asphalt shingle courses from other side of valley and cut

back to a straight line 2 inches (50 mm) short of valley centerline. Trim upper concealed

corners of cut-back shingle strips.

1. Do not nail asphalt shingles within 6 inches (150 mm) of valley center.

2. Set trimmed, concealed-corner asphalt shingles in a 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide bed of asphalt

roofing cement.

G. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's

written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.

H. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle

exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds.

Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.

1. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow.

3.5 REPAIR AND CLEANING

A. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to

Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by

finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



FORMED METAL WALL PANELS AND SOFFITS 074213.13 - 1

SECTION 074213.13 - FORMED METAL WALL PANELS AND SOFFITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels.


1. Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for cold-formed metal framing supporting lap-seam metal wall panels.

2. Section 061600 “Sheathing” for exterior wall sheathing to receive lap-seam metal wall panels.

3. Section 072726 “Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers” for air barriers that are part of lap-seam metal wall panels rainscreen.

4. Division 07 Section "Metal Vented Soffit Panels” for metal vented soffit panels attached to framing at soffits, roof overhangs, and canopy ceilings where indicated on drawings.

5. Division 07 Section "Metal Panel Roof Screens” for metal panels systems engineered by contractor and attached to steel framing for mechanical equipment roof screens.

6. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for field-formed flashings and other sheet metal work not part of lap-seam metal wall panels.

7. Section 077200 “Roof Accessories” for extruded rigid aluminum continuous soffit vents installed adjacent to formed metal soffits specified in this section.

8. Section 077200 “Roof Accessories” for gravity ventilators installed in gable ends.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.

2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:



1. Metal Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other metal panel accessories.


A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.



B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as factory-formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for duration of work.


A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.



1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.




2.2 CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

B. Reveal-Joint, Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with vertical panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced or a flat pan between panel edges; with narrow reveal joint between panels.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CENTRIA

Architectural Systems; Intercept Entyre Panel System, or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Alcoa Architectural Products (USA). b. Berridge Manufacturing Company. c. CENTRIA Architectural Systems. d. MBCI; a division of NCI Group, Inc.

2. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer, with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required.

a. Thickness: 0.060 inch nominal. b. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. c. Exterior Finish: Two-Coat Mica fluoropolymer. d. Color: Centria Coating Systems; 9989 Platinum or as approved by Architect

from full range of options.

3. Panel Sizes: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Panel Thickness: 1-3/8 inch. 5. Joint Size: 3/4 inch.


A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.



E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

C. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.

D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.

5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

6. Finish: To match metal panels.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Steel Panels and Accessories: 1. Metallic Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Three-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended

metallic flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color



coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

D. Aluminum Panels and Accessories: 1. Two-Coat Mica Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Two-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended

mica flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer.

2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer.

a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels. 2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.

Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal panels are installed.

3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.



5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds. 6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices

and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 7. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws.

Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws. 8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.

B. Fasteners:

1. Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

2. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

D. Installation: Attach panels to metal sub-framing using recommended clips, screws, fasteners, sealants, and adhesives indicated on approved shop drawings.

1. Horizontal Panels: Horizontal Joinery: Working from base of installation to top, connect upper panel to lower panel at joinery. Vertical Joinery: Provide reveal between vertical ends of panels as shown on shop drawings.

2. Vertical Panels: Horizontal Joinery: Working from base of installation to provide reveal between horizontal ends of panels as shown on shop drawings. Vertical Joinery: Working from left to right, connect that far left panel to the far-right panel at joinery. If panels are erected left to right, connect the far-right panel to the far left panel at joinery.

3. Rainscreen Installation: Proceed with installation of manufacturer’s dry seal horizontal joinery. Keep open spaces in horizontal joinery intended to ventilate cavity behind system.

E. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.

1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure.

2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal panels.

3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer.

4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.

5. Flash and seal panels with weather closures at perimeter of all openings.

F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar



items. Provide types indicated by metal wall panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.

G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.

C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 074213.13


METAL VENTED SOFFIT PANELS 074213.14 - 1

SECTION 074213.14 - METAL VENTED SOFFIT PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal vented soffit panels.


1. Division 05 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for support framing, including girts, studs, and bracing.

2. Division 07 Section "Formed Metal Wall Panels and Soffits” for lap-seam metal wall panels attached to exterior wall assemblies and soffits where indicated on drawings.

3. Division 07 Section "Metal Panel Roof Screens” for metal panels systems engineered by contractor and attached to steel framing for mechanical equipment roof screens.

4. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing and other sheet metal work that is not part of metal wall panel assemblies.

5. Section 077200 “Roof Accessories” for extruded rigid aluminum continuous soffit vents installed adjacent to formed metal soffits specified in this section.

6. Section 077200 “Roof Accessories” for gravity ventilators installed in gable ends.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. Metal Wall Panel Assembly: Metal wall panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight wall system.


A. General Performance: Metal wall panel assemblies shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Structural Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures:

a. Uniform pressure as indicated on Drawings.



2. Deflection Limits: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal deflections no greater than 1/240 of the span.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of wall panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal wall panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory-, shop- and field-assembled work.

1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches:

a. Flashing and trim. b. Anchorage systems.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal wall panel indicated with factory-applied color finishes.

1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. 2. Include manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full

range of colors available for each sealant exposed to view.

D. Maintenance Data: For metal wall panels to include in maintenance manuals.

E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal wall panel from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Deliver components, sheets, metal wall panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal wall panels for protection during transportation and handling.



B. Unload, store, and erect metal wall panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal wall panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal wall panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal wall panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal wall panel for period of metal wall panel installation.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal wall panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by field measurements before metal wall panel fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal wall panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of studs, soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.




B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANEL MATERIALS

A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; structural quality.

2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Multi-coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

4. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING

A. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise indicated.

B. Subgirts: Manufacturer's standard C- or Z-shaped sections, 0.064-inch nominal thickness.

C. Base or Sill Angles and Channels: 0.079-inch nominal thickness.

D. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels:

1. Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements . 2. Depth: 7/8 inch .

E. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

1. Nominal Thickness: As indicated .

F. Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to substrates.


A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed



fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.

2.4 CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS (Roof Screen)

2.5 METAL SOFFIT PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

A. Flush-Profile Vented Metal Soffit Panels: Perforated panels formed with vertical panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between panel edges; with flush joint between panels.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide FW-12 Soffit

Panels by Berridge Manufacturing Company or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Atlas International, Inc. b. Dimensional Metals, Inc. c. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.

2. Panel Coverage: 12 inches. 3. Panel Height: 1-1/2 inch. 4. Ventilation: 6.82 sq. in. of net free vented area per 1 Ln./Ft. of panels (12" wide).

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal wall panels.

2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer.

3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.018-inch minimum thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal wall panels.



2.7 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.

C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.



3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.


5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.


2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS


B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal wall panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of work.



3. Verify that weather-resistant sheathing paper has been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

4. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal wall panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal wall panels before metal wall panel installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal wall panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.3 METAL SOFFIT PANEL INSTALLATION

A. In addition to complying with requirements of "Metal Wall Panel Installation, General" Article, install metal soffit panels to comply with the requirements of this article.

B. Metal Soffit Panels: Provide metal soffit panels full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing.

1. Flash and seal panels with weather closures where metal soffit panels meet walls and at perimeter of all openings.

3.4 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.



B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.

C. Replace metal wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



METAL PANEL ROOF SCREENS 074213.15 - 1

SECTION 074213.15 - METAL PANEL ROOF SCREENS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exposed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels for rooftop mechanical screen. 2. Engineering Analysis of metal wall panels for rooftop mechanical screen.


1. Division 05 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for support framing, including girts, studs, and bracing.


3. Division 07 Section "Formed Metal Wall Panels and Soffits” for lap-seam metal wall panels attached to exterior wall assemblies and soffits where indicated on drawings.

4. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing and other sheet metal work that is not part of metal wall panel assemblies.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. Metal Roof Panel Assembly: Metal wall panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight wall system.


A. General Performance: Metal wall panel assemblies shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Design metal wall panels for rooftop mechanical screen, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer licensed in the state of Missouri, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Structural Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures:



a. Uniform pressure as indicated on Drawings.

2. Deflection Limits: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal deflections no greater than 1/240 of the span.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of wall panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal wall panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory-, shop- and field-assembled work.

1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches:

a. Flashing and trim. b. Anchorage systems.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal wall panel indicated with factory-applied color finishes.

1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. 2. Include manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full

range of colors available for each sealant exposed to view.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal wall panels for rooftop mechanical screens indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer licensed in the state of Missouri and responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of metal wall panels for rooftop mechanical screen. 2. Include design calculations.

E. Maintenance Data: For metal wall panels to include in maintenance manuals.

F. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.



B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal wall panel from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Engineering Responsibility: Licensed Engineer in the state of Missouri; Prepare data for metal wall panels for rooftop mechanical screens, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project.


A. Deliver components, sheets, metal wall panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal wall panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal wall panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal wall panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal wall panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal wall panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal wall panel for period of metal wall panel installation.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal wall panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by field measurements before metal wall panel fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal roof panel assemblies with other work and structural supports to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.






B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANEL MATERIALS

A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; structural quality.

2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Multi-coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

4. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING

A. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise indicated.

B. Subgirts: Manufacturer's standard C- or Z-shaped sections, 0.064-inch nominal thickness.

C. Base or Sill Angles and Channels: 0.079-inch nominal thickness.

D. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels:

1. Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch.

E. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.



1. Nominal Thickness: As determined by metal panel roof screen engineer.

F. Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to substrates.


A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.

2.4 CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS (Roof Screen)

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

B. Flush-Profile, Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels : Formed with vertical panel edges and flat pan between panel edges; with flush joint between panels.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Berridge

Manufacturing Co.; HR-16 Metal Wall Panel or comparable product by one of the following: a. ATAS International, Inc. b. Dimension Metals, Inc. c. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.

2. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 22 gauge nominal thickness.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range including custom colors.

3. Panel Coverage: 16 inches. 4. Panel Height: 7/8 inches.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal wall panels.

2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer.

3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or



premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.018-inch minimum thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal wall panels.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.

C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.



3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.


5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.








PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal wall panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of work.



3. Verify that weather-resistant sheathing paper has been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

4. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal wall panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal wall panels before metal wall panel installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal wall panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.3 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal wall panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts and subgirts unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels. 2. Flash and seal metal wall panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping

screws. Do not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be concealed by metal wall panels are installed.

3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds.



6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.

7. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing.

8. Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws.

9. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.

B. Fasteners:

1. Steel Wall Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

a. Install peel-and-stick membrane, or preformed gaskets and sealants at building wrap fastener penetrations. Provide types of gaskets recommended by building wrap manufacturer.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.

D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weathertight performance of metal wall panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.

1. Seal metal wall panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

E. Zee Clips: Provide Zee clips of size indicated or, if not indicated, as required to act as standoff from subgirts for thickness of insulation indicated. Attach to subgirts with fasteners.

3.4 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of



intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.

C. Replace metal wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



FIBER-CEMENT SIDING 074646 - 1

SECTION 074646 - FIBER-CEMENT SIDING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Exterior, panelized fiber cement cladding system and accessories to complete a drained and back-ventilated rainscreen.


1. Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for cold-formed metal framing supporting panelized fiber cement cladding systems.

2. Section 061600 “Sheathing” for exterior wall sheathing to receive panelized fiber cement cladding systems.

3. Section 072726 “Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers” for air barriers that are part of panelized fiber cement cladding system rainscreen.

4. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for field-formed flashings and other sheet metal work not part of panelized fiber cement cladding systems.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate siding installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing.




A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type, color, texture, and pattern required.

1. 12-inch-long-by-actual-width Sample of siding. 2. 12-inch-long-by-actual-width Samples of trim and accessories.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of fiber-cement siding.



B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for fiber-cement siding.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of fiber-cement siding required, from ICC-ES.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of product, including related accessories, to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups for fiber-cement siding including accessories.

a. Size: 48 inches long by 60 inches high. b. Include outside corner on one end of mockup and inside corner on other end.




A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with labels intact until time of use.

B. Store materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. If panels are exposed to water or water vapor prior to installation, allow to completely dry before installing. Failure to do so may result in panel shrinkage at ship lap joints, and such action may void warranty.

D. Panels MUST be carried on edge. Do not carry or lift panels flat. Improper handling may cause cracking or panel damage.

E. Direct contact between the panels and the ground should be avoided at all times. It is necessary to keep panels clean during installation process.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including cracking and deforming. b. Deterioration of materials beyond normal weathering. c. Peeling, blistering, and wrinkling.



d. Significant loss of the product’s original colors, patterns, or appearance. e. Manufactured defects in fiber cement panels.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain products, including related accessories, from single source from single manufacturer.


A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 50 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84.

B. Labeling: Provide fiber-cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 1186 by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Ignition Resistance: No sustained flaming of panels when tested in accordance with NFPA 268.

D. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly.

E. Water Penetration (ASTM E-331): No water leakage observed into wall cavity.

F. Weather Resistant (ASTM G-23): No cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, or other detrimental effects observed.

G. Mean Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion (ASTM E-228): Max 1.0*10^-5 in./in. F.

H. Wind Load: Test according to ASTM E-330, wind loads as indicated on Drawings.

2.3 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Nichiha Fiber

Cement Company, or a comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

1. Color 1 (GRAY): Nichiha Fiber Cement Company: Modern Series – Architectural

Block AWP 1818. 2. Colors 2, 3, and 4 (BLUES): Nichiha Fiber Cement Company: Designer Series –

Illumination AWP 1818.

B. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch.

C. Panel Size: 18 inches high by 72 inches wide.

D. Panel Texture: 1. Color 1: Matte, lightly textured or as selected by Architect from full range of options. 2. Colors 2, 3, 4 and 5: Matte, smooth or as selected by Architect from full range of options.



E. Colors: 1. Color 1: Gray 2. Color 2: Blue- Custom color to be selected by Architect. 3. Color 3: Blue- Custom color to be selected by Architect. 4. Color 4: Blue- Custom color to be selected by Architect. 5. Color 5: Blue- Custom color to be selected by Architect.

F. Factory sealed on six (6) sides.

G. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Panel Fastening System: Provide manufacturers standard fastening clip attachment rainscreen system.

B. Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips/tracks, panel clips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps, finish clips, single and double flange sealant backers, j-mold, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration.

1. Corner Trim: Corner Key trim or comparable product. 2. Finish: Clear anodized aluminum.

C. Flashing: Provide aluminum or stainless-steel flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated. Flashing must be galvanized or anodized per manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant as recommended by manufacturer.

1. For fastening to metal, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1/4 inch, or three screw-threads, into substrate.

2. For fastening fiber cement, use stainless-steel fasteners.

E. Sealant: Manufacturer’s recommended sealant that complies with ASTM C920, Class 35.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fiber-cement siding and related accessories.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

1. Do not install damaged components. 2. Install fasteners no more than 16 inches o.c. into stud framing.

B. Vertical Control/Expansion Joints: Provide per manufacturer’s written installation instructions within 2-10 feet of outside corners finished with metal trim and approximately every 30 feet thereafter.

C. Horizontal/Compression Joints: Provide per manufacturer’s written installation instructions at multi-story installations. Locate ½” minimum flashed joints at floor lines. Do not caulk.

1. Steel-framed buildings of more than three floors (or 45 feet) require a compression joint every 25 feet at a floor line.

D. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and to produce a weathertight installation.


A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements.

B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction.




THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK


THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 1

SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Adhered TPO membrane roofing system. 2. Cover board. 3. Roof insulation. 4. Walk Pads. 5. Roof manufacturer’s warranty coverage required under this Section for Roof Specialties

(membrane roof edge terminations) specified elsewhere.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Section 073113 “Asphalt Shingles” for flashing TPO membrane roofing systems into

asphalt shingle roofing systems. 3. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal reglets, flashings, and

counterflashings. 4. Section 077100 "Roof Specialties" for roof-edge flashing and copings. 5. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. TPO: Thermoplastic polyolefin.

B. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.


A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.



C. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Corner Uplift Pressure: 90 lbf/sq.ft. 2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: 60 lbf/sq.ft. 3. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: 40 lbf/sq.ft.

D. FM Approvals Listing: Provide membrane roofing, base flashings, and component materials that comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 and FM Approvals 4470 as part of a membrane roofing system, and that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals markings.

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90. 2. Hail Resistance: SH.



B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam. 2. Roof insulation. 3. Walkway pads or rolls. 4. Metal termination bars. 5. Battens. 6. One insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. Submit proof of attendance at the quality control seminar hosted by the roofing system manufacturer required under Quality Assurance.

B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system, from the ICC-ES .



E. Warranties: Sample of total system warranties. Submit manufacturer’s warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.


A. General: Perform Work in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, latest standards, and details and in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. When project is complete, notify Owner 48 hours prior to manufacturer's final inspection. All repairs necessary for the warranty will be made immediately thereafter.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has participated in the manufacture of specified products, with a minimum of 10 years documented experience and a UL listing for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project.

C. Installer Qualifications: A qualified contractor that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's total system warranty and has been specializing in performing the work of this Section, with a minimum of 5 years documented experience. In addition, the contractor shall have at least 20 installations similar to the one specified with base manufacturer and must have had key personnel attend a quality control seminar hosted by the manufacturer within the past 12 months.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation, fasteners, and roof edge terminations specified in Section 077100 "Roof Specialties," for membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing.

E. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

F. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment

curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.




A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1. At ambient temperatures of 40 degrees F or below, including wind chill, cold adhesive shall be stored in a warm location prior to immediate use (within 4 hours).

1.11 PROTECTION

A. Protect surfaces adjacent to roofing work against staining or mechanical damage

B. Continually protect all areas of the building from water infiltration and damage during roofing operations.

1.12 TOTAL ROOFING SYSTEM WARRANTY

A. Provide written warranty, signed by the manufacturer and backed by a certified warranty pool, agreeing to replace or repair defective materials and workmanship, covering all materials and labor costs for a period of Twenty-Years (20 years) from the date of substantial completion.

1. Warranty includes but not limited to roofing membrane, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate board, roofing accessories, and other components of roofing system.

2. Warranty shall have no monetary limit provisions, be non-prorated, and enforceable to a ground wind speed of 72-miles per hour.

3. Provisions in the warranty shall not place unreasonable performance and/or financial demands on the Owner such as: roof inspections after every storm event; limiting foot traffic on the roof without prior notification; documented proof of roofing system maintenance; forensic research for the source and/or cause of roof leak(s); imposing short time



notification periods that do not allow adequate time for Owner to become aware of leak(s) and to notify manufacturer.

4. Any legal proceedings regarding the warranty and its coverage, terms, and limitations shall be commenced in a court of competent jurisdiction in the area in which the Project is located.

B. Warranty coverage shall include Section 077100 “Roof Specialties” installed as membrane roof edge termination.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING

A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet.


a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated; Sure-Weld TPO. b. Versico Incorporated; Versiweld TPO.

2. Thickness: a. Base Bid: 60 mils, nominal. b. Alternate Bid: 80 mils, nominal.

3. Sheet Width: Factory-fabricate into largest sheets possible. 4. Exposed Face Color: Tan or Gray (as selected by Architect).

2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing, of same material, type, thickness and color as sheet membrane.

C. Membrane Coated Metal Flashing: Manufacturer's standard thermoplastic polyolefin coated 24- gauge sheet metal flashing; color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard range.

D. Prefabricated Pipe Flashings: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer.

E. Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate by roof membrane manufacturer.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Carlisle Coatings CCW-702

Primer.

F. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.



G. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.

H. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.

I. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.

J. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.

2.3 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured by TPO membrane roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated and that produce FM Approvals-approved roof insulation.

B. Main Roof Flat Insulation: Provide insulation boards to achieve a minimum flat insulation depth of 5-1/2 inches (R-30), 48 inch square boards maximum.

1. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation (Polyiso): ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class I, Grade 3, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.

C. Tapered Insulation (where indicated and required to achieved indicated slopes): Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to 1/4-inch slopes (1/2 inch for crickets) as required to achieve minimum roof pitches of 1/4-inch per foot; 1/2-inch at low typical at all tapered areas and sumps in flat insulation areas.

D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing.

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

C. Bead-Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended bead-applied, low-rise, one- or multicomponent urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer. OR

D. Full-Spread Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer.

E. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch thick, factory primed.




a. Georgia-Pacific Building Products; Dens Deck Prime. b. United States Gypsum Company; Securock Glass-Fiber Roof Board.

2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Surface Finish: Factory primed.

2.5 WALKWAYS

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

1. Contractor will be held responsible for keeping the building and contents protected from water damage during entire construction period.

3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.



B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.

E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.

F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

G. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type.

1. Fasten first layer of insulation according to requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

2. Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

3. Set each subsequent layer of insulation by one of the following methods as recommended by roofing manufacturer:

a. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. OR

b. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

H. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and adhere to roof insulation.

3.4 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Adhere membrane on all roof areas using largest sheet practical for job conditions. Avoid wrinkling or stretching the membrane. Unroll roofing membrane and allow membrane to relax a minimum of 30 minutes before installing.

B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

C. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.



D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to splice area of membrane roofing.

E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.

F. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet membrane.

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas. 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.

H. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in place with clamping ring.

I. Install membrane roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain weathertightness of transition and to not void warranty for existing membrane roofing system.

3.5 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install manufacturer’s standard materials according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Incorporate factory fabricated accessories whenever possible, including, but not limited to inside and outside corners, pipe and tubing boots, and expansion joint assemblies.

C. Terminate membrane with products included in the warranty.

D. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

F. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.

G. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

H. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations.

I. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.



3.6 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Require site attendance of manufacturer’s field inspectors regularly during installation.

C. Verify field strength of seams as often as required and in accordance with the roofing system manufacturer’s written instructions. Repair seam sample areas.

D. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion.

E. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

F. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.



SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1

SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications. 2. Formed steep-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 3. Miscellaneous sheet metal fabrications.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Section 077100 “Roof Specialties” for manufactured copings and roof edges. 3. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof

hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.

B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details.

Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location

in Project. 4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.



5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.

6. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 7. Include details of special conditions. 8. Include details of connections to adjoining work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory-applied finishes.


A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

1. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. 2. Protect stored sheet metal flashing and trim from contact with water.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces .

2.2 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet according to ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Multi-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605-05. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

3. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal.



1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329.

C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,

buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.



E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.

H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.5 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter brackets and flat-stock gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with thickness not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters.

1. Gutter Profile: Style D according to cited sheet metal standard. 2. Expansion Joints: Lap type. 3. Accessories: Wire-ball downspout strainer.

4. Gutters with Girth up to 20 Inches: Fabricate from the following materials: a. Galvanized Steel: 24 gauge thick.

5. Gutters with Girth 21 to 25 Inches: Fabricate from the following materials: a. Galvanized Steel: 22 gauge thick.

6. Gutters with Girth 26 to 30 Inches: Fabricate from the following materials: a. Galvanized Steel: 20 gauge thick.

B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors.

1. Fabricated Hanger Style: Fig 1-35B according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."

2. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Galvanized Steel: 24 gauge thick.

C. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers to dimensions required, with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch- wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 24 gauge thick.

D. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions and shape required, complete with outlet tubes, exterior flange trim, and built-in overflows. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 24 gauge thick.

E. Splash Pans: Fabricate to dimensions and shape required and from the following materials: 1. Stainless Steel: 28 gauge thick.



2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 24 gauge thick.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 24 gauge thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored. 3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing

substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.



A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks.

5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.



1. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.

1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.

3.3 ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.

B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.

1. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter. 2. Anchor gutter with gutter brackets spaced not more than 36 inches apart to roof deck,

unless otherwise indicated, and loosely lock to front gutter bead. 3. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet apart.

Install expansion-joint caps.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints.

1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.

2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system.

D. Parapet Scuppers: Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane.

1. Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and seal with elastomeric sealant to scupper.



2. Loosely lock front edge of scupper with conductor head.

E. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall, with elevation of conductor head rim at minimum of 1 inch below scupper discharge.

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches. Secure in waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant unless otherwise indicated.


A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean off excess sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.

D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 - 1

SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof-edge flashings.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Section 075423 “Thermoplastic Membrane (TPO) Roofing” for warranty coverage on

membrane roof edge termination specialties specified herein. 3. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for custom- and site-fabricated sheet

metal flashing and trim. 4. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, and other

manufactured roof accessory units. 5. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants between roof specialties and

adjacent materials.


A. General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. FM Approvals' Listing: Manufacture and install copings and roof-edge flashings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-60 . Identify materials with FM Approvals' markings.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.





A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work. Include the following:

1. Details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including direction of expansion and contraction.

2. Pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. 3. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 4. Details of special conditions.

C. Samples for Verification: For copings and roof-edge flashings made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components including fasteners, cover joints, accessories, and attachments.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof specialties installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXPOSED METALS

A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.



1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with

ASTM A 755/A 755M. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. a. Multi-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. System consisting of primer, fluoropolymer

color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight.

2.2 CONCEALED METALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions (roof-edge flashings): ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.

B. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet (copings): ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Fasteners for Aluminum: Series 300 stainless steel. 2. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-

dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

C. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

2.4 ROOF-EDGE FLASHINGS

A. Roof-Edge Fascia: Manufactured, two-piece, roof-edge fascia consisting of snap-on metal fascia cover in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet and a continuous formed- or extruded-aluminum anchor bar with integral drip-edge cleat to engage fascia cover. Provide matching corner units.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Carlisle

Syntec; SecurEdge 2000 with Carlisle TPO system, or Versico; VersiTrim 2000 with

Versico TPO system.

2. Fascia Cover: Fabricated from the following exposed metal: a. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 24 gauge.

3. Fascia Cover Height: 5-1/2 inches minimum. 4. Splice Plates: Concealed, of same material, finish, and shape as fascia cover. 5. Fascia Accessories: Fascia extenders with continuous hold-down cleats.

B. Zinc-Coated Steel Finish: Multi-coat fluoropolymer.



1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.




C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties.

C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.

1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify

shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. 4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.

1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners or intersections unless otherwise shown on Drawings.

2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.



C. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance .

D. Seal joints with sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.

E. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.

3.3 COPING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.

3.4 ROOF-EDGE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet performance requirements.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition during construction.

C. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 1

SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment supports. 2. Roof hatches. 3. Pipe supports. 4. Extruded Rigid Aluminum Continuous Soffit Vents. 5. Gravity ventilators at gable end.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders, and stairs for access to roof hatches.

2. Division 07 Section "Formed Metal Wall Panels and Soffits” for lap-seam metal wall panels in exterior soffits install adjacent to Extruded Rigid Aluminum Continuous Soffit Vents specified in this section.


4. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-formed metal flashing, roof-drainage systems, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories.

5. Section 077100 "Roof Specialties" for manufactured fasciae, copings, gravel stops, gutters and downspouts, and counterflashing.

6. Section 077253 "Snow Guards" for snow guards.


A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.


A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.



B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Indicate dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type, color, texture, and pattern required.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL MATERIALS

A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, manufacturer's standard alloy for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. Mill Finish: As manufactured.

C. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221, manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for type of use, finished to match assembly where used, otherwise mill finished.

D. Galvanized-Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, galvanized.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, thickness as indicated.

C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.



D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

E. Underlayment: 1. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.

F. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

G. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.

H. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.

I. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.

2.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Equipment Supports: Internally reinforced metal equipment supports capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.


a. AES Industries, Inc. b. Curbs Plus, Inc. c. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products. d. Greenheck Fan Corporation. e. LM Curbs. f. Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. g. Pate Company (The). h. Roof Products, Inc. i. Thybar Corporation. j. Vent Products Co., Inc.

B. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

C. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick.

1. Finish: Mill phosphatized.



D. Construction: 1. Factory-installed continuous wood nailers 3-1/2 inches wide at tops of equipment

supports. 2. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same metal

and finish as equipment support. 3. Fabricate equipment supports to minimum height of 12 inches unless otherwise

indicated.

2.4 ROOF HATCH

A. Roof Hatches: Metal roof-hatch units with lids and insulated single-walled curbs, welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing and weathertight perimeter gasketing, stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bilco Company (The). b. J. L. Industries, Inc. c. O'Keeffe's Inc. d. Pate Company (The). e. Precision Ladders, LLC.

B. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 48 inches square.

C. Hatch Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.090 inch thick.

1. Finish: Mill.

D. Construction:

1. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board. 2. Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard metal

liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid. 3. Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as metal curb. 4. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.

E. Hardware: Stainless-steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.

F. Safety Railing System: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard system including rails, clamps, fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and accessories required for a complete installation; attached to roof hatch and complying with 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements and authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck. 2. Posts and Rails: Aluminum pipe, 1-1/4 inches in diameter or aluminum tube, 1-5/8

inches in diameter. 3. Maximum Opening Size: System constructed to prevent passage of a sphere 21

inchesin diameter. 4. Self-Latching Gate: Fabricated of same materials and rail spacing as safety railing

system. Provide manufacturer's standard hinges and self-latching mechanism.



5. Post and Rail Tops and Ends: Weather resistant, closed or plugged with prefabricated end fittings.

6. Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of handrail and railing members.

7. Fabricate joints exposed to weather to be watertight. 8. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, finished to match railing system. 9. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

G. Ladder-Assist Post: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard device for attachment to roof-access ladder.

1. Operation: Post locks in place on full extension; release mechanism returns post to closed position.

2. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck. 3. Material: Aluminum. 4. Post: 1-5/8-inch- diameter pipe. 5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel or powder coat .

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.5 PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, pipe, conduit, and ductwork support systems shall be Cooper, Inc.; B-Line C-Port or a comparable product.

1. Single pipe or conduit support – C-Port model numbers CXP, C Series, or C6 Series, as required for height of pipe or conduit from roof surface, base dimensions: 6-inch wide by 4-inch tall by 9.6-inch length. To be used with one-piece galvanized pipe clamp, one pipe size larger than gas pipe and fastened directly into rubber material with weather resistant type 12 lag screws for CXP or to steel channel with clamps for C and C6 Series. For 2 ½ inch nominal pipe size and larger, use C-Port “CR” series with pipe roller.

2. Multi-pipe/equipment support – C-Port C-Series models or CB-Series “Bridge Type” to suit number of pipes or equipment fastened, allowing 1-inch of space at either end of support.

3. Ductwork support – C-Port CS-Series to be used with galvanized duct support frames fastened to adapter leg. Provide in standard lengths required for each duct size to be supported.

4. Extendable height support – C-Port model CE 10-8, 12, or 16, height to suit application: 8-inch, 12-inch or 16-inch (200 pound maximum load). Base to be 9.6 inches in length or otherwise specified sizes available as per C series. For heavier loads, additional height options and variable angle options, use C-Port CS-Series.

5. Pipe/conduit clamps to be channel style, B-Line B2000 or B2400 series or a comparable product, made of galvanized steel.



2.6 EXTRUDED RIGID ALUMINUM CONTINOUS SOFFIT VENTS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 4" Wide

Continuous Soffit Vent by Air Vent, Inc. or comparable product as approved by Architect prior to bidding.

B. Material: Extruded, industry standard, durable, chemically resistant product designed for outdoor weatherability.

C. Free Venting Area: 9 square inches of net free area minimum per linear foot.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of options.

2.7 GRAVITY VENTILATORS AT GABLE END

A. Gable End Louvers: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated as indicated, with manufacturer's standard welded or sealed mechanical joints.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Gable End

Louvers by Air Vent Inc., or comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding. 2. Quantities and Dimensions: as shown on drawings. 3. Provide drip edge flashing at top of wall louver. 4. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads.

3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.

4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals.



B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene sheet.

C. Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level with each other.

D. Roof-Hatch Installation:

1. Install roof hatch so top surface of hatch curb is level. 2. Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating

mechanism and hardware. 3. Attach safety railing system to roof-hatch curb. 4. Attach ladder-assist post according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Pipe Support Installation: Install pipe supports so top surfaces are in contact with and provide equally distributed support along length of supported item.

F. Use properly sized clamps to suit pipe and conduit sizes.

G. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.

H. Install extruded rigid aluminum continuous soffit vents in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.

I. Gravity Gable End Ventilator Installation.

1. Install gravity wall ventilators in vertical parapet walls as indicated on roof plan and details.

2. Verify that gravity ventilators operate properly and have unrestricted airflow. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating mechanisms.

3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to ASTM A 780.

B. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



SNOW GUARDS 077253 - 1

SECTION 077253 - SNOW GUARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Gusseted snow guards for asphalt shingle roof systems that attached directly to roof deck.


1. Section 073113 “Asphalt Shingles” for asphalt shingles attached to roof sheathing.


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for snow guards.

B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans showing layouts and attachment details of snow guards.

1. Include details of snow guards.

2. Include calculation of number and location of snow guards based on snow load, roof

slope, roof type, components, spacings, and finish.

C. Samples: Full-size unit.


A. Product Test Reports: For each type of snow guard, for tests performed by manufacturer and

witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Performance Requirements: Provide snow guards that withstand exposure to weather and resist

thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, or fastener disengagement due to

defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.



1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient.

B. Structural Performance:

1. Snow Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

2.2 PAD-TYPE SNOW GUARDS

A. Flat-Mounted Metal Snow Guard Pads:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 40 Half-

round Snow Guard for Shingle Roofing; Alpine SnowGuards; a division of

Vermont Slate & Copper Services, Inc. or comparable product by one of the

following:

a. Berger Building Products.

b. PMC Industries, Inc.

c. Roofers Edge.

d. Sieger Snow Guards Inc.

e. Sno-Gem, Inc.

f. SnoGuard.

g. TRA-MAGE, Inc.

h. Zaleski Snow-Guards for Roofs, Inc.

2. Material: Stainless-steel sheet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances, snow guard attachment, and other conditions affecting performance of

the Work.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates including compatibility with

existing finishes or primers.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and prepare substrates for bonding snow guards.

B. Prime substrates according to snow guard manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Standard Three-Row Pattern at Roof Eave: Space snow guards at 24” on center

horizontally, 2 courses of shingles vertically, with the second row offset 12”.



2. See roof plan for additional snow guard locations and spacing. The contractor shall

include the most stringent requirements between the manufacturer’s instructions, the

drawings and these specifications.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install snow guards according to manufacturer's written instructions. Space rows as

recommended by manufacturer.

B. Attachment for Asphalt Shingle Roofing:

1. Flat-Mounted, Snow Guard Pads: Mechanically anchored through predrilled holes

concealed by the shingles.



PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.



B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency.

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

D. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials. 2. Substrate primers. 3. Collars. 4. Steel sleeves.



2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.

B. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

C. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or inorganic fibers.

D. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

E. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

F. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

G. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants.

2.4 MIXING

A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials.



2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping.

C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.


A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2174.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out



and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.6 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

B. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing (Wall Penetrations):

1. UL-Classified Systems: W-J-.1218 2. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating

C. Firestopping for Insulated Pipes (Metal Stud and Gypsum Board Wall Penetrations):

1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L- 5291. 2. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

D. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Insulated Pipes (Concrete or Masonry Wall Penetrations):

1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L-5149. 2. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.



JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Latex joint sealants. 3. Urethane joint sealants.


1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets.

2. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire-resistance-rated construction.

3. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 4. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Sealant manufacturer’s project recommendations stating proper surface preparation for each substrate, type of primer if required, and sealant(s) to be used.

D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups required for adjacent materials as indicated in other sections. Use materials and installation as required for the completed work.



D. Field adhesion testing (to be performed before job start up).

1. Conduct field tests for adhesion of joint sealants to actual joint substrates using proposed joint preparation methods recommended by manufacturer.

2. Conduct test for each joint type of sealant and substrate.

3. Locate field test joints where inconspicuous or at approved locations.

4. Test methods: Use manufacturer’s standard field adhesion test methods required by sealant manufacturer. Methods should verify priming and substrate preparation techniques required to obtain optimum adhesion.

5. Sealant manufacturer to evaluate and report results of field adhesion testing.

6. Do not use joint preparation methods or sealants that produce less than satisfactory adhesion to joint substrate during testing.


A. Deliver all materials to the jobsite in their original unopened containers, with all labels intact.

B. Store materials in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.7 MOCK-UP

A. Construct mock-ups as required by Architect to demonstrate: 1. Location, size shape, color, and depth of joints complete with back-up material, primer,

and new sealant. Mock-up may be part of finished work.

B. Joint width conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application intended.

C. Joint substrate conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion and removed from joint substrates.



1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion for silicone sealants.

B. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT [JS-1].

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790 . b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. Pecora Corporation; 890 . d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1 .

B. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT [JS-3].




a. Pecora Corporation; 898.

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. A Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T [JS-4]:


a. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 45SSL.

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF [JS-2].


a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. b. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) , or other type(s) as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 1. Sealant Backings shall be 15% min. larger than joint width.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.



C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.



3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per

Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

G. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. Field Adhesion Testing for Sealants:



1. The Contractor shall provide field adhesion testing of the sealant on all anticipated substrates, prior to widespread application / installation. Coordinate testing with other trades for compatibility of adjacent materials.

2. Install samples at least three (3) weeks prior to the start of widespread application to ensure proper curing of the material before testing.

3. Adhesion testing will be used to review and determine the requirements for preparation, priming, application and overall adhesion of the material.

4. Prepare and prime the substrates as will be completed for widespread application. 5. Sealants: Apply sealant to substrate and tool to form one (1) inch wide and ¼ inch thick

strips; provide a release paper at end to create a tab for pulling. Provide three (3) samples for each substrate. After curing, use pull-tab and pull the sealant at 90 degrees to the surface. Sealant should elongate at least 100% prior to any failure mechanism. When pulled beyond 100%, cohesive failure mode (tearing with the sealant material itself is acceptable. Is adhesive failure occurs (debonding), contact the manufacturer representative for additional preparation / priming requirements, and provide additional samples.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces [JS-1].

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. c. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows and

louvers. e. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. f. Other joints as indicated.

2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 100/50 . 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors .

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces [JS-2].



1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry walls and partitions. e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and

windows . f. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Latex . 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors .

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces [JS-3].

1. Joint Sealant Location:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. c. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Silicone . 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors .

D. Joint-Sealant Application: For exterior and interior joints in horizontal and sloped traffic surfaces [JS-4]:

1. Joint Sealant Location: a. Control, expansion and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Control, expansion and isolation joints in structural precast concrete units. c. Joints between architectural precast concrete paving units. d. Tile control and expansion joints. e. Joints between different materials listed above.

2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, pourable, traffic grade. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes but not limited to:

1. Interior standard door frames and borrow lights.


1. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”. 2. Division 08 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances, Storefronts, and FRP Doors”. 3. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. 4. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in hollow metal doors. 5. Division 26 "Electrical" Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for

door controls and operators installed on frames with factory installed electrical knock out boxes.

6. Division 28 Section "Access Control" for access control devices installed at door openings and provided as part of a security access control system.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware, electrified door hardware, and access control and security systems.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes.



B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control

systems, and security systems. 7. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 8. Details of accessories. 9. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.

C. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule.


A. Deliver hollow-metal doors and frames palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal doors and frames vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product (standard steel frames): Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Steelcraft; an Allegion brand; Steelcraft Hollow Metal Doors and Frames or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY. 2. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY. 3. Republic Doors and Frames: an Allegion brand.

B. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide assemblies with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.



2. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

C. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Lite Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.

D. Thermally Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door assemblies with U-factor of not more than 0.70 deg Btu/F x h x sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM C 518.

2.2 INTERIOR STEEL FRAMES

A. Construct hollow-metal frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Standard Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3; SDI A250.4, Level A. At all locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Frames:

a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. b. Sidelite and Transom Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as

adjacent door frame. c. Construction: Fully welded, fully continuous profile welded.

2. Exposed Finish: Prime.

C. Fire rated frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA 80, listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 Table 4 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.

2.3 BORROWED LITES

A. Fabricate of uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.

B. Construction: Full profile welded.

C. Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as metal as frames.

D. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:



1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated.

2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height above 7 feet.

3. Postinstalled Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts, with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer.

B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor.

C. Material: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

D. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

F. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Door Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames.

1. Sidelite and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.



C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for hardware.

2.7 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with approved Shop Drawings and with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work.

a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes.

b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.

2. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80. 3. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

4. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.



5. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout or mortar.

6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with SDI A250.8 or NAAMM-HMMA 841 and NAAMM-HMMA guide specification indicated.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.

3.3 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP

A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.



FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Five-ply flush wood veneer-faced doors for transparent finish. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.


1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.



B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each type of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Door schedule indicating door location, type, size, fire protection rating, and swing. 2. Door elevations, dimension and locations of hardware, lite and louver cutouts, and

glazing thicknesses. 3. Details of frame for each frame type, including dimensions and profile. 4. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control

systems, and security systems. 5. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment. 6. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 7. Clearances and undercuts.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons, and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.



C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels designed for building occupants for the remainder of construction period.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Delamination of veneer. b. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. c. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch

span.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Rated Wood Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated on Drawings, based on testing at positive pressure in accordance with UL 10C or NFPA 252.

1. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing in accordance with UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with the Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard.



2.3 FIVE-PLY FLUSH WOOD VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Doors:

1. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom. 2. Faces: Single-ply wood veneer not less than 1/50 inch thick.

a. Species, Cut and Match: Select White Birch.

3. Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as faces or a compatible species - Architectural Woodwork Standards edge Type A.

a. Fire-Rated Single Doors: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed vertical edges.

b. Fire-Rated Pairs of Doors: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

c. Mineral-Core Doors: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

4. Core for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2 particleboard.

a. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows:

1) 5-inch top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. ALL CLOSERS TO BE THRU-BOLTED.

2) 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor plates.

3) 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.

5. Core for Fire-Rated Doors: As required to achieve fire-protection rating indicated on Drawings.

a. Blocking for Mineral-Core Doors: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated on Drawings as follows:

1) 5-inch top-rail blocking. ALL CLOSERS TO BE THRU-BOLTED. 2) 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates. 3) 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have armor plates. 4) 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.

6. Construction: Five plies, hot-pressed bonded (vertical and horizontal edging is bonded to core), with entire unit abrasive planed before veneering.

2.4 LIGHT FRAMES

A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.



2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard shape. 3. At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal

glazing clips approved for such use.

B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated on Drawings. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.

****** OR ******

C. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated on Drawings.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated.

1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

2. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

1. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. 2. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W,

and hardware templates. 3. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames, to verify dimensions and alignment

before factory machining. 4. For doors scheduled to receive electrified locksets, provide factory-installed raceway and

wiring to accommodate specified hardware. 5. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for

pairs of fire-rated doors.

C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with

applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing.

1. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

2. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. 3. Stains and fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Factory finish doors.

C. Transparent Finish:



1. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: Architectural Woodwork Standards System-10, UV Curable, Water Based.

****** OR ******

3. Finish: Architectural Woodwork Standards System-11, Polyurethane, Catalyzed.

4. Staining, Effect, and Sheen: As selected by Architect from full range of options.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

B. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

C. Install frames level, plumb, true, and straight.

1. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

2. Anchor frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.

a. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. b. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and

filled flush with woodwork.

1) For factory-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed.

3. Install fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80. 4. Install smoke- and draft-control doors in accordance with NFPA 105.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.



B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.



ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1

SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.



1. Include construction details material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:

1. Description: Face of door flush with frame; with concealed flange for gypsum board installation and concealed hinge.

2. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 3. Door Size: As indicated on drawings. 4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Factory primed. 5. Latch and Lock: Prepared for mortise cylinder.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

B. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.


ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 2

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated.

1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum panels securely attached to perimeter of frames.

D. Latch and Lock Hardware:

1. Quantity: Furnish number of latches and locks required to hold doors tightly closed. 2. Keys: Furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 3. Mortise Cylinder Preparation: Where indicated, prepare door panel to accept cylinder

specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

2.4 FINISHES


B. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.



OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 1

SECTION 083323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior insulated service doors. 2. Control Stations. 3. Emergency Egress Manual release pull handles.


1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for supplement hardware required for overhead coiling grilles.

2. Division 26 "Electrical" Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for door controls and operators.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for slats, and finishes.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories.

3. Include description of automatic closing device and testing and resetting instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies, and indicate dimensions, required clearances,

method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed

on structure. 4. For exterior components, include details of provisions for assembly expansion and

contraction and for excluding and draining moisture to the exterior. 5. Show locations of controls, locking devices, and other accessories. 6. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following components, in manufacturer's standard sizes:



1. Curtain Slats: 12 inches (305 mm) long[, including vision window secured to slat]. 2. Bottom Bar: 6 inches (150 mm) long[ with sensor edge]. 3. Guides: 6 inches (150 mm) long. 4. Brackets: 6 inches (150 mm) square. 5. Hood: 6 inches (150 mm) square.




A. Maintenance Data: For overhead coiling doors to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001:2008 registered and a minimum of five years experience in producing grilles of the type specified.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the, U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC A117.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain coiling overhaead coiling doors and components from single source from single manufacturer.

1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer.


A. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the design wind loads.

1. Design Wind Load: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Testing: According to ASTM E 330. 3. Deflection Limits: Design overhead coiling doors to withstand design wind load without

evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components. 4. Operability under Wind Load: Design overhead coiling doors to remain operable under

uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (960 Pa) wind load, acting inward and outward.



B. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Provide overhead coiling doors that pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests according to ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone indicated on structural drawings.

1. Large-Missile Test: For overhead coiling doors located within 30 feet (9.144 m) of grade. 2. Small-Missile Test: For overhead coiling doors located more than 30 feet (9.144 m)

above grade.

C. Seismic Performance: Overhead coiling doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Component Importance Factor: See Structural Drawings.

2.3 EXTERIOR DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Exterior Insulated Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following or approved by Architect prior to bidding.

a. Cookson Company. b. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. c. Overhead Door Corporation.

B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 100,000. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.

1. Include tamperproof cycle counter.

C. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.08 cfm/sq. ft. (0.406 L/s per sq. m) at 15 and 25 mph (24.1 and 40.2 km/h) when tested according to ASTM E 283.

D. STC Rating: 26.

E. Curtain R-Value: 6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (1.057 K x sq. m/W).

F. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel.

G. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 2-5/8-inch (67-mm) center-to-center height.

1. Insulated-Slat Interior Facing: Metal. 2. Gasket Seal. Manufacturer's standard continuous gaskets between slats.

H. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, fabricated stainless steel and finished to match door.

I. Curtain Jamb Guides: Stainless steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise.

J. Hood: Stainless steel.



1. Shape: Square. 2. Mounting: Face of wall.

K. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly.

L. Manual Door Operator: Manufacturer's standard crank operator.

M. Electric Door Operator:

1. Usage Classification: Medium duty, up to 12 cycles per hour and up to 50 cycles per day. 2. Operator Location: Wall, as shown on Drawings. 3. Safety: Listed according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial or

industrial use; moving parts of operator enclosed or guarded if exposed and mounted at 8 feet (2.44 m) or lower.

4. Motor Exposure: Interior, wet, and humid. 5. Emergency Manual Operation: Crank type. 1. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic electric sensor edge on bottom bar.

a. Sensor Edge Bulb Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Control Station(s): Interior mounted, as shown on Drawings.

N. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with weatherseals.

O. Door Finish:

1. Powder-Coated Finish: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: [Match finish of exterior curtain-slat face.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.5 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows:

1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled structural steel sheet; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90 (Z275) zinc coating; nominal sheet thickness (coated) of 0.028 inch (0.71 mm); and as required.

2. Insulation: Fill slats for insulated doors with manufacturer's standard thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84 or UL 723. Enclose insulation completely within slat faces.

3. Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face, with minimum aluminum thickness of 0.032 inch (0.80 mm).

B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain



curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain, and a continuous bar for holding windlocks.

2.6 HOODS

A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.

1. Galvanized Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch- thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

2.7 LOCKING DEVICES

A. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.

1. Lock Cylinders: Cylinders specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware"

B. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked.

2.8 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES

A. Weatherseals for Exterior Doors: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted to entire exterior perimeter of door for a weather-resistant installation unless otherwise indicated.

1. At door head, use 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, replaceable, continuous-sheet baffle secured to inside of hood or field- installed on the header.

2. At door jambs, use replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick seals of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene.

B. Poll Hooks: Provide pole hooks and poles for doors more than 84 inches (2130 mm) high.

2.9 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

B. Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.

C. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate.



2.10 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Equip door with manual door operator by door manufacturer.

B. Crank Operator: Consisting of crank and crank gearbox, steel crank drive shaft, and gear-reduction unit, of type indicated. Size gears to require not more than 25-lbf (111-N) force to turn crank. Fabricate gearbox to be oil tight and to completely enclose operating mechanism. Provide manufacturer's standard crank-locking device.

2.11 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation.

1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with

NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.

B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.

C. Door Operator Location(s): Operator location indicated for each door.

1. Wall Mounted: Operator is mounted to the inside front wall on the left or right side of door and connected to door drive shaft with drive chain and sprockets. Side room is required for this type of mounting. Wall mounted operator can also be mounted above or below shaft; if above shaft, headroom is required.

D. Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated.

1. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Phase: Single phase. b. Volts: 115 V. c. Hertz: 60.

2. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. (203 mm/s) and not more than 12 in./sec. (305 mm/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.

3. Operating Controls, Controllers, Disconnect Switches, Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

4. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed.

E. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.

F. Obstruction Detection Devices: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. For non-fire-rated doors, activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.



1. Electric Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable.

a. Self-Monitoring Type: Four-wire configured device designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor edge.

G. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. For non-fire-rated doors, activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. For fire-rated doors, activation delays closing.

1. Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable.

H. Control Station: Flush mounted, "Open/Close" key switch with "Stop" push button. Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1B enclosure. Provide one control station on each side of opening.

1. Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

2. Exterior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated.

I. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf (111 N).

J. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.

K. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.

L. Audible and Visual Signals: Audible alarm and visual indicator lights in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.


A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products (AMP 500-06)" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.



2.13 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.

2.14 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.

1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign

matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 3. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine locations of electrical connections.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.

B. Install overhead coiling doors, hoods, controls, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for each door.

C. Accessibility: Install overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.



3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.

1. Adjust exterior doors and components to be weather-resistant.

B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Adjust seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors.



ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND FRP DOORS

084113 - 1

SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND FRP DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior and Interior Storefront framing. 2. Exterior and Interior manual-swing entrance doors and storefront frames. 3. Exterior Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP) doors in aluminum frames. 4. Custom thermally broken sill flashings with end dams. 5. Exterior sunshades integrated with storefront systems.


1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with glazed Aluminum Framed Systems and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section.

2. Section 085113 “Aluminum Windows” for operable windows in punch openings. 3. Section 088000 “Glazing” for insulated glass units installed in Storefront systems. 4. Division 26 "Electrical" Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for

door controls and operators installed on frames with factory installed electrical knock out boxes.

5. Division 28 Section "Access Control" for access control devices installed at door openings and provided as part of a security access control system.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."


A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:

1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following:

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.



084113 - 2

b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and

structural movements to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure. g. Failure of operating units.

B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer licensed in the state of Missouri, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

D. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), whichever is smaller.

E. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds.

F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

H. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.



084113 - 3

I. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to AAMA 1503.

J. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having an average U-factor of not more than 0.63 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum-framed systems.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior.

2. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

D. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed systems, made from 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage.

E. Other Action Submittals:

1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems. 2. Include design calculations.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.



084113 - 4

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For aluminum-framed systems, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Preconstruction Test Reports: For sealant.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements.

F. Source quality-control reports.

G. Quality-Control Program for Structural-Sealant-Glazed System: Include reports.

H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project.

D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

E. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.



084113 - 5

F. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain all Aluminum-Framed systems including storefronts, exterior sun shades, operable windows in punch openings, swinging doors and FRP doors from single source from single manufacturer, see section 085113.

G. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

H. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Field testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality

Control" Article. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


2. Review and discuss the finishing of aluminum storefront that is required to be coordinated with the finishing of operable windows in punched openings, and other aluminum work for color and finish matching.

3. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of aluminum storefront with other exterior wall components. Include provisions for anchorage, flashing, sealing perimeters, and protecting finishes.

4. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and weathertight exterior building envelope.

5. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering. d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components.



084113 - 6


B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 403(T) Thermally

Broken for Exterior Storefront Systems and 402(NT) non-thermally broken for Interior

Storefront System by EFCO Corporation or comparable product by one of the following manufacturer or product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

1. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. 2. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 3. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company. 4. YKK AP America Inc.

B. Storefront frame depth:

1. 4 1/2” deep.

C. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain all Aluminum-Framed systems including storefronts, operable window vents, swinging doors and FRP doors from single source from single manufacturer, see section 085113.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.



084113 - 7

C. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Sheet: Thickness of .120” with the finish color for the full thickness of the sheet.

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: As indicated by basis of design product designation.

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing

system, fabricated from stainless steel.

D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.

E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type.

G. Framing System Subsill: Manufacturer’s standard high-performance extruded aluminum subsill, finish(es) to match storefront framing.

H. Custom thermally broken sill flashing w/ galvanized cleat as indicated on drawings. Finishes of all exposed flashing shall match storefront frame.

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.



084113 - 8

2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.

1. Door Construction: 2-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.1875-inch (3/16”) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum

members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior .

2. Door Design: Basis of Design D502 Wide Stile 2” ThermaStile Heavy Duty (Thermally

Broken) Entrance by EFCO Corporation, wide stile and top rail; 5-inch nominal width, 8” nominal width mid rail and 10” bottom rail. a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches (255

mm) above floor or ground plane.

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

B. Aluminum Frames for FRP Doors: Storefront thermally broken aluminum frames as specified.

2.6 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER (FRP) DOORS AND ALUMINUM FRAMES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Model SL-17, or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. 2. EFCO Corporation. 3. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 4. Special-Lite, Inc. 5. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company.

B. FRP Doors: Manufacturer's standard FRP doors for manual-swing operation.

1. Door Construction: 2-inch overall thickness, with aluminum alloy 6063-T5 0.188-inch minimum wall thickness, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

2. Corners: Mitered.

3. FRP Face Sheet: Manufacturer’s standard, 0.125-inch thick, finish color throughout. Interior and Exterior faces shall have different textures and colors.

a. Exterior Texture: Pebble. b. Interior Texture: Sandstone. c. Exterior Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full standard range of

colors. d. Interior Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full standard range of

colors.

4. Core: Poured-in-place polyurethane foam.



084113 - 9

a. Density: Minimum 5-lbs./pcf. b. R-Value: Minimum R-9.

5. Provide reinforcing to accept door hardware as required.

6. Door Design:

a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches (255 mm) above floor or ground plane.

7. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

A. Aluminum Frames for FRP Doors: Storefront thermally broken aluminum frames as specified.

2.7 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article and below for each entrance door to comply with requirements in this Section.

1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products.

2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.

3. Opening-Force Requirements:

a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch and not more than 30 lbf (133 N)to set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open the door to its minimum required width.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware designations as follows:

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article.

2. Balance of entrance door hardware required for a complete and functional installation, but not otherwise scheduled, shall be provided by door manufacturer.

C. Continuous-Gear Hinges: Manufacturer's standard with stainless-steel bearings between knuckles, fabricated to full height of door and frame.

D. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.

E. Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3, extruded aluminum.

1. When used with panic exit devices, provide removable mullions listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. Use only mullions that have been tested with exit devices to be used.



084113 - 10

F. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.

G. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on mounting strip.

H. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

2.8 SUN SHADES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide E-Shade Sun

Shades integrated with Storefront System by EFCO Corporation or comparable product by one of the manufacturers listed in 2.1.

B. Fabrication

1. All aluminum horizontal extrusions (blades) shall have a minimum wall thickness of .063" (1.5 mm) to .125" (3 mm).

2. Sunshade “arms” and mullion clips shall be extrusions with a nominal wall thickness of .25” (6 mm).

C. Sunshade Device

1. Horizontal components (blades) shall be mechanically fastened by means of extruded aluminum screw splines.

D. Profiles and Design: See drawings.

E. Size: See drawings for all dimensions.

F. Finish: Match storefront system.

2.9 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.

2.10 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:



084113 - 11

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture

migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.

E. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge.

2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

F. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.11 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. See section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for Aluminum Framed Entrances.

2.12 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Multi-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: Custom color and finish as selected by Architect's.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.




084113 - 12

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

3. Where aluminum will contact other materials with potential to create thermal bridging effects, isolate the aluminum framing from surrounding materials.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack.

F. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

G. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

H. Install sun shades integral to storefront system per manufacturer’s instructions.


A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances:

1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length.

2. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8

mm).

B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm).



084113 - 13


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections.

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive phases as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements. 1. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of

75 feet (23 m) by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.

C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

E. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer.

3.6 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE SETS

A. See section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for Aluminum Framed Entrances.




084113 - 14



FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH-PANEL SKYLIGHT ASSEMBLIES 084523 - 1

SECTION 084523 - FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH-PANEL SKYLIGHT ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes aluminum-framed assemblies incorporating fiberglass-sandwich panels as

follows:

1. Skylight assemblies.

2. Engineering Analysis.





1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for aluminum components of panel assemblies.

B. Shop Drawings: For panel assemblies.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

2. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining

moisture within the assembly to the exterior.

C. Samples: In manufacturer's standard size.

1. For each type of fiberglass-sandwich panel.

2. For each type of exposed finish for framing members.

D. Fabrication Samples: Of each framing system intersection and adjacent panels, made from 12-

inch (305-mm) lengths of full-size framing members and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery.

2. Anchorage.

3. Expansion provisions.

4. Fiberglass-sandwich panels.



5. Flashing and drainage.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For panel assemblies indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer licensed in the state of Missouri and responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.

B. Product Test Reports: For each fiberglass-sandwich-panel assembly, for tests performed by a

qualified testing agency.

C. Evaluation Reports: For fiberglass-sandwich-panel assemblies from ICC-ES.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For panel assemblies to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: For fiberglass-sandwich panels, a qualified manufacturer whose

facilities, processes, and products are monitored by an independent, accredited quality-control

agency for compliance with applicable requirements in ICC-ES AC04 or ICC-ES AC177.

B. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical panel assemblies as shown on Drawings.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations

in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of panel

assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.




a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

c. Water leakage.


B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fiberglass-sandwich

panels that exhibit defects in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Defects include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Fiberbloom.

b. Delamination of coating, if any, from exterior face sheet.

c. Color change exceeding requirements.

d. Delamination of panel face sheets from panel cores.


C. Special Aluminum-Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period.

Warranty does not include normal weathering.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, checking, crazing, peeling, chalking, and fading

of finishes.

2. Warranty Period: 10] years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer licensed in the state of Missouri, as

defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design fiberglass-sandwich-panel

assemblies.

B. Structural Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

C. Deflection Limits:

1. Overhead Panel Assemblies: Limited to 1/180 of clear span for each assembly

component.

D. Structural-Test Performance: Provide panel assemblies tested according to ASTM E330, as

follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not show

evidence of deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,

assemblies, including anchorage, do not show evidence of material failures, structural



distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of

span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 60 seconds.

E. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Passes ASTM E1886 missile-impact and cyclic-pressure

tests in accordance with ASTM E1996 for Wind Loads indicated on structural drawings for

basic protection.

F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide panel assemblies that do not evidence water

penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E331 at a

minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but

not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

G. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Provide panel assemblies that do not evidence

water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1

under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less

than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

1. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating aluminum-framed systems

or water appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other

than condensation. Water leakage does not include water that is controlled by flashing

and gutters and drained to the exterior, or water that cannot damage adjacent materials or

finishes.

H. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient- and surface-temperature

changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and

nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; material surfaces.

I. Energy Performance: Provide panel assemblies with performance properties specified, as

indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below[ and

certified and labeled according to NFRC]:

1. Thermal Transmittance (U-Factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor

of not more than 0.55 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100.

2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a

SHGC of no greater than 0.4 as determined according to NFRC 200.

3. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.30

cfm/sq. ft. (1.50 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area as determined according to ASTM E283

at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

2.2 FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH-PANEL ASSEMBLIES

A. Fiberglass-Sandwich-Panel Assemblies: Translucent assemblies that are supported by aluminum

framing and glazed with fiberglass-sandwich panels.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Skylight Systems

by Kalwall Corporation or comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.



2.3 FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH PANELS

A. Fiberglass-Sandwich Panels: Uniformly colored, translucent, thermoset, fiberglass-reinforced-

polymer face sheets bonded to both sides of a grid core.

1. Core Insulation: Fill panel cores with aerogel.

B. Panel Thickness: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) minimum or as calculated by skylight contractor’s

engineer.

C. Grid Core: Mechanically interlocked, extruded-aluminum I-beams, with a minimum flange

width of 7/16 inch (11.1 mm).

1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), in alloy and temper recommended

in writing by manufacturer.

2. I-Beam Construction: Thermally broken, extruded aluminum.

3. Grid Pattern: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Exterior Face Sheet:

1. Thickness: 0.070 inch (1.78 mm).


3. Protective Weathering Surface: Manufacturer's standard.

E. Interior Face Sheet:

1. Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm).


F. Fiberglass-Sandwich-Panel Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard for permanent adhesion of

facings to cores.

G. Panel Strength:

1. Maximum Panel Deflection: 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) when a 4-by-12-foot (1.2-by-3.6-m)

panel is tested according to ASTM E72 at 34 lbf/sq. ft. (1.6 kPa), with a maximum 0.090-

inch (2.3-mm) set deflection after five minutes.

2. Panel Support Strength: Capable of supporting, without failure, a 300-lbf (1334-N)

concentrated load when applied to a 3-inch- (76-mm-) diameter disk according to

ASTM E661.

H. Panel Performance:

1. Self-Ignition Temperature: 650 deg F (343 deg C) or more according to ASTM D1929.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less according to ASTM E84, or 75 or less according to

ASTM D2843.

3. Roof-Covering Classification: Class B according to ASTM E108 or UL 790.

4. Interior Finish Classification: Class A based on testing according to ASTM E84.

5. Color Change: Not more than 3.0 units Delta E, when measured according to

ASTM D2244, after outdoor weathering compliant with procedures in ASTM D1435.



2.4 ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Components: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum members of thickness required and

reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Thermally broken, extruded aluminum.

B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of use and

finish indicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M).

2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).

3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B429 (/B 429M).

4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B308 (/B 308M).

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning skylight components.

D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, and

nonbleeding fasteners and accessories; compatible with adjacent materials.

1. At closures, retaining caps, or battens, use ASTM A193 (/A 193M), 300 series stainless-

steel screws.

2. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from

thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

3. At movement joints, use slip-joint linings, spacers, and sleeves of material and type

recommended in writing by manufacturer.

E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A, galvanized steel.

F. Concealed Flashing: Corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with

adjacent materials.

G. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Aluminum sheet not less than 0.063 inch (1.60 mm) thick,

finished to match framing.

H. Framing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard.

I. Frame-System Sealants: As recommended in writing by manufacturer.

J. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm)

dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,

sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Frame System Fabrication:

1. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

a. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.



b. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.

c. Internal guttering systems or other means to drain water passing through joints,

and moisture migrating within assembly to exterior.

2. Fabricate sill closures with weep holes and for installation as continuous component.

3. Reinforce components as required to receive fastener threads.

B. Panel Fabrication: Factory assemble and seal panels.

1. Laminate face sheets to grid core under a controlled process using heat and pressure to

produce straight adhesive bonding lines that cover width of core members and that have

sharp edges.

a. White spots indicating lack of bond at intersections of grid-core members are

limited in number to four for every 40 sq. ft. (3.7 sq. m) of panel and limited in

diameter to 3/64 inch (1.2 mm).

2. Fabricate with grid pattern that is symmetrical about centerlines of each panel.

3. Fabricate panel to allow condensation within panel to escape.

4. Reinforce panel corners.


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Do not install damaged components.

2. Fit joints between aluminum components to produce hairline joints free of burrs and

distortion.

3. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.

4. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion, electrolytic

deterioration, and immobilization of moving joints.

5. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.



B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum components will contact dissimilar materials, protect

against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating or by

installing nonconductive spacers as recommended in writing by manufacturer for this purpose.

C. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and elevations.

D. Skylight Assemblies: Install continuous aluminum sill closures with weatherproof expansion

joints and locked and sealed corners. Locate weep holes at rafters. Install components to drain

water passing through joints and moisture migrating within assembly to exterior.

E. Erection Tolerances: Install panel assemblies to comply with the following maximum

tolerances:

1. Alignment: Limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) where surfaces abut

in line, edge to edge, at corners, or where a reveal or protruding element separates aligned

surfaces by less than 3 inches (76 mm); otherwise, limit offset to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).

2. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet

(3.2 mm in 3.7 m), but no greater than 1/2 inch (13 mm) over total length.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, panel assemblies

shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not show evidence of water

penetration.

2. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Before installation of interior finishes has

begun, areas shall be tested according to ASTM E1105.

B. Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with

specified requirements.

C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.



ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 1

SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Scope of work but not limited to:

1. Operable single hung windows installed in punch openings.

B. Section includes aluminum windows for exterior locations.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances, Storefronts and FRP Doors" for coordinating finish among aluminum fenestration units.

2. Section 088000 “Glazing” for insulated glass units installed in Storefront systems.




2. Review and discuss the finishing of aluminum windows that is required to be coordinated with the finishing of storefront systems and other aluminum work for color and finish matching.

3. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of aluminum windows with storefront systems and other exterior wall components. Include provisions for anchorage, flashing, sealing perimeters, and protecting finishes.

4. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and weathertight exterior building envelope.

5. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for aluminum windows.



B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified, 2 by 4 inches (50 by 100 mm) in size.

D. Samples for Verification: For aluminum windows and components required, showing full range of color variations for finishes, and prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Exposed Finishes: 2 by 4 inches (50 by 100 mm). 2. Exposed Hardware: Full-size units.

E. Other Action Submittals:

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer licensed in the state of Missouri and responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems. 2. Include design calculations.

G. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For each type of aluminum window, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-windows to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by test reports, and calculations.

B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.



1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Field testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality

Control" Article. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, condensation,

and air infiltration. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass.

2. Warranty Period:

a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Aluminum Finish: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Series 660 single

hung thermally broken window unit by EFCO Corporation or comparable product by one of the following manufacturer or product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

1. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. 2. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 3. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company. 4. YKK AP America Inc.

B. Window frame depth: 4” deep nominal.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain all aluminum windows, storefront systems, doors, exterior sun shades from single source from single manufacturer. See other windows specified in this section and specification section 084113 Aluminum Storefronts.

2.2 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated.



1. Window Certification: AMMA certified with label attached to each window.

B. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows:

1. Minimum Performance Class: AW-PG50.

C. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole-window U-factor of 0.51 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.

D. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a: CRF of 53.

E. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C) material surfaces] <Insert temperature change.

F. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Rated for not less than the following when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413. 1. 33 STC for windows.

G. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum windows with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.10 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.27 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

H. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum windows that do not evidence water penetration on indoor face of any component when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331-93 and E547-86 at a minimum test pressure differential of: 1. 12 PSF (575 Pa) for windows.

I. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum window systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds.

2.3 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

A. Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings:

1. Single Hung.

B. Frames and Sashes: Aluminum extrusions complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.



1. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate frames, sashes, and muntins with an integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.

C. Glass: Provide insulated glass units as specified in section 088000 Glazing.

D. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with adjacent materials; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions.

1. Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

E. Hung Window Hardware:

1. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Complying with AAMA 902, concealed, of size and capacity to hold sash stationary at any open position.

2. Locks and Latches: Allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash in direction indicated and operated from the inside only. Provide custodial locks.

3. Tilt Latch: Releasing latch allows sash to pivot about horizontal axis to facilitate cleaning exterior surfaces from the interior.

F. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated.

G. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Integral Ventilating System/Device: Where indicated, provide weather-stripped, adjustable, horizontal fresh-air vent, with a free airflow slot, full width of window sash by approximately 3 inches (75 mm) when open, complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. Equip vent bar with an integral insect screen, removable for cleaning.

B. Subsills: Thermally broken, extruded-aluminum subsills in configurations indicated on Drawings.

C. Column Covers: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings.

D. Interior Trim: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings.

E. Panning Trim: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings.

F. Receptor System: Two-piece, snap-together, thermally broken, extruded-aluminum receptor system that anchors windows in place.



2.5 INSECT SCREENS

A. General: Fabricate insect screens to integrate with window frame. Provide screen for each operable exterior sash. Screen wickets are not permitted.

1. Type and Location: Half, outside for single-hung.

B. Aluminum Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004 or SMA 1201. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame.

1. Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet.

C. Aluminum Wire Fabric: 18-by-16 (1.1-by-1.3-mm) mesh of 0.011-inch- (0.28-mm-) diameter, coated aluminum wire.

1. Wire-Fabric Finish: Black.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows.

B. Glaze aluminum windows in the factory.

C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation.

D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.

E. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units.

F. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.


A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.





A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

B. High-Performance Organic Finish: Multi-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: Custom color and finish as selected by Architect's.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances.

C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure weathertight window installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112.

B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.

C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior.

D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements.

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows:



1. Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance shall be performed according to AAMA 502.

2. Air-Infiltration Testing:

a. Test Pressure: That required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance class indicated.

b. Allowable Air-Leakage Rate: 1.5 times the applicable AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 rate for product type and performance class rounded down to one decimal place.

3. Water-Resistance Testing:

a. Test Pressure: Two-thirds times test pressure required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance grade indicated.

b. Allowable Water Infiltration: No water penetration.

4. Testing Extent: Three windows of each type as selected by Architect and a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. Windows shall be tested after perimeter sealants have cured.

5. Test Reports: Prepared according to AAMA 502.

C. Remove and replace noncomplying windows and retest as specified above.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.

B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning.

C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

D. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.



DOOR HARDWARE 087100-1

SECTION 08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Mechanical and electrified door hardware for:

a. Swinging doors.

B. Exclusions: Unless specifically listed in hardware sets, hardware is not specified in this section for:

1. Windows 2. Cabinets (casework), including locks in cabinets 3. Signage 4. Toilet accessories 5. Overhead doors

C. The intent of the hardware specification is to specify the hardware for interior and exterior doors, and to establish a type, continuity, and standard of quality. However, it is the door hardware supplier’s responsibility to thoroughly review existing conditions, schedules, specifications, drawings, and other Contract Documents to verify the suitability of the hardware specified.

D. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section “Alternates” for alternates affecting this section. 2. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealant requirements applicable to threshold

installation specified in this section. 3. Division 08 sections for Doors and Frames. 4. Division 09 sections for touchup finishing or refinishing of existing openings modified by

this section. 5. Division 26 sections for connections to electrical power system and for low-voltage wiring. 6. Division 28 sections for coordination with other components of electronic access control

system.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. UL - Underwriters Laboratories

1. UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies 2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies



3. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies 4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware

B. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute

1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule 2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware 3. Key Systems and Nomenclature

C. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI/BHMA A156.31 - Standards for Hardware and Specialties

2. ANSI/DHI A115.IG – Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware

D. ICC – International Code Council, Inc 1. ICC/ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC IBC – International Building Code

E. NFPA – National Fire Protection Agency 1. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code 2. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows

F. Builders Hardware Manufacturing Association (BHMA)

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. Submit in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 requirements. 2. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify on submittals deviations from

Contract Documents, issues of incompatibility or other issues which may detrimentally affect the Work.

3. Prior to forwarding submittal, comply with procedures for verifying existing door and frame compatibility for new hardware, as specified in PART 3, “EXAMINATION” article, herein.

B. Action Submittals:

1. Product Data: Product data including manufacturers’ technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

2. Riser and Wiring Diagrams: After final approval of hardware schedule, submit details of electrified door hardware, indicating:

a. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring and including: 1) Details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security

systems. 2) Schematic diagram of systems that interface with electrified door hardware. 3) Point-to-point wiring. 4) Risers.

3. Samples for Verification: If requested by Architect, submit production sample or sample installations of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated, and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule.



a. Samples will be returned to supplier in like-new condition. Units that are acceptable to Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into Work, within limitations of key coordination requirements.

4. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as illustrated by Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each door or opening, include:

a. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects hardware set number.

b. Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet: List locking device and function for each opening.

c. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. d. Name and manufacturer of each item. e. Fastenings and other pertinent information. f. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings. g. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. h. Mounting locations for hardware. i. Door and frame sizes and materials. j. Name and phone number for local manufacturer's representative for each product. k. Operational Description of openings with any electrified hardware (locks, exits,

electromagnetic locks, electric strikes, automatic operators, door position switches, magnetic holders or closer/holder units, and access control components). Operational description should include how door will operate on egress, ingress, and fire and smoke alarm connection. 1) Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with

submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.

5. Key Schedule:

a. After Keying Conference, provide keying schedule listing levels of keying as well as explanation of key system's function, key symbols used and door numbers controlled.

b. Use ANSI/BHMA A156.28 “Recommended Practices for Keying Systems” as guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting optimal keying system.

c. Provide 3 copies of keying schedule for review prepared and detailed in accordance with referenced DHI publication. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key to unique door designations.

d. Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, hardware heading number, cross keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions.

e. Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts and one key system schematic illustrating system usage and expansion. 1) Forward bitting list, key cuts and key system schematic directly to Owner, by

means as directed by Owner.

f. Prepare key schedule by or under supervision of supplier, detailing Owner’s final keying instructions for locks.

6. Templates: After final approval of hardware schedule, provide templates for doors, frames and other work specified to be factory prepared for door hardware installation.

C. Informational Submittals:



1. Qualification Data: For Supplier, Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. 2. Product data for electrified door hardware:

a. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.

3. Certificates of Compliance:

a. UL listings for fire-rated hardware and installation instructions if requested by Architect or Authority Having Jurisdiction.

b. Installer Training Meeting Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of installer training meeting specified in “QUALITY ASSURANCE” article, herein.

c. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of electrified hardware coordination conference, specified in “QUALITY ASSURANCE” article, herein.

4. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

D. Closeout Submittals:

1. Operations and Maintenance Data : Provide in accordance with Division 01 and include:

a. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes.

b. Catalog pages for each product. c. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer. d. Parts list for each product. e. Final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect conditions as-installed. f. Final keying schedule g. Copies of floor plans with keying nomenclature h. As-installed wiring diagrams for each opening connected to power, both low voltage

and 110 volts. i. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to

identify project.


A. Product Substitutions: Comply with product requirements stated in Division 01 and as specified herein.

1. Where specific manufacturer’s product is named and accompanied by “No Substitute,” including make or model number or other designation, provide product specified. (Note: Certain products have been selected for their unique characteristics and particular project suitability.)

a. Where no additional products or manufacturers are listed in product category, requirements for “No Substitute” govern product selection.

2. Where products indicate “acceptable manufacturers” or “acceptable manufacturers and products”, provide product from specified manufacturers, subject to compliance with specified requirements and “Single Source Responsibility” requirements stated herein.

B. Supplier Qualifications and Responsibilities: Recognized architectural hardware supplier with record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that provides certified Architectural



Hardware Consultant (AHC) available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the Work for consultation.

1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including

Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

4. Coordination Responsibility: Coordinate installation of electronic security hardware with Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors.

a. Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation, inspect and verify that all components are working properly.

C. Installer Qualifications: Qualified tradesmen, skilled in application of commercial grade hardware with record of successful in-service performance for installing door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project.

D. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: Person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and meets these requirements:

1. For door hardware, DHI-certified, Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). 2. Can provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors. 3. Can inspect and verify components are in working order upon completion of installation. 4. Capable of producing wiring diagrams. 5. Capable of coordinating installation of electrified hardware with Architect and electrical

engineers.

E. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer.

1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.

F. Fire-Rated Door Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed products tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Intertek Testing Services, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, based on testing at positive pressure and according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C and in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.

G. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) at tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa) of water.

H. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



I. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release latch. Locks do not require use of key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

J. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with governing accessibility regulations cited in “REFERENCES” article, herein.

K. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01.

1. Attendees: Owner, Contractor, Architect, Installer, and Supplier’s Architectural Hardware Consultant.

2. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including:

a. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion.

b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c. Requirements for key control system. d. Requirements for access control. e. Address for delivery of keys.

L. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for electrified door hardware. 4. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.

M. Coordination Conferences:

1. Installation Coordination Conference: Prior to hardware installation, schedule and hold meeting to review questions or concerns related to proper installation and adjustment of door hardware.

a. Attendees: Door hardware supplier, door hardware installer, Contractor. b. After meeting, provide letter of compliance to Architect, indicating when meeting was

held and who was in attendance.

2. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference: Prior to ordering electrified hardware, schedule and hold meeting to coordinate door hardware with security, electrical, doors and frames, and other related suppliers.

a. Attendees: electrified door hardware supplier, doors and frames supplier, electrified door hardware installer, electrical subcontractor, Owner, Architect and Contractor.

b. After meeting, provide letter of compliance to Architect, indicating when coordination conference was held and who was in attendance.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to Project site.



B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.

1. Deliver each article of hardware in manufacturer’s original packaging.

C. Project Conditions:

1. Maintain manufacturer-recommended environmental conditions throughout storage and installation periods.

2. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.

D. Protection and Damage:

1. Promptly replace products damaged during shipping. 2. Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Correct, replace or

repair products damaged during Work. 3. Protect products against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical

agent.

E. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant.

C. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.

D. Direct shipments not permitted, unless approved by Contractor.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Years from date of Substantial Completion, for durations indicated.

a. Closers: 1) Mechanical: 30 years. 2) Electrified: 2 years.

b. Exit Devices: 1) Mechanical: 3 years. 2) Electrified: 1 year.



c. Locksets: 1) Mechanical: 3 years. 2) Electrified: 1 year.

d. Continuous Hinges: Lifetime warranty. e. Key Blanks: Lifetime

2. Warranty does not cover damage or faulty operation due to improper installation, improper use or abuse.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. The Owner requires use of certain products for their unique characteristics and particular project suitability to insure continuity of existing and future performance and maintenance standards. After investigating available product offerings, the Awarding Authority has elected to prepare proprietary specifications. These products are specified with the notation: “No Substitute.”

1. Where “No Substitute” is noted, submittals and substitution requests for other products will not be considered.

B. Approval of manufacturers and/or products other than those listed as ”Scheduled Manufacturer ” or “Acceptable Manufacturers” in the individual article for the product category shall be in accordance with QUALITY ASSURANCE article, herein.

C. Approval of products from manufacturers indicated in “Acceptable Manufacturers” is contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all requirements of scheduled manufacturer’s product.

D. Where specified hardware is not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect's approval.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Fasteners

1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation.

2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work including prepared for paint surfaces to receive painted finish.

3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units exposed when door is closed except when no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless thru-bolts are required to fasten hardware securely. Review door specification and advise Architect if thru-bolts are required.

4. Install hardware with fasteners provided by hardware manufacturer.



B. Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates and other devices necessary for hardware installation.

1. Where fasteners are exposed to view: Finish to match adjacent door hardware material.

2.03 HINGES

A. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Ives 5BB series 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Hager BB series, McKinney TA/T4A series,

Stanley FBB Series

B. Requirements:

1. Provide five-knuckle, ball bearing hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.1. 2. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, up to and including 36 inches (914 mm) wide:

a. Exterior: Standard or heavy weight, bronze or stainless steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high

b. Interior: Standard or heavy weight, steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high

3. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors over 36 inches (914 mm) wide:

a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high

4. 2 inches or thicker doors:

a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze or stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high

5. Provide minimum three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height, and one additional hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height.

6. Where new hinges are specified for existing doors or existing frames, provide new hinges of identical size to hinge preparation present in existing door or existing frame.

7. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:

a. Steel Hinges: Steel pins b. Non-Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins c. Out-Swinging Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins d. Out-Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non-removable pins e. Interior Non-lockable Doors: Non-rising pins

8. Width of hinges: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) at 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, and 5 inches (127 mm) at 2 inches (51 mm) or thicker doors. Adjust hinge width as required for door, frame, and wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening.

9. Provide hinges with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Locate electric hinge at second hinge from bottom or nearest to electrified locking component.

10. Provide mortar guard for each electrified hinge specified.



2.04 CONTINUOUS HINGES

A. Aluminum Geared

1. Manufacturers:

a. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. b. Acceptable Manufacturers: Select, Stanley.

2. Requirements:

a. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.26, Grade 1.

b. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges, where specified in the hardware sets, fabricated from 6063-T6 aluminum, with 0.25-inch (6 mm) diameter Teflon coated stainless steel hinge pin.

c. Provide split nylon bearings at each hinge knuckle for quiet, smooth, self-lubricating operation.

d. Provide hinges capable of supporting door weights up to 450 pounds, and successfully tested for 1,500,000 cycles.

e. On fire-rated doors, provide aluminum geared continuous hinges that are classified for use on rated doors by testing agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.

f. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges with electrified option scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate electric function of specified hardware.

g. Install hinges with fasteners supplied by manufacturer. h. Provide hinges 1 inch (25 mm) shorter in length than nominal height of door, unless

otherwise noted or door details require shorter length and with symmetrical hole pattern.

2.05 FLUSH BOLTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood

B. Requirements:

1. Provide automatic, constant latching, and manual flush bolts with forged bronze or stainless steel face plates, extruded brass levers, and with wrought brass guides and strikes. Provide 12 inch (305 mm) steel or brass rods at doors up to 90 inches (2286 mm) in height. For doors over 90 inches (2286 mm) in height increase top rods by 6 inches (152 mm) for each additional 6 inches (152 mm) of door height. Provide dust-proof strikes at each bottom flush bolt.

2.06 MORTISE LOCKS


1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Best 40k series – No Sub

B. Requirements:



1. Provide mortise locks certified as ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1 Operational, and manufactured from heavy gauge steel, containing components of steel with zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. Provide multi-function lock case, field reversible for handing without opening case. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

2. Provide locks with a standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset with full 3/4 inch (19 mm) throw stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Provide deadbolt with full 1 inch (25 mm) throw, constructed of stainless steel.

3. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 4. Lever Trim: Solid brass, bronze, or stainless steel, cast or forged in design specified, with

wrought roses and external lever spring cages. Provide thru-bolted levers with 2-piece spindles.

a. Lever Design: As indicated. b. Tactile Warning (Knurling): Where required by authority having jurisdiction. Provide

on levers on exterior (secure side) of doors serving rooms considered to be hazardous.

2.07 EXIT DEVICES

A. Manufacturer and Product:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Von Duprin 99/33 series – No Sub.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3-2014 Grade 1 2. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 3. Provide touchpad type exit devices, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or

aluminum, plated to standard architectural finishes to match balance of door hardware. 4. Quiet Operation: Incorporate fluid damper or other device that eliminates noise of exit

device operation. 5. Touchpad: Extend minimum of one half of door width, but not the full length of exit device

rail. Provide flush end-cap with two-point attachment to door. Match exit device finish, stainless steel for US26, US26D, US28, US32, and US32D finishes; and for all other finishes, provide compatible finish to exit device. Load bearing plastic parts are not acceptable. Provide compression springs in devices, latches, and outside trims or controls; tension springs prohibited.

6. Provide exit devices with deadlatching feature for security and for future addition of alarm kits and/or other electrical requirements.

7. Provide exit devices with manufacturer’s approved strikes. Provide roller strikes on all rim exit devices

8. Provide exit devices with cast metal, flush end caps. 9. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Locate exit devices at height

recommended by exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and approved by Architect.

10. Mount mechanism case flush on face of doors, or provide spacers to fill gaps behind devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off face of door, provide glass bead kits.

11. Provide cylinder dogging at non-fire-rated exit devices, unless specified less dogging. Dogging device shall not include plastic parts.

12. Removable Mullions: 2 inches (51 mm) x 3 inches (76 mm) steel tube. Where scheduled as keyed removable mullion that is removed by use of a keyed cylinder, which is self-locking when re-installed.

13. Where lever handles are specified as outside trim for exit devices, provide heavy-duty lever trims with forged or cast escutcheon plates. Provide vandal-resistant levers that will



travel to 90-degree down position when more than 35 pounds of torque are applied, and which can easily be re-set.

a. Lever Style: Match lever style of locksets. b. Tactile Warning (Knurling): Where required by authority having jurisdiction. Provide

on levers on exterior (secure side) of doors serving rooms considered to be hazardous.

14. Provide UL labeled fire exit hardware for fire rated openings. 15. Provide factory drilled weep holes for exit devices used in full exterior application, highly

corrosive areas, and where noted in hardware sets. 16. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets

2.08 CYLINDERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Best – No Sub

B. Requirements:

1. Provide small format interchangeable core (SFIC) cylinders/cores to match Owner’s existing key system, compliant with ANSI/BHMA A156.5; latest revision, Section 12, Grade 1; permanent cylinders; cylinder face finished to match lockset, manufacturer’s series as indicated. Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

2. Replaceable Construction Cores.

a. Provide temporary construction cores replaceable by permanent cores, furnished in accordance with the following requirements. 1) 3 construction control keys 2) 12 construction change (day) keys.

b. Owner or Owner’s Representative will replace temporary construction cores with permanent cores.

2.09 KEYING

A. Provide cylinders/cores keyed into Owner’s existing keying system, complying with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide permanent cylinders/cores keyed by the manufacturer according to the following key system.

a. Master Keying system as directed by the Owner.

2. Forward bitting list and keys separately from cylinders, by means as directed by Owner. Failure to comply with forwarding requirements shall be cause for replacement of cylinders/cores involved at no additional cost to Owner.

3. Provide keys with the following features:

a. Material: Nickel silver; minimum thickness of .107-inch (2.3mm)

4. Identification:



a. Mark permanent cylinders/cores and keys with applicable blind code per DHI publication “Keying Systems and Nomenclature” for identification. Blind code marks shall not include actual key cuts.

b. Identification stamping provisions must be approved by the Architect and Owner. c. Stamp cylinders/cores and keys with Owner’s unique key system facility code as

established by the manufacturer; key symbol and embossed or stamped with “DO NOT DUPLICATE” along with the “PATENTED” or patent number to enforce the patent protection.

d. Failure to comply with stamping requirements shall be cause for replacement of keys involved at no additional cost to Owner.

e. Forward permanent cylinders/cores to Owner, separately from keys, by means as directed by Owner.

5. Quantity: Furnish in the following quantities.

a. Change (Day) Keys: 3 per cylinder/core. b. Permanent Control Keys: 3. c. Master Keys: 6.

2.10 DOOR CLOSERS


1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: LCN 4040XP series – No Sub

B. Requirements:

1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. ISO 9000 certify closers. Stamp units with date of manufacture code.

2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with high strength cast iron cylinder, and full complement bearings at shaft.

3. Cylinder Body: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter with 3/4 inch (19 mm) diameter double heat-treated pinion journal.

4. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F.

5. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards.

6. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves, with separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck.

7. Provide closers with solid forged steel main arms and factory assembled heavy-duty forged forearms for parallel arm closers.

8. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted. 9. Finish for Closer Cylinders, Arms, Adapter Plates, and Metal Covers: Powder coating

finish which has been certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing as described in ANSI Standard A156.4 and ASTM B117, or has special rust inhibitor (SRI).

10. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting.

2.11 DOOR TRIM

A. Manufacturers:




B. Requirements:

1. Provide push plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick and beveled 4 edges. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches (102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit.

2. Provide push bars of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Provide push bars of sufficient length to span from center to center of each stile. Where required, mount back to back with pull.

3. Provide offset pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with push bar.

4. Provide flush pulls as scheduled. Where required, provide back-to-back mounted model. 5. Provide pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required,

mount back to back with push bar. 6. Provide pull plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch (1

mm) thick, beveled 4 edges, and prepped for pull. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches (102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit.

7. Provide wire pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. 8. Provide decorative pulls as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with pull.

2.12 PROTECTION PLATES

A. Manufacturers:


B. Requirements:

1. Provide kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates minimum of 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick, beveled four edges as scheduled. Furnish with sheet metal or wood screws, finished to match plates.

2. Sizes of plates:

a. Kick Plates: 10 inches (254 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs

b. Mop Plates: 4 inches (102 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs

c. Armor Plates: 36 inches (914 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs

2.13 OVERHEAD STOPS AND OVERHEAD STOP/HOLDERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturers: Glynn-Johnson 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rixson, Sargent

B. Requirements:

1. Provide heavy duty concealed mounted overhead stop or holder as specified for exterior and interior vestibule single acting doors.



2. Provide heavy duty concealed mounted overhead stop or holder as specified for double acting doors.

3. Provide heavy or medium duty and concealed or surface mounted overhead stop or holder for interior doors as specified. Provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop for interior doors and at any door that swings more than 140 degrees before striking wall, open against equipment, casework, sidelights, and where conditions do not allow wall stop or floor stop presents tripping hazard.

4. Where overhead holders are specified provide friction type at doors without closer and positive type at doors with closer.

2.14 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Manufacturers:


B. Provide door stops at each door leaf:

1. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type locks are used and concave type where cylindrical type locks are used.

2. Where a wall stop cannot be used, provide universal floor stops for low or high rise options.

3. Where wall or floor stop cannot be used, provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop.

2.15 THRESHOLDS, SEALS, DOOR SWEEPS, AUTOMATIC DOOR BOTTOMS, AND GASKETING

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Zero International 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: National Guard, Reese

B. Requirements:

1. Provide thresholds, weather-stripping (including door sweeps, seals, and astragals) and gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural details. Match finish of other items.

2. Size of thresholds:

a. Saddle Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by jamb width by door width b. Bumper Seal Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by 5 inches (127 mm) wide by door

width

3. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available.

2.16 SILENCERS

A. Manufacturers:




B. Requirements:

1. Provide "push-in" type silencers for hollow metal or wood frames. 2. Provide one silencer per 30 inches (762 mm) of height on each single frame, and two for

each pair frame. 3. Omit where gasketing is specified.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to installation of hardware, examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Where on-site modification of doors and frames is required:

1. Carefully remove existing door hardware and components being reused. Clean, protect, tag, and store in accordance with storage and handling requirements specified herein.

2. Field modify and prepare existing door and frame for new hardware being installed. 3. When modifications are exposed to view, use concealed fasteners, when possible. 4. Prepare hardware locations and reinstall in accordance with installation requirements for

new door hardware and with:

a. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

b. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."

c. Doors in rated assemblies: NFPA 80 for restrictions on on-site door hardware preparation.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following, unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for

Wood Flush Doors."

B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, using only fasteners provided by manufacturer.



C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Protect all installed hardware during painting.

D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

F. Install operating parts so they move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance.

G. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than quantity recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

H. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period.

1. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation unless directed otherwise at keying meeting

I. Wiring: Coordinate with Division 26, ELECTRICAL sections for:

1. Conduit, junction boxes and wire pulls. 2. Connections to and from power supplies to electrified hardware. 3. Connections to fire/smoke alarm system and smoke evacuation system. 4. Connection of wire to door position switches and wire runs to central room or area, as

directed by Architect. 5. Testing and labeling wires with Architect’s opening number.

J. Door Closers: Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors from corridors. Closers shall not be visible in corridors, lobbies and other public spaces unless approved by Architect.

K. Closer/Holders: Mount closer/holders on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors.

L. Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

M. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they may impede traffic or present tripping hazard.

N. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

O. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.

P. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.




A. Architectural Hardware Consultant: Engage qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.

1. Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.


A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.07 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. Locksets, exit devices, and other hardware items are referenced in the following hardware sets for series, type and function. Refer to the above-specifications for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements.

Hardware Sets:

1. The hardware sets listed below represent design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Additional hardware may be required for proper installation and use.



Hardware Group No. 00.1

For use on Door #(s):

X308 Provide each RU door(s) with the following:

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER ITEMID FINISH MFR

HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER



216A 216B 216C 216D Provide each SL door(s) with the following:


1 EA SLIDING DOOR HDW - 3 PANEL SET

200 SERIES AS REQUIRED 626 JOH





X100 X215 Provide each PR door(s) with the following:


2 EA CONT. HINGE 112XY EPT US28 IVE

2 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON 689 VON

1 EA REMOVABLE MULLION KR4954 689 VON

1 EA INTERCOM/PUSHBUTTON BY OTHERS UNK

1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-LC-QEL-99-EO-CON-24VDC 626 VON

1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-LC-QEL-99-NL-OP-110MD-CON-24VDC

626 VON

1 EA MORT CYL HOUSING AS REQ'D 626 SCH

1 EA RIM CYL HOUSING AS REQ'D 626 SCH

2 EA SFIC PERMANENT CORE AS REQUIRED 626 BES

2 EA SFIC KEYED CONST CORE

AS REQUIRED BES

2 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190EZHD 12" O 630-316

IVE

2 EA OH STOP 100S 630 GLY

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA MC 689 LCN

1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 4642 WMS 689 LCN

2 EA ACTUATOR 8310-853T/8310-818T AS REQ'D 630 LCN

2 CLOSER BRACKETS, SPACERS, ETC

AS REQ'D LCN

1 EA BOLLARD POST BY OTHERS UNK

1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA AA ZER

1 EA MULLION SEAL 8780NBK PSA BK ZER

SET WEATHER STRIPPING BY DOOR/FRAME MFR. UNK

2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER

1 EA THRESHOLD 655A-223 A ZER

2 EA WIRE HARNESS CON X LENGTH AS REQ'D SCH

2 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-6W SCH

2 EA DOOR CONTACT 7764 628 SCE

1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS904 900-4RL 120/240 VAC LGR SCE

CARD READER BY DIV 28



OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE LEAF RIM EXIT DEVICE. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES BY PRESSING PUSHBAR. ENTRY BY PULL AFTER RETRACTING LATCHBOLT WITH KEY. LATCHBOLT CAN BE RETRACTED ELECTRICALLY FOR EITHER MOMENTARY OR EXTENDED PERIODS OF TIME ALLOWING DOOR TO BE PUSH/PULL FUNCTION. ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE, INTERCOM OR PRESENTING AUTHORIZED CREDENTIAL SHALL RETRACT LATCHBOLT ELECTRICALLY ALLOWING DOOR TO BE OPENED. RX SWITCH MONITORS THE DEPRESSION OF THE PUSHBAR. AUTO OPERATOR - PUSHING EITHER INTERIOR OR EXTERIOR ACTUATOR BUTTON TO CYCLE AUTO OPERATOR AFTER RETRACTING LATCHBOLT ELECTRICALLY. EXTERIOR ACTUATOR BUTTON ONLY ENERGIZED WHEN ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE, INTERCOM OR AUTHORIZED CREDENTIAL RETRACTS LATCHBOLT ELECTRICALLY. CONCEALED OVERHEAD STOP INACTIVE LEAF RIM EXIT DEVICE. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES BY PRESSING PUSHBAR. ENTRY BY PULL WHEN LATCHBOLT RETRACTED ELECTRICALLY. LATCHBOLT CAN BE RETRACTED ELECTRICALLY FOR EITHER MOMENTARY OR EXTENDED PERIODS OF TIME ALLOWING DOOR TO BE PUSH/PULL FUNCTION. ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE OR PRESENTING AUTHORIZED CREDENTIAL SHALL RETRACT LATCHBOLT ELECTRICALLY ALLOWING DOOR TO BE OPENED. RX SWITCH MONITORS THE DEPRESSION OF THE PUSHBAR. SELF-CLOSING. HEAVY DUTY ARM. PUSH SIDE MOUNTED. CONCEALED OVERHEAD STOP KEYED REMOVABLE MULLION DOOR POSITION SWITCH(S) MONITOR WHETHER THE DOOR IS OPEN OR CLOSED.





200 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:


1 EA CONT. HINGE 112XY US28 IVE

1 EA MORTISE LOCK - STOREROOM

45H 7D 14H 626 BES


1 EA DISP CONST CORE AS REQUIRED BES

1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211AL FSE CON 12/16/24/28 VAC/VDC

630 VON

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ MC 689 LCN


AS REQ'D LCN

1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE




1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-8P 120/240 VAC LGR SCE

CARD READER BY DIV 28 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION STOREROOM LOCK - OUTSIDE LEVER FIXED. ENTRANCE BY KEY ONLY. INSIDE LEVER ALWAYS UNLOCKED. INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS. ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE OR PRESENTING AUTHORIZED CREDENTIAL SHALL RELEASE ELECT STRIKE ALLOWING DOOR TO BE PULLED OPEN. SELF-CLOSING. DOOR POSITION SWITCH(S) MONITOR WHETHER THE DOOR IS OPEN OR CLOSED





100 Provide each PR door(s) with the following:



2 EA DUMMY PUSH BAR 330 626 VON


IVE

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH MC 689 LCN

1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 4642 WMS 689 LCN

2 EA ACTUATOR 8310-853T/8310-818T AS REQ'D 630 LCN


AS REQ'D LCN

SET WEATHER STRIPPING BY DOOR/FRAME MFR. UNK OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE LEAF DUMMY EXIT DEVICE. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES BY PRESSING PUSHBAR. ENTRY BY PULL. NON-LOCKING, NON-LATCHING. AUTO OPERATOR - PUSHING EITHER INTERIOR OR EXTERIOR ACTUATOR BUTTON TO CYCLE AUTO OPERATOR. INACTIVE LEAF DUMMY EXIT DEVICE. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES BY PRESSING PUSHBAR. ENTRY BY PULL. NON-LOCKING, NON-LATCHING. SELF-CLOSING. SPRING LOADED STOP INCLUDED. PUSH SIDE MOUNTED.







2 EA CONT. HINGE 112XY EPT US28 IVE

2 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON 689 VON

1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-LC-99-L-E996-17-FS-CON 24 VDC

626 VON

1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE SS-99-EO-EMERG EXIT RSS 626 VON







AS REQ'D LCN

2 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE


2 EA FIRE/LIFE WALL MAG SEM7850 689 LCN

2 EA WIRE HARNESS CON X LENGTH AS REQ'D SCH


1 EA HORN 1910-1 12/24 VDC WHT SCE


1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS904 900-8P-FA 120/240 VAC LGR SCE

1 CARD READER BY DIV 28 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE LEAF RIM EXIT DEVICE. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES BY PRESSING PUSHBAR. ENTRY BY TURNING LEVER UNLESS LOCKED BY ELECTRICALLY OR BY KEY. ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE OR PRESENTING AUTHORIZED CREDENTIAL SHALL UNLOCK DOOR ELECTRICALLY ALLOWING DOOR TO BE OPENED. RX SWITCH MONITORS THE DEPRESSION OF THE PUSHBAR. SELF-CLOSING, INACTIVE LEAF RIM EXIT DEVICE. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES BY PRESSING PUSHBAR. EXIT ONLY, NO EXTERIOR TRIM. WHEN THE PUSHBAR IS DEPRESSED, THE HORN SOUNDS. THE EXIT ALARM CAN BE ARMED, RESET OR DISARMED BY KEY OR ACCESS CONTROL. PUSHBAR HAS EMERGENCY EXIT ONLY LETTERING ADDED TO PUSHBAR. REMOVABLE MULLION BY FRAME MFR DOOR POSITION SWITCH(S) MONITOR WHETHER THE DOOR IS OPEN OR CLOSED. ACTIVATION OF FIRE ALARM SHALL UNLOCK DOORS AND DISABLE ALARM ELECTRICALLY. MAG HOLD OPENS TO BE TIED INTO ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE TO HOLD OPEN DURING BUSINESS HOURS AND RELEASE AT END OF DAY TO SECURE OPENING DURING NON-BUSINESS HOURS.





108A 109A 110A 111A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE


45H 7D 14H 626 BES



1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FS CON 12/16/24/28 VAC/VDC

630 VON


1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE


3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE


1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05HM BLK SCE

1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-8P FA900 120/240 VAC

LGR SCE

CARD READER BY DIV 28 CARD READER MOUNTED CONFERENCE ROOM SIDE. OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION STOREROOM LOCK - OUTSIDE LEVER FIXED. ENTRANCE BY KEY ONLY. INSIDE LEVER ALWAYS UNLOCKED. INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS. ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE OR PRESENTING AUTHORIZED CREDENTIAL SHALL RELEASE ELECT STRIKE ALLOWING DOOR TO BE PULLED OPEN. SELF-CLOSING. DOOR POSITION SWITCH(S) MONITOR WHETHER THE DOOR IS OPEN OR CLOSED ELEC STRIKE TO RELEASE WITH ACTIVATION OF FIRE ALARM -FAIL SAFE





307B 308 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE


45H 7D 14H 626 BES



1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FSE CON 12/16/24/28 VAC/VDC

630 VON








CARD READER BY DIV 28 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION STOREROOM LOCK - OUTSIDE LEVER FIXED. ENTRANCE BY KEY ONLY. INSIDE LEVER ALWAYS UNLOCKED. INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS. ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE OR PRESENTING AUTHORIZED CREDENTIAL SHALL RELEASE ELECT STRIKE ALLOWING DOOR TO BE PULLED OPEN. SELF-CLOSING. DOOR POSITION SWITCH(S) MONITOR WHETHER THE DOOR IS OPEN OR CLOSED ELEC STRIKE TO RELEASE WITH ACTIVATION OF FIRE ALARM





300 304 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE


45H 7D 14H 626 BES



1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FSE CON 12/16/24/28 VAC/VDC

630 VON


1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP MC 689 LCN






CARD READER BY DIV 28 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION STOREROOM LOCK - OUTSIDE LEVER FIXED. ENTRANCE BY KEY ONLY. INSIDE LEVER ALWAYS UNLOCKED. INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS. ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE OR PRESENTING AUTHORIZED CREDENTIAL SHALL RELEASE ELECT STRIKE ALLOWING DOOR TO BE PULLED OPEN. SELF-CLOSING. PULL SIDE MOUNTED CONCEALED OVERHEAD STOP DOOR POSITION SWITCH(S) MONITOR WHETHER THE DOOR IS OPEN OR CLOSED





X116 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:




45H 7D 14H 626 BES



AS REQUIRED BES

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SHCUSH MC 689 LCN


AS REQ'D LCN





1 EA DOOR CONTACT 7764 628 SCE OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION STOREROOM LOCK - OUTSIDE LEVER FIXED. ENTRANCE BY KEY ONLY. INSIDE LEVER ALWAYS UNLOCKED. INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS. SELF-CLOSING. SPRING LOADED STOP AND HOLD OPEN INCLUDED. PUSH SIDE MOUNTED. DOOR POSITION SWITCH(S) MONITOR WHETHER THE DOOR IS OPEN OR CLOSED.





X314 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:



1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD-99-NL-OP-110MD 626 VON





AS REQUIRED BES


IVE



AS REQ'D LCN





1 EA DOOR CONTACT 7764 628 SCE OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION RIM EXIT DEVICE. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES BY PRESSING PUSHBAR. ENTRY BY PULL AFTER RETRACTING LATCHBOLT WITH KEY. DOGGING BY KEYED CYLINDER LOCKS DOWN THE PUSHBAR SO THE LATCHBOLT REMAINS RETRACTED AND DOOR FUNCTIONS AS A PUSH/PULL. SELF-CLOSING. SPRING LOADED STOP INCLUDED. PUSH SIDE MOUNTED. DOOR POSITION SWITCH(S) MONITOR WHETHER THE DOOR IS OPEN OR CLOSED.





X216 X307 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:








AS REQUIRED BES


IVE




AS REQ'D LCN





1 EA DOOR CONTACT 7764 628 SCE OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION RIM EXIT DEVICE. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES BY PRESSING PUSHBAR. ENTRY BY PULL AFTER RETRACTING LATCHBOLT WITH KEY. DOGGING BY KEYED CYLINDER LOCKS DOWN THE PUSHBAR SO THE LATCHBOLT REMAINS RETRACTED AND DOOR FUNCTIONS AS A PUSH/PULL. SELF-CLOSING. HEAVY DUTY ARM. PUSH SIDE MOUNTED. CONCEALED OVERHEAD STOP. DOOR POSITION SWITCH(S) MONITOR WHETHER THE DOOR IS OPEN OR CLOSED.





X112 X114 Provide each PR door(s) with the following:




1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD-99-EO 626 VON






AS REQUIRED BES


IVE




AS REQ'D LCN


1 EA MULLION SEAL 8780NBK PSA BK ZER




2 EA DOOR CONTACT 7764 628 SCE OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE LEAF RIM EXIT DEVICE. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES BY PRESSING PUSHBAR. ENTRY BY PULL AFTER RETRACTING LATCHBOLT WITH KEY. DOGGING BY KEYED CYLINDER LOCKS DOWN THE PUSHBAR SO THE LATCHBOLT REMAINS RETRACTED AND DOOR FUNCTIONS AS A PUSH/PULL. SELF-CLOSING. HEAVY DUTY ARM. PUSH SIDE MOUNTED. CONCEALED OVERHEAD STOP INACTIVE LEAF RIM EXIT DEVICE. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES BY PRESSING PUSHBAR. ENTRY BY PULL WHEN DEVICE DOGGED DOWN. DOGGING BY KEYED CYLINDER LOCKS DOWN THE PUSHBAR SO THE LATCHBOLT REMAINS RETRACTED AND DOOR FUNCTIONS AS A PUSH/PULL. SELF-CLOSING. HEAVY DUTY ARM. PUSH SIDE MOUNTED. CONCEALED OVERHEAD STOP KEYED REMOVABLE MULLION DOOR POSITION SWITCH(S) MONITOR WHETHER THE DOOR IS OPEN OR CLOSED.





214A 214B Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA MORTISE LOCK - PASSAGE

45H 0N 14H 626 BES


3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION PASSAGE LOCK – NEITHER LEVER LOCKABLE. BOTH LEVERS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE

INGRESS OR EGRESS.





3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA MORTISE LOCK - PASSAGE

45H 0N 14H 626 BES




3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION PASSAGE LOCK – NEITHER LEVER LOCKABLE. BOTH LEVERS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE

INGRESS OR EGRESS. SELF CLOSING.





103 106A 211 213 309 310 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA MORTISE LOCK - PRIVACY W VISUAL INDICATOR

45H 0LT 14S 626 BES





3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION PRIVACY LOCK W INDICATOR - LATCHBOLT RETRACTED BY LEVER EITHER SIDE. DEADBOLT ACTUATION BY OUTSIDE KEY OR INSIDE THUMBTURN. THROWN DEADBOLT DISPLAYS "OCCUPIED" MESSAGE AND LOCKS OUTSIDE LEVER. INSIDE LEVER RETRACTS BOTH DEADBOLT AND LATCHBOLT AND UNLOCKS OUTSIDE LEVER. INSIDE LEVER ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS. DOOR TO BE LOCKED BY KEY DURING NORMAL SCHOOL HOURS AND UNLOCKED FOR SPECIAL EVENTS. KEY UNLOCKING WHILE OCCUPIED IS POSSIBLE. SELF CLOSING.



108B 109B 110B Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:



1 EA MORTISE LOCK - OFFICE (F04)

45H 7AT 14H 626 BES





AS REQ'D LCN


SET WEATHER STRIPPING BY DOOR/FRAME MFR. UNK OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION OFFICE LOCK - TURN/PUSH-BUTTON LOCKING; PUSHING AND TURNING BUTTON LOCKS OUTSIDE LEVER, REQUIRING USE OF KEY UNTIL BUTTON IS MANUALLY UNLOCKED. PUSHBUTTON LOCKING; PUSHING BUTTON LOCKS OUTSIDE LEVER UNTIL UNLOCKED BY KEY OR BY TURNING INSIDE LEVER. INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS. SELF CLOSING.





201 202 203 204 205 206

207 208 217 218 219 220

221 228 229 231 232 230

302 303 305 306 312 313

314 315 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE


45H 7AT 14H 626 BES




3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION OFFICE LOCK - TURN/PUSH-BUTTON LOCKING; PUSHING AND TURNING BUTTON LOCKS OUTSIDE LEVER, REQUIRING USE OF KEY UNTIL BUTTON IS MANUALLY UNLOCKED. PUSHBUTTON LOCKING; PUSHING BUTTON LOCKS OUTSIDE LEVER UNTIL UNLOCKED BY KEY OR BY TURNING INSIDE LEVER. INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS.



111B Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE


45H 7AT 14H 626 BES






3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION OFFICE LOCK - TURN/PUSH-BUTTON LOCKING; PUSHING AND TURNING BUTTON LOCKS OUTSIDE LEVER, REQUIRING USE OF KEY UNTIL BUTTON IS MANUALLY UNLOCKED. PUSHBUTTON LOCKING; PUSHING BUTTON LOCKS OUTSIDE LEVER UNTIL UNLOCKED BY KEY OR BY TURNING INSIDE LEVER. INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS. SELF CLOSING.







4 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA MORTISE LOCK - CLASSROOM

45H 7R 14H 626 BES



1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP H MC 689 LCN



3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION CLASSROOM LOCK - OUTSIDE LEVER LOCKED AND UNLOCKED BY KEY. INSIDE LEVER ALWAYS UNLOCKED. INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS. SELF CLOSING WITH HOLD OPEN



113A 113B Provide each PR door(s) with the following:


6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 630 IVE

2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB358 626 IVE

1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE


45H 7R 14H 626 BES



1 EA OH STOP & HOLDER 90H 630 GLY


2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE LEAF CLASSROOM LOCK - OUTSIDE LEVER LOCKED AND UNLOCKED BY KEY. INSIDE LEVER ALWAYS UNLOCKED. INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS. SELF CLOSING. SPRING STOP AND HOLD OPEN INCLUDED. INACTIVE LEAF MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS. SURFACE MOUNTED OVERHEAD STOP WITH HOLD OPEN





112C Provide each PR door(s) with the following:


6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 630 IVE




45H 7R 14H 626 BES




1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP H MC 689 LCN

2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE LEAF CLASSROOM LOCK - OUTSIDE LEVER LOCKED AND UNLOCKED BY KEY. INSIDE LEVER ALWAYS UNLOCKED. INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS. SELF CLOSING. HOLD OPEN INCLUDED. INACTIVE LEAF MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS. CONCEALED OVERHEAD STOP WITH HOLD OPEN





6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE




45H 7R 14H 626 BES




2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE LEAF CLASSROOM LOCK - OUTSIDE LEVER LOCKED AND UNLOCKED BY KEY. INSIDE LEVER ALWAYS UNLOCKED. INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS. CONCEALED OVERHEAD STOP WITH HOLD OPEN INACTIVE LEAF MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS. CONCEALED OVERHEAD STOP WITH HOLD OPEN





224 227 311 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE


45H 7R 14H 626 BES






3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION CLASSROOM LOCK - OUTSIDE LEVER LOCKED AND UNLOCKED BY KEY. INSIDE LEVER ALWAYS UNLOCKED. INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS. SELF CLOSING.





3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE


45H 7R 14H 626 BES




1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP MC ST-1630 689 LCN


AS REQ'D LCN



3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION CLASSROOM LOCK - OUTSIDE LEVER LOCKED AND UNLOCKED BY KEY. INSIDE LEVER ALWAYS UNLOCKED. INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS. SELF CLOSING. PULL SIDE MOUNTED. CONCEALED OVERHEAD STOP





106 117 222 226 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE


45H 7D 14H 626 BES






3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION STOREROOM LOCK - OUTSIDE LEVER FIXED. ENTRANCE BY KEY ONLY. INSIDE LEVER ALWAYS UNLOCKED. INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS. SELF-CLOSING.



112E Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE


45H 7D 14H 626 BES




3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION STOREROOM LOCK - OUTSIDE LEVER FIXED. ENTRANCE BY KEY ONLY. INSIDE LEVER ALWAYS UNLOCKED. INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS. SELF-CLOSING. SPRING LOADED STOP AND HOLD OPEN INCLUDED. PUSH SIDE MOUNTED.





112A 112B 112D Provide each PR door(s) with the following:




1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CDSI-99-L-DT-17 626 VON

1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CDSI-99-L-NL-17 626 VON

2 EA THUMB TURN MORT CYL 09-904NH 114 XB-11-720 B502-191

626 SCH







AS REQ'D LCN

SET WEATHER STRIPPING BY DOOR/FRAME MFR. UNK OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE LEAF RIM EXIT DEVICE. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES BY PRESSING PUSHBAR. ENTRY BY FIXED LEVER AFTER RETRACTING LATCHBOLT WITH KEY. LEVER ALWAYS FIXED. DOGGING BY THUMBTURN CYLINDER LOCKS DOWN THE PUSHBAR SO THE LATCHBOLT REMAINS RETRACTED AND DOOR FUNCTIONS AS A PUSH/PULL. THE CDSI SECURITY INDICATOR PROVIDES AT A GLANCE VERIFICATION OF THE “LOCKED /UNLOCKED” STATUS

FROM INSIDE THE ROOM. DEVICE IS EITHER DOGGED DOWN (UNLOCKED) OR UNDOGGED (LOCKED). SELF-CLOSING. SPRING LOADED STOP INCLUDED. PUSH SIDE MOUNTED. INACTIVE LEAF RIM EXIT DEVICE. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES BY PRESSING PUSHBAR. ENTRY BY LEVER WHEN DEVICE DOGGED DOWN. LEVER ALWAYS FIXED. DOGGING BY THUMBTURN CYLINDER LOCKS DOWN THE PUSHBAR SO THE LATCHBOLT REMAINS RETRACTED AND DOOR FUNCTIONS AS A PUSH/PULL. THE CDSI SECURITY INDICATOR PROVIDES AT A GLANCE VERIFICATION OF THE “LOCKED /UNLOCKED” STATUS FROM INSIDE THE ROOM. DEVICE IS EITHER DOGGED DOWN (UNLOCKED) OR UNDOGGED (LOCKED). SELF-CLOSING. SPRING LOADED STOP INCLUDED. PUSH SIDE MOUNTED. KEYED REMOVABLE MULLION





107 307A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CDSI-99-L-NL-17 626 VON

1 EA THUMB TURN MORT CYL 09-904NH 114 XB-11-720 B502-191

626 SCH






1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION RIM EXIT DEVICE. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES BY PRESSING PUSHBAR. ENTRY BY FIXED LEVER AFTER RETRACTING LATCHBOLT WITH KEY. LEVER ALWAYS FIXED. DOGGING BY THUMBTURN CYLINDER LOCKS DOWN THE PUSHBAR SO THE LATCHBOLT REMAINS RETRACTED AND DOOR FUNCTIONS AS A PUSH/PULL. THE CDSI SECURITY INDICATOR PROVIDES AT A GLANCE VERIFICATION OF THE “LOCKED /UNLOCKED” STATUS

FROM INSIDE THE ROOM. DEVICE IS EITHER DOGGED DOWN (UNLOCKED) OR UNDOGGED (LOCKED). SELF-CLOSING. SPRING LOADED STOP INCLUDED. PUSH SIDE MOUNTED.


GLAZING 088000 - 1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section including but not limited to:

1. Exterior Storefronts and Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Glazed entrances. 4. Interior borrowed lites. 5. Coatings.

B. Section includes the following glazing types but not limited to:

1. Heat-Treated Float Glass. 2. Tempered Float Glass. 3. Low-E Coated Glass. 4. Insulated Glass Units.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with glazed Aluminum Framed Systems and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section.

2. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for glazing in hollow metal doors. 3. Section 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances, Storefronts and FRP Doors" for glazing in

aluminum framed storefront systems and aluminum framed entrances. 4. Section 088300 "Mirrors" for mirror glass. 5. Section 088853 “Security Glazing” (SG-1) for insulating security glazing installed in all

exterior doors and storefronts to 7’-0” above finish floor. 6. Section 102226 “Operable Partitions” for glazing units in operable partitions.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E1300.


GLAZING 088000 - 2

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite. 3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). 4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.


A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, edge details, hardware, and attachments to other work.

C. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square.

D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain all glass types specified in this section and section 088853 “Security Glazing” from a single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.


GLAZING 088000 - 3

F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

G. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

H. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.


B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.



GLAZING 088000 - 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated

throughout Project.

B. Strength: Provide kind FT heat-treated float glass.

C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite. 3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).

B. Low ‘E’ Coated Tinted Float Glass: Class 2, complying with other requirements specified.

1. Tint Color: Match existing building as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of products.

2.3 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction . 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.


GLAZING 088000 - 5

B. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by designations in "Insulated-Glass Types" Article:

1. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain.

2.4 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:

1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.

2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

2.6 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous

pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.


GLAZING 088000 - 6

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

2.9 INSULATED GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type (Exterior): Low-e-coated, tinted (outboard), and clear (inboard) insulating glass (Glass Type '1')

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Tinted fully heat-strengthened glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Clear fully heat-strengthened glass. 6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second surface. 7. U-Value: 0.45 maximum. 8. See drawings for locations of glass type.

B. Glass Type (Exterior Tempered): Low-e-coated, tinted (outboard), and clear (inboard) insulating glass (Glass Type '1T')

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Tinted fully tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Clear fully tempered float glass. 6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second surface. 7. U-Value: 0.45 maximum. 8. See drawings for locations of glass type.

2.10 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type: Clear fully tempered float glass (Glass Type '2T')

1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling.


GLAZING 088000 - 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.


GLAZING 088000 - 8

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.


GLAZING 088000 - 9

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION, GENERAL

A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.



GLAZING 088000 - 10



MIRRORS 088300 - 1

SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors:

1. Film-backed, tempered glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing.


1. Division 10 Section "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for metal-framed mirrors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions.

B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to other work.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations for Mirror Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from single source.

D. Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations:

1. GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.


MIRRORS 088300 - 2

2. GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."

E. Safety Glazing Products: For film-backed, tempered mirrors, provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.


A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which mirror manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS

A. Glass Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror coating process.


a. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. b. Avalon Glass and Mirror Company. c. Binswanger Mirror; a division of Vitro America, Inc. d. Donisi Mirror Company. e. Gardner Glass, Inc. f. Guardian Industries. g. Independent Mirror Industries, Inc. h. Lenoir Mirror Company.


MIRRORS 088300 - 3

i. Maran-Wurzell Glass & Mirror. j. National Glass Industries. k. Stroupe Mirror Co., Inc. l. Walker Glass Co., Ltd.

B. Tempered Clear Glass: Mirror Glazing Quality, for blemish requirements; and comply with ASTM C 1048 for Kind FT, Condition A, tempered float glass before silver coating is applied.

1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm .


A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.

C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following :

a. Franklin International; Titebond Division. b. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. c. Macco Adhesives; Liquid Nails Division. d. OSI Sealants, Inc. e. Palmer Products Corporation. f. Pecora Corporation. g. Royal Adhesives & Sealants; Gunther Mirror Mastics Division. h. Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.

D. Film Backing for Safety Mirrors: Film backing and pressure-sensitive adhesive; both compatible with mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer.

2.3 MIRROR HARDWARE

A. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece.

1. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8 and 7/8 inch (9.5 and 22 mm) in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Heavy Gauge Aluminum Shallow Nose "J" Moulding Lower Bar.


MIRRORS 088300 - 4

2. Top Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/8 and 1 inch (16 and 25 mm) in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.062 inch (1.57 mm).

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Heavy Gauge Aluminum Deep Nose "J" Moulding Lower Bar.

3. Finish: Clear bright anodized.

B. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.

C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead-shield expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes.

B. Mirror Edge Treatment: Rounded polished .

1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating.

2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes.

C. Film-Backed Safety Mirrors: Apply film backing with adhesive coating over mirror backing paint as recommended in writing by film-backing manufacturer to produce a surface free of bubbles, blisters, and other imperfections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror mastic with existing finishes or primers.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.


MIRRORS 088300 - 5

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.

B. Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

C. Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors.

1. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Provide setting blocks 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick by 4 inches (100 mm) long at quarter points. To prevent trapping water, provide, between setting blocks, two slotted weeps not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wide by 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) long at bottom channel.

2. Install mastic as follows:

a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of mirrors and backing material.

b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

c. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum air space of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrors and mounting surface.


A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.

B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.

C. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.

D. Wash exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash mirrors as recommended in writing by mirror manufacturer.



MIRRORS 088300 - 6



SECURITY GLAZING 088853 - 1

SECTION 088853 - SECURITY GLAZING (SG-1)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating security glazing for the following applications:

1. Exterior Doors and Storefront Systems to 7’-0” above finish floor.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on security glazing, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.


A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, edge details, hardware, and attachments to other work.

C. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square.

D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.



D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain all glass types specified in this section and section 088000 “Glazing” from a single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

G. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

H. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.


A. Protect security glazing and glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Security Glazing: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating security glazing that deteriorates within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating security glazing is defined as defects in individual lites developed from normal use or failure of hermetic seal under normal use. Deterioration does not include defects in individual lites or failure of hermetic seal that is attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating security glazing contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defects in coated-glass lites include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.

2. Defects in glass-clad polycarbonate lites include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glazing, blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced glass-clad polycarbonate standard, yellowing, and loss of light transmission.

3. Evidence of hermetic seal failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glazing.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General:

1. Installed security glazing shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing; or other defects in construction.

2. Installed security glazing shall withstand security-related loads and forces without damage to the glazing beyond that allowed by referenced standards.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glazing framing members and glazing components.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

C. Safety Glazing: Provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

2.2 SECURITY GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of security glazing and glazing material manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glazing with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glazing, glass thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glazing complies.

C. Insulating Glazing Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the Insulating Glass Certification Council.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide security glazing with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on construction products indicated and on procedures indicated below:

1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.

2. Solar-Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.



2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

2. For heat-strengthened float glass, comply with requirements for Kind HS. 3. For fully tempered float glass, comply with requirements for Kind FT. 4. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.

2.4 POLYCARBONATE SECURITY GLAZING

A. Glass-Clad Polycarbonate: ASTM C1349.

2.5 INSULATING SECURITY GLAZING

A. Insulating Security Glazing: Factory-assembled units, consisting of sealed lites of glazing material indicated separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E2190

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants.

2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.

2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including security glazing, seals of insulating security glazing and air-gap security glazing, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and security glazing manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of security glazing and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.



D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by security glazing manufacturer to maintain security glazing lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit security glazing lateral movement (side walking).

2.8 FABRICATION OF SECURITY GLAZING

A. Fabricate security glazing in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Grind smooth and polish exposed security glazing edges and corners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing for security glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Minimum required bite. 5. Effective sealing between joints of framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving security glazing immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of security glazing, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect edges of security glazing from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged security glazing from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged security glazing includes units with edge or face damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken security glazing and impair performance and appearance.



C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications unless otherwise required by glazing unit manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by security glazing manufacturers for installing lites.

F. Provide spacers for security glazing lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of security glazing. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glazing lites and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent security glazing from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by security glazing manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set security glazing in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

I. Set coated security glazing with proper orientation so that coatings and films face exterior or interior as specified.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket securely in place between glazing unit and frame or fixed stop, so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center security glazing in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in security glazing. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

****** OR ******



D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center security glazing in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in security glazing. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.


A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect security glazing from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with security glazing, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by security glazing manufacturer. Remove and replace security glazing that cannot be cleaned without damage.

C. Wash security glazing on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash security glazing as recommended in writing by security glazing manufacturer.

3.6 INSULATING SECURITY GLAZING SCHEDULE

A. Security Glazing Type SG-1: Low-e-coated, clear insulating security glazing. Outdoor lite is made of monolithic glass and indoor lite is made of glass-clad polycarbonate.


a. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope; ArmorProtect Plus #121100, Type SG-FE2.

2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1-inch. 3. Outdoor Lite: 6-mm thick, low-e-coated, fully tempered float glass. 4. Indoor Lite: Glass-clad polycarbonate.

a. Outer Ply: 3-mm heat-strengthened float glass. b. Single Core: 0.25-inch polycarbonate. c. Inner Ply: 3-mm heat-strengthened float glass.

5. Interlayer Material: Polyurethane. 6. Interlayer Thickness: 0.050 inch. 7. Interspace Content: Air or Argon. 8. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface or sputtered on second surface. 9. U-Factor: 0.77 maximum. 10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.40 maximum. 11. Provide safety glazing labeling.



NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings.


1. Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior load bearing and non-load-bearing wall studs.

2. Section 092900 “Gypsum Board” attached to Non-Structural Metal Framing.



1. Studs and Runners: Provide documentation that framing members' certification is according to SIFA's "Code Compliance Certification Program for Cold-Formed Steel Structural and Non-Structural Framing Members."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. Horizontal Deflection: For wall assemblies, limited to 1/360 of the wall height based on horizontal loading of 5 lbf/sq. ft..

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.



1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or embossed steel studs and runners.

1. Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings but in no case less than required by performance requirements for horizontal deflection indicated in the Steel Stud Span Table at the end of this Section.

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:

1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).

D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Dietrich Metal Framing; BlazeFrame Fire Stop Deflection Track. 2) Fire Trak Corporation: Fire Trak.

E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 gauge.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.

B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.

C. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated.

D. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.




a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation. c. United States Gypsum Company.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:

1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened.



C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.



3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts

that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

3.6 STEEL STUD SPAN TABLES

A. Table is based on composite partitions (5/8 inch Type X gypsum board on both sides of metal studs), specified horizontal deflection, and ASTM C754.

1. Comply with manufacturers minimum base metal thickness requirements for applications indicated, but in no case shall base metal thicknesses of steel studs be less than that indicated in table.



2. At fire rated partitions, comply with table, but in no case shall base metal thickness of steel studs be less than that required to comply with fire rating indicated.

STUD MAX. STUD MIN. BASE LIMITING DEPTH SPACING METAL THICKNESS HEIGHT____

1-5/8” 16” o. c. 25 gauge (0.0179“) Not Acceptable

1-5/8” 16” o. c. 22 gauge (0.0296”) Not Acceptable

2-1/2” 16” o. c. 25 gauge (0.0179“) 9’-10”

2-1/2” 16” o. c. 22 gauge (0.0296”) 10-6”

3-5/8” 16” o. c. 25 gauge (0.0179“) 12’-4”

3-5/8” 16” o. c. 22 gauge 0.0296” 13’-7”

6” 16” o. c. 25 gauge (0.0179“) 17’-11”

6” 16” o. c. 22 gauge (0.0296”) 20’-3”

8” 16” o. c. 18 gauge (0.0428”) 30’-0”



GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board. 3. Tile backing panels. 4. Adjustable partition closures.


1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls and soffits. 2. Section 066400 “Plastic Paneling” for FRP panels installed over Mold-Resistant Gypsum

Board. 3. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and

suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 4. Section 093000 “Tiling” for ceramic wall tile installed over tile backing panels.



1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.



2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

B. Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.


C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.


D. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M gypsum board, tested according to

Impact and Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M Level 3.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide National

Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi-Impact XP, or a comparable product. 2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

E. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.



2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges.

1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet.

B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Fry Reglet Corporation. b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries.

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of

ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials

specified

C. Adjustable Partition Closures: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Gordon,

Inc.; Mullion Mate, or a comparable product.

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.

3. Finish: To match window framing.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.



1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use setting-type taping or drying-type, all-purpose compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, all-purpose compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, all-purpose compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

D. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.




3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated to be impact and abuse-resistant. 2. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies. 3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces except in wet areas. 4. Abuse-Resistant Type: Vertical surfaces to 8 feet above finish floor. 5. Mold-Resistant Type: Vertical and ceiling surfaces in wet areas (restrooms, at mop sinks,

walls with sinks, behind FRP Panels), and where gypsum board is laminated to substrate.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.



2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

D. Curved Surfaces:

1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch- long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.

2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches o.c.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings and/or according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.



3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



TILING 093000 - 1

SECTION 093000 - TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Ceramic wall tile (CWT-1). 2. Quarry floor tile and base (QT-1). 3. Porcelain floor tile and base (PFT-1). 4. Porcelain wall tile (PWT-1). 5. Waterproof membrane. 6. Crack isolation membrane. 7. Epoxy Grout. 8. Grout Sealer. 9. Metal edge strips.


1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces.

2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units used behind wall tile.



1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades.



B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

C. Samples for Verification.

1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and

composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12


TILING 093000 - 2

inches square, but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work.

3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 4. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths. 5. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.


A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source or producer. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation. 2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.

E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.


TILING 093000 - 3


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

2.2 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Ceramic Wall Tile (CWT-#) Types (see drawings for tile types)

1. Products: As indicated on Drawings. The product color(s), finish(es) and/or texture(s), and the manufacturer providing the product indicated are the basis-of-design. The specified color, finish, and/or texture shall be provided without exception to the Bid Sum or construction schedule. If the manufacturer providing the product is not the basis-of-design, but is otherwise an acceptable comparable product, then the product provided shall match the specified color, finish, and/or texture and the Owner shall not incur additional cost or claims of schedule delays regardless of whether compliance is considered a custom, premium or specialty order.

2. Composition: see drawings. 3. Module Size: see drawings. 4. Thickness: see drawings. 5. Surface: see drawings. 6. Finish: see drawings. 7. Tile Color and Pattern: see drawings. 8. Grout Color: see drawings. 9. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where

applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes selected from manufacturer's standard shapes.

B. Quarry Floor Tile and Floor Base Tile (QT-#) Types (see drawings for tile types)

1. Products: As indicated on Drawings. The product color(s), finish(es) and/or texture(s), and the manufacturer providing the product indicated are the basis-of-design. The specified color, finish, and/or texture shall be provided without exception to the Bid Sum or construction schedule. If the manufacturer providing the product is not the basis-of-design, but is otherwise an acceptable comparable product, then the product


TILING 093000 - 4

provided shall match the specified color, finish, and/or texture and the Owner shall not incur additional cost or claims of schedule delays regardless of whether compliance is considered a custom, premium or specialty order.

2. Composition: see drawings. 3. Module Size: see drawings. 4. Floor Base: see drawings. 5. Thickness: see drawings. 6. Surface: see drawings. 7. Finish: see drawings. 8. Tile Color and Pattern: see drawings. 9. Grout Color: see drawings. 10. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where


C. Porcelain Floor Tile and Floor Base Tile (PFT-#) Types (see drawings for tile types)


2. Composition: see drawings. 3. Module Size: see drawings. 4. Floor Base: see drawings. 5. Thickness: see drawings. 6. Surface: see drawings. 7. Finish: see drawings. 8. Tile Color and Pattern: see drawings. 9. Grout Color: see drawings. 10. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where


D. Porcelain Wall Tile (PWT-#) Types (see drawings for tile types)


2. Composition: see drawings. 3. Module Size: see drawings. 4. Floor Base: see drawings. 5. Thickness: see drawings. 6. Surface: see drawings. 7. Finish: see drawings. 8. Tile Color and Pattern: see drawings. 9. Grout Color: see drawings.


TILING 093000 - 5

10. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes selected from manufacturer's standard shapes.

2.3 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product recommended for the tile type that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

2.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, that complies with ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

B. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and fabric reinforcement.


a. Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane.

2.5 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.


a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. c. Bostik, Inc. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. l. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.

2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

B. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I.


TILING 093000 - 6


a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. c. C-Cure. d. Custom Building Products. e. DAP Inc. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. j. Summitville Tiles, Inc. k. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.

2.6 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3.

1. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use.


a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. c. Bostik, Inc. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. j. Summitville Tiles, Inc. k. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Vapor-Retarder Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D4397, 4.0 mils thick.

C. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material. 1. Basis of Design: See drawings for basis of design for metal edge strips.


TILING 093000 - 7

D. Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.

1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87.

2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.

E. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

F. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout.

2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified.

b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.

4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.



TILING 093000 - 8

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.

3.3 TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. c. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

2. Where adjoining tiles on walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints.

3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.


TILING 093000 - 9

F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:

1. Ceramic Tile: 1/16 inch. 2. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch. 3. Porcelain Tile: 1/4 inch .

G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

I. Metal Edge Strips: Install at all locations shown on drawings and as follows:

1. Where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.

2. Horizontal locations at top of ceramic tile wainscot. 3. At all inside and outside vertical and horizontal corners. 4. At edges of ceramic tile abutting adjacent materials such as door frames, trim, etc.

J. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate.

B. Allow waterproofing to cure and verify by testing that it is watertight before installing tile or setting materials over it.

3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate.

B. Allow crack isolation membrane to cure before installing tile or setting materials over it.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.


TILING 093000 - 10

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging.

C. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls.

D. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

E. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.

3.7 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:

1. Tile Installation F125A: Thin-set mortar on crack isolation membrane; TCA F125A.

a. Crack Isolation Membrane. b. Tile Type: As specified on drawings. c. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. d. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded and Polymer-modified unsanded grout.

B. Wall Installations, Tile Backer over Metal Studs or Furring:

1. Tile Installation B412: Thin-set mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber cement underlayment; TCA B412.

a. Tile Type: As specified on drawings. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. d. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that

does not change color or appearance of grout.



ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.



B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.

2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- long Samples of each type, finish, and color.


A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 3 percent of quantity installed.


A. Source Limitations:

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.

2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements:



1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency .

b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:

a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

C. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions according to the following:

1. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's "Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings--Seismic Zones 0-2."


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.



B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations:

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on architectural drawings.

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.

B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 12 gage diameter wire.



2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Prelude XL or comparable product by one of the following:

1. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.

B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Hot-Dip Galvanized, G60, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation; with prefinished, cold-rolled, 15/16-inch- wide aluminum caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 3. Face Finish: Painted white.

2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated.

2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.

2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant. 2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable,

synthetic-rubber sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.



B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

3. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

4. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 7. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from

hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.

8. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.



E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install light fixtures, mechanical devices, and other terminals or services as follows:

1. Positively attach to the ceiling suspension system with attachment devices capable of supporting the entire weight acting in any direction.

2. Positively attach to the building structure above as follows: a. Mechanical devices and terminals weighing between 20 and 56 lbs. shall be

fastened to the structure above by two slack wires at opposite diagonal corners. b. Light fixtures weighing up to 10 lbs. shall be fastened to the structure above by one

slack wire. c. Light fixtures weighing up to 56 lbs. shall be fastened to the structure above by two

slack wires at opposite diagonal corners. d. Fixtures, mechanical devices and other terminals or services over 56 lbs. shall be

supported by the structure above, independent of the ceiling suspension system.

G. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.

1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings.

2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.

3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.

4. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.



RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories.


1. Section 096519 "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient floor tile. 2. Section 096813 “Tile Carpeting” for tile carpeting and walk off carpeting.



B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.

C. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designation indicated on drawings.



1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.



B. Source Limitations: Obtain all resilient base and accessories, including wall base, and moldings from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on

Drawings.

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

C. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.

D. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

E. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

F. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on Drawings.

2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product(s) indicated on

Drawings:

B. Description: Carpet edge for glue-down applications, nosing for carpet, nosing for resilient floor, reducer strip for resilient floor covering.



C. Material: Vinyl or Rubber.

D. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.

E. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on Drawings.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.



B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

H. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.



RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1

SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Luxury vinyl floor tile (LVT-#). 2. Bio-flooring tile (BBT-#)



B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.

C. Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.



1. Floor Tile: Furnish in accordance with Division 0 Document “010000 General Requirements.”


A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

B. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

C. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide As indicated on Drawings.

B. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on Drawings.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation approved by flooring manufacturer.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ARDEX

GmbH; Ardex K-15, or a comparable product.

B. LVT Flooring Adhesives:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following.

a. Mannington Commercial; Xpress Step Premium for LVT.

C. Bio-flooring Adhesives:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong; S-525 Bio-

flooring High-Moisture Adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.



1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives

and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates are below the floor tile manufacturer’s recommended moisture-vapor-emission rate.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates are below the floor tile manufacturer’s recommended maximum percent relative humidity level.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.



G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.



TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1

SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes but not limited to:

1. Modular carpet tile (CPT-#). 2. Walk off carpet tile (WCPT-#). 3. Accessories.


1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile.



B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Walk Off Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.




A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd..




A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard."


A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.


a. More than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, and runs. b. Dimensional instability. c. Excess static discharge. d. Loss of tuft-bind strength. e. Loss of face fiber. f. Delamination.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE (CPT-#).

A. Carpet Tile: As indicated on Drawings.

2.2 WALK OFF CARPET TILE (WCPT-#)

A. Carpet Tile: As indicated on Drawings.



2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Moisture Inhibitor / Barrier: High Solids, Fast Drying, Polymer based compound or type recommended by flooring manufacturer for substrate to control concrete moisture conditions that are excess of acceptable limits provided or approved by the flooring manufacturer for applications indicated.

C. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.

D. Edge/Transition Strips: Provide profile and width indicated on drawings, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance.

B. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

C. Concrete Slabs: Verify that finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.

1. Perform moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

2. substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers.



D. Install moisture inhibitor/ barrier to concrete slab on grade substrates to receive flooring specified in this section per flooring manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Prep concrete floor slab per manufacturer's instructions including but not limited to grinding, bead-blasting or other mechanical methods required to prep the concrete floor slab.

E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular Carpet" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

D. Maintain pile-direction patterns indicated on Drawings.

E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standard," Section 20, "Protecting Indoor Installations."

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.



WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 1

SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vinyl wall covering.


1. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for assemblies to receive wall coverings.





1. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and fire-test-response

characteristics.

B. Samples: For each type of wall covering and for each color, pattern, texture, and finish

specified, full width by 36 inches (914 mm) long in size.


A. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer: Installation by skilled commercial wallcovering contractor with no less than (3) three

years of documented experience installing wallcovering of the types and extent required.




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed

and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and

HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at

levels intended for occupants after Project completion during the remainder of the construction

period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied

with identical adhesives to substrates in accordance with test method indicated below by a

qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing

agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

2.2 VINYL WALL COVERING

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated

on drawings or comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

B. Total Weight: 20 oz per linear yard.

C. Width: 52 inches.

D. Backing: Osnaburg fabric.

E. Mildew Resistance: Rating of zero or 1 when tested in accordance with ASTM G21.

F. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As indicated on drawings or as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range of options.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and

substrate application indicated and as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.

B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant, complying with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior

Painting" and recommended in writing by primer/sealer and wall-covering manufacturers for

intended substrate.

C. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation surfaces being true in plane and vertical and horizontal alignment, maximum

moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil,

grease, mold, and mildew.

C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking,

unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.

1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry

units when tested with an electronic moisture meter.

2. Gypsum Board: Apply primer/sealer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer

manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.

D. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and

similar items.

E. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas

not less than 24 hours before installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF WALL COVERING

A. Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to

products and applications indicated.

B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change the roll numbers at partition breaks

and corners.

C. Install wall covering without lifted or curling edges and without visible shrinkage.

D. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (152 mm) from outside corners and 6 inches

(152 mm) from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. Horizontal

seams are not permitted.

E. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without

overlaps or gaps between strips.

F. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.



3.4 CLEANING

A. Remove excess adhesive at seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.

B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.

C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned.



STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 1

SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and application of interior wood finishes.


1. Section 062023 "Interior Finish Carpentry" for interior wood materials to receive staining and/or transparent finishes specified in this section.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish indicated.

1. Submit Samples on representative samples of actual wood substrates, 8 inches square or 8 inches long.

2. Label each Sample for location and application area.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply finishes when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. ICI Paints. 3. M.A.B. Paints. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 5. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).


A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated.

C. Stain Colors: Match Architect's samples .

2.3 WOOD FILLERS

A. Wood Filler Paste: MPI #91.

2.4 STAINS

A. Stain, Semi-Transparent, for Interior Wood: MPI #90.

2.5 POLYURETHANE VARNISHES

A. Varnish, Interior, Polyurethane, Oil-Modified, Satin: MPI #57.

1. Gloss Level 4 or as selected by Architect from full range of options.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



B. Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates: 10 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

1. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing.

2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer.

C. Interior Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Apply wood filler paste to open-grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting

Specification Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish. 3. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood

filler. Sand smooth when dried.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated. 2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. 3. Do not apply finishes over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.




A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces.

3.5 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Wood substrates, nontraffic surfaces, including wood trim .

1. Polyurethane Varnish over Stain System:

a. Stain Coat: Stain, semi-transparent, for interior wood, MPI #90. b. First Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil-modified, satin (Gloss

Level 4), MPI #57.

2. Polyurethane Varnish System:

a. Prime Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil-modified, satin (Gloss

Level 4), MPI #57.



HIGH-PERFORMANCE PAINT COATINGS 099600 - 1

SECTION 099600 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE PAINT COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of high-performance paint coating systems.


1. Division 5 Steel Sections for shop priming of steel.

C. Paint exposed surfaces, except where indicated that surface or material shall not be painted or remains natural. If an item or surface is not specifically indicated, paint item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1 (FLAT or MATTE): Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 2 (VELVET): Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 3 (EGGSHELL): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 4 (SATIN): 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 5 (SEMI-GLOSS): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 6 (GLOSS): 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. Gloss Level 7 (HIGH GLOSS): More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.




A. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system.

B. Product List: Cross-reference to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Coatings: Furnish in accordance with Division 0 Document “010000 General Requirements.”


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE PAINT COATINGS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

3. Products shall be of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.

B. Colors: As indicated on Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and coating systems indicated.



B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content, alkalinity of surfaces, or alkalinity of mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied coatings.

H. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer that is recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for coating system indicated.

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with filler that is

recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for coating system indicated. Sand smooth when dried.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply high-performance paint coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Coat backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.



B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE PAINT COATING SCHEDULE

A. Number of Coats: The number of coats specified above is the minimum number. The painting contractor is responsible for any additional coats that may be required to ensure that the new coats completely cover and hide existing finishes and resulting in uniform finish, color, and appearance.

B. Steel, Galvanized-Metal, and Cast-Iron Substrates:

1. Pigmented Polyurethane over Epoxy Primer System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive, for metal. b. Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane, pigmented, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Polyurethane, pigmented, gloss finish.



1) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial Urethane Alkyd Enamel.

3.7 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE PAINT COATING SCHEDULE

A. Number of Coats: The number of coats specified above is the minimum number. The painting contractor is responsible for any additional coats that may be required to ensure that the new coats completely cover and hide existing finishes and resulting in uniform finish, color, and appearance.

B. Steel Substrates and Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Pigmented Acrylic over Acrylic Primer System (total dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils per coat):

a. Prime Coat: Sherwin Williams; B66 Series, Pro-Cryl primer. b. Intermediate (2) Coats: Sherwin Williams; Sher-Cryl High Performance Acrylic. c. Topcoat: Sherwin Williams; Sher Clear Acrylic topcoat (or approve equal).

1) All applications to have a Semi-gloss finish.

C. Wood Substrates: Wood trim.

1. Epoxy System:

a. Prime Coat: Epoxy. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Epoxy, semi-gloss finish.

1) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Waterborne Epoxy.

D. Gypsum Board Vertical Substrates:

1. Epoxy System:

a. Prime Coat: Epoxy. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Epoxy, eggshell finish.

1) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Waterborne Epoxy.

E. Gypsum Board Ceilings and Soffits:

1. Latex System (total dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils per coat):

a. Prime Coat: Latex. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Epoxy, eggshell finish.

1) Sherwin Williams; B20 Series, ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex (or

approved equal).



VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 1

SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Visual display board assemblies. 2. Display rails / tackstrips.


1. Section 097723 "Fabric-Wrapped Panels" for tackable, fabric-covered panels mounted on walls.



B. Shop Drawings: For visual display units.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work. 2. Show locations of panel joints. Show locations of field-assembled joints for factory-

fabricated units too large to ship in one piece. 3. Include sections of typical trim members.

C. Samples: For each type of visual display unit indicated.

1. Visual Display Panel: Facing, core, and backing indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required.


A. Deliver factory-fabricated visual display units completely assembled in one piece. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured unit size, or if unit size is impracticable to ship in one piece, provide two or more pieces with joints in locations indicated on approved Shop Drawings.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with visual display units by field measurements before fabrication.



1. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay the Work.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.

2. Warranty Period: Life of the building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display unit from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2.3 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Golterman &

Sabo/Claridge, Inc., or comparable manufacturer’s product.

B. Visual Display Board Assembly: Factory fabricated.

1. Assembly: Markerboard and tackboard. 2. Corners: Square. 3. Width: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Height: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Mounting Method: Direct to wall.

C. Markerboard Panel: Porcelain-enamel-faced markerboard panel on core indicated.

1. Color: White.

D. Tackboard Panel: Vinyl-fabric-faced tackboard panel on core indicated.



1. Fabric Wrapped Edge: Wrap edge of tackboard panel with fabric facing. 2. Color and Pattern: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- thick, extruded aluminum; standard size and shape.

1. Field-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard, snap-on trim with no visible screws or exposed joints.

2. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic finish.

F. Joints: Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to Architect and as indicated on approved Shop Drawings.

G. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard; continuous.

1. Box Type: Extruded aluminum with slanted front, grooved tray, and cast-aluminum end closures.

H. Display Rail: Manufacturer's standard, extruded-aluminum display rail with plastic-impregnated-cork insert, end stops, designed to hold accessories.

1. Size: 2 inches high by full length of visual display unit. 2. Map Hooks and Clips: Two map hooks with flexible metal clips for every 48 inches of

display rail or fraction thereof. 3. Flag Holder: One for each room. 4. Tackboard Insert Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 5. Aluminum Color: Match finish of visual display assembly trim.

2.4 MARKERBOARD PANELS

A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboard Panels: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard assembly of three-ply construction, consisting of moisture-barrier backing, core material, and porcelain-enamel face sheet with low-gloss finish. Laminate panels under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard, flexible waterproof adhesive.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Core: Minimum 1/4 inch thick, with manufacturer's standard moisture-barrier backing.

2. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard moisture-resistant thermoplastic type.

2.5 TACKBOARD PANELS

A. Tackboard Panels:

1. Facing: Vinyl fabric. 2. Core: Manufacturer's standard.

2.6 TACKSTRIPS

A. Display Rail: Manufacturer's standard, extruded-aluminum display rail with plastic-impregnated-cork insert, end stops, designed to hold accessories.



1. Size: 2 inches high by length indicated on Drawings.

2.7 MATERIALS

A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: PEI-1002, with face sheet manufacturer's standard two- or three-coat process.

B. Plastic-Impregnated-Cork Sheet: Seamless, homogeneous, self-sealing sheet consisting of granulated cork, linseed oil, resin binders, and dry pigments that are mixed and calendared onto fabric backing; with washable vinyl finish and integral color throughout with surface-burning characteristics indicated.

C. Vinyl Fabric: Mildew resistant, washable, complying with FS CCC-W-408D, Type II, texture or pattern as indicated on Drawings; weighing not less than 13 oz./sq. yd.; with surface-burning characteristics indicated.

D. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.

E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.

F. Adhesives for Field Application: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive for use with specific type of panels, sheets, or assemblies; and for substrate application; as recommended in writing by visual display unit manufacturer.



B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display units.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.

B. Clean substrates of substances, such as dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards.

C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual display units and wall surfaces.

D. Prime wall surfaces indicated to receive visual display units and as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and visual display unit manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.

B. Factory-Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies: Adhere to wall surfaces with egg-size adhesive gobs at 16 inches o.c., horizontally and vertically.


A. Clean visual display units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one removable cleaning instructions label to visual display unit in each room.

B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

C. Cover and protect visual display units after installation and cleaning.



DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 101419 - 1

SECTION 101419 - DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cast metal lettering installed on exterior building walls. 2. Preparing high resolution vector files for final review & approval by architect and owner,

and for contractors use.

B. Contractor will secure all permits and payment for cost of the sign permits will be by Owner. Contractor to provide itemized invoice for costs incurred in obtaining the permits.



B. High Resolution Vector File: The contractor will prepare a high-resolution vector format file of interior signage & dimensional letters for final review & approval by architect and owner, and for contractors use. Contractor shall provide the electronic version of the file to the Architect along with a PDF copy.

C. Shop Drawings: For dimensional letters and signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by

others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half

size.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish.

1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.

E. Signage Accessory Samples: Provide two (2) samples of the Stainless-Steel Supports (Standoffs).






A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products.

B. Experienced installer who has specialized in installing exterior signs, and with a record of successful in-service performance.


A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.


A. Contractor to be responsible for any storage, if needed, prior to installation of signs

B. Contractor to be responsible for accepting delivery either on site or at their facility at no additional cost to Owner.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS, EXTERIOR

A. Cast Metal Characters: Characters with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, and as follows:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ziglin

Signs, 540 Vossbrink Drive, Washington, MO (636) 390-8455 Office, Primary Contact: Matt Horn (314) 495-7784 Mobile, [email protected] or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers, or as approved by Architect prior to bidding.



a. ASI Sign Innovations, Contact: Brian Belko, Phone: 314.421.2288, email: [email protected].

2. Character Material: Sheet or plate aluminum. 3. Material Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size and design of character. 4. Character Height: As indicated. 5. Character Depth: As indicated. 6. Finishes:

a. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

7. Mounting: Concealed, stainless-steel back bar or bracket assembly.

a. Hold characters at distance as selected by Architect from wall surface.

8. Typeface: As selected by Architect.

2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTER AND SIGNAGE MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

B. Non-glare acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering).

C. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and exposure indicated.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel devices unless otherwise indicated.

B. Stainless Steel Supports (Standoffs): Types as indicated on drawings and/or as selected by Architect from full range of options.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly.

2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention.



3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous.

5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners. 6. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to

existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.

B. Brackets: Fabricate brackets, fittings, and hardware for bracket-mounted signs to suit sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Modify manufacturer's standard brackets as required. 1. Stainless-Steel Brackets: Factory finish brackets to match sign background finish unless

otherwise indicated.


A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated.

D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated.


A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work.

B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation.

3. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

B. Mounting Methods:

1. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

2. Back Bar and Brackets: Remove loose debris from substrate surface and install backbar or bracket supports in position so that signage is correctly located and aligned.


A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed characters and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace characters with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.



TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 1

SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-polymer toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for blocking. 2. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab

bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. 4. Show overhead support or bracing locations.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for units, prepared on 6-inch- square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.

2. Each type of hardware and accessory.


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.




A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the Illinois Accessibility Code, U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.

2.2 SOLID-POLYMER UNITS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on drawings or or comparable product by one of the following as approved by Architect prior to bidding.

1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. 3. Comtec Industries/Capitol Partitions. 4. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 5. Global Steel Products Corp. 6. Santana Products, Inc.

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced and floor anchored.

C. Urinal-Screen Style: Floor anchored and post to ceiling.

D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material.

1. Hinges: Continuous heavy-duty stainless steel full-height.



2. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum or stainless-steel strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent burning.

3. Color and Pattern: As indicated on Drawings. The product color(s), finish(es) and/or texture(s), and the manufacturer providing the product indicated are the basis-of-design. The specified color, finish, and/or texture shall be provided without exception to the Bid Sum or construction schedule. If the manufacturer providing the product is not the basis-of-design, but is otherwise an acceptable comparable product, then the product provided shall match the specified color, finish, and/or texture and the Owner shall not incur additional cost or claims of schedule delays regardless of whether compliance is considered a custom, premium or specialty order.

E. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

F. Urinal-Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of 1-3/4-inch- square, aluminum tube with satin finish; with shoe and sleeve (cap) matching that on the pilaster.

G. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories.

1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard continuous, cam type that swings to a closed or

partially open positiom. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for

emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible.

4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.

5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with

regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible.

B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.



2.4 FABRICATION

A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

B. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

C. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

D. Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of posts. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at posts to conceal anchorage.

E. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

1. Maximum Clearances:

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.

2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-height brackets.

a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.



B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.

C. Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb, and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position.

D. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Secure pilasters to supporting construction and level, plumb, and tighten. Hang doors and adjust so doors are level and aligned with panels when doors are in closed position.

E. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.



OPERABLE PARTITIONS 102226 - 1

SECTION 102226 - OPERABLE PARTITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manually operated, acoustical partitions. 2. Engineering analysis of support structure for all loads including seismic loads.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach supporting tracks to overhead structural system.

2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for fire-rated assemblies and sound barrier construction above the ceiling at track.

3. Section 102227 "Operable Glass Partitions" for operable panel partitions made of glass panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NIC: Noise Isolation Class.

B. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

C. STC: Sound Transmission Class.





B. Shop Drawings: For operable panel partitions.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, attachment details, and numbered panel installation sequence.

2. Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.



C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing.

1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Textile Facing Material: Full width by not less than 36-inch- (914-mm-) long section of fabric from dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat.

2. Panel Facing Material: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than 3 inches (75 mm) square.

3. Panel Edge Material: Not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long. 4. Chair Rail: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, 6 inches (150 mm) long. 5. Glass: Units 12 inches (300 mm) square. 6. Hardware: One of each exposed door-operating device.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For operable panel partitions.

1. Include design calculations prepared to profession engineer licensed in the state of Missouri for seismic restraints that brace tracks to structure above.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Partition track, track supports and bracing, switches, turning space, and storage layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. HVAC ductwork, outlets, and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Smoke detectors. f. Access panels.

6. Plenum acoustical barriers.

B. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support-beam, mounting-hole template.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For operable panel partitions, tracks, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. Include seismic capacity of partition assemblies to remain in vertical position during a seismic event and the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on analysis, testing, or experience data, according to ASCE/SEI 7.



2. Detailed description of partition anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of operable panel partition.

1. Include approval letter signed by manufacturer acknowledging Owner-furnished panel facing material complies with requirements.

F. Product Test Reports: For each operable panel partition, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable panel partitions to include in maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Panel finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance.

b. Seals, hardware, track, track switches, carriers, and other operating components. c. Electric operator and controls.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same production run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Panel Finish-Facing Material: Furnish full width in quantity to cover both sides of two panels when installed.




A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages and panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels.



1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Faulty operation of operable panel partitions. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design seismic bracing of tracks to structure above.

B. Seismic Performance: Operable panel partitions shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the partition panels will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

C. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated:

1. Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for laboratory sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTM E90, determined by ASTM E413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated.

2. Noise-Reduction Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly, identical to partition tested for STC, tested for sound-absorption performance according to ASTM C423, and rated for not less than the NRC indicated.

3. Noise-Isolation Requirements: Installed operable panel partition assembly, identical to partition tested for STC, tested for NIC according to ASTM E336, determined by ASTM E413, and rated for 10 dB less than STC value indicated.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes complying with one of the following as determined by testing identical products by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2.2 OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. Operable Acoustical Panels: Partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing, suspension system, operators, and accessories.



B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Acousti-Seal #931

by Modernfold Inc. or comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

C. Panel Operation: Series of individual flat panels, manually operated, top supported with operable floor seals.

1. Final Closure: Horizontally expanding panel edge with removable crank.

D. Panel Construction: As required to support panel from suspension components and with reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish irregularities.

E. Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements.

1. Panel Width: As indicated on drawings.

F. Panel Construction

1. Roll-formed steel wrapping around panel edge. Panel skins shall be lock formed and welded directly to the frame for unitized construction.

2. STC: Not less than 52. 3. Panel Weight: 12 lb/sq. ft. (59 kg/sq. m) maximum. 4. Hinges for Panels and Closure Panels: Full leaf butt hinges, attached directly to the panel

frame with welded hinge anchor plates within panel to further support hinge mounting to frame. Lifetime warranty on hinges. Hinges mounted into panel edge or vertical astragal are not acceptable.

5. Panel Trim: No vertical trim required or allowed on edges of panels; minimal groove appearance at panel joints.

G. Panel Finish

1. Panel finish shall be: Reinforced vinyl with woven backing weighing not less than 21 ounces (595 grams) per lineal yard.

2. Panel Trim: Exposed panel trim of one consistent colors as selected by Architect from full range of options.

2.3 SEALS

A. Vertical Interlocking Sound Seals between panels: Roll-formed steel astragals, with reversible tongue and groove configuration in each panel edge for universal panel operation. Rigid plastic astragals or astragals in only one panel edge are not acceptable.

B. Horizontal Top Seals: Continuous contact extruded vinyl bulb shape with pairs of non-contacting vinyl fingers to prevent distortion without the need for mechanically operated parts.

C. Horizontal bottom floor seals shall be:

1. Modernfold IA2 Bottom seal. Automatic operable seals providing nominal 2-inch (51mm) operating clearance with an operating range of +0.50-inch (13mm) to -1.50-inch (38mm) which automatically drop as panels are positioned, without the need for tools or cranks. Seal shall be operable from either panel edge to permit multiple panel position and reversible operation.




A. Suspension Tracks: Minimum 7-gauge, 0.18-inch (4.57mm) roll formed steel. Static loading of track with brackets at 48-inch (1220mm) centers shall show no failure of track or brackets at 5,000 pounds (2550kg) point loading at mid-span. Track shall be supported by adjustable steel hanger brackets connected to structural support pairs of 0.50-inch (13mm) diameter threaded rods. Brackets must support the load bearing surface of the track.

1. Exposed track soffit: Steel, removable for service and maintenance, attached to track bracket without exposed fasteners, and pre-painted off-white.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine flooring, floor levelness, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable panel partitions.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed in area of partition installation.

B. Install panels in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings.

C. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable.

D. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable.

E. Light-Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints and top and bottom seals for voids. Adjust partitions for alignment and full closure of vertical joints and full closure along top and bottom seals. Perform test and make adjustments before NIC testing.


A. NIC Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

1. Testing Extent: Testing agency shall randomly select five operable panel partition installation(s) for testing.

2. Testing Methodology: Perform testing of installed operable panel partition for noise isolation according to ASTM E336, determined by ASTM E413, and rated for not less than NIC indicated. Adjust and fit partitions to comply with NIC test method requirements.

B. An operable panel partition installation will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operable panel partitions, hardware, and other moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Verify that safety devices are properly functioning.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions.



OPERABLE GLASS PARTITIONS 102227 - 1

SECTION 102227 - OPERABLE GLASS PARTITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manually operated, glass-panel partitions. 2. Engineering analysis of support structure for all loads including seismic loads.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach supporting tracks to overhead structural system.

2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for fire-rated assemblies and sound barrier construction above the ceiling at track.

3. Section 102226 "Operable Partitions" for fabric faced operable panel partitions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NIC: Noise Isolation Class.

B. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

C. STC: Sound Transmission Class.





B. Shop Drawings: For operable glass-panel partitions.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, attachment details, and numbered panel installation sequence.

2. Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.



C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing.


D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Panel Facing Material: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than 3 inches (75 mm) square.

2. Panel Edge Material: Not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long. 3. Chair Rail: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, 6 inches (150 mm) long. 4. Glass: Units 12 inches (300 mm) square. 5. Hardware: One of each exposed door-operating device.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For operable glass-panel partitions.

1. Include design calculations prepared to profession engineer licensed in the state of Missouri for seismic restraints that brace tracks to structure above.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Partition track, track supports and bracing, switches, turning space, and storage layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. HVAC ductwork, outlets, and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Smoke detectors. f. Access panels.

6. Plenum acoustical barriers.

B. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support-beam, mounting-hole template.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For operable glass-panel partitions, tracks, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. Include seismic capacity of partition assemblies to remain in vertical position during a seismic event and the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on analysis, testing, or experience data, according to ASCE/SEI 7.

2. Detailed description of partition anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of operable glass-panel partition.



1. Include approval letter signed by manufacturer acknowledging Owner-furnished panel facing material complies with requirements.

F. Product Test Reports: For each operable glass-panel partition, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable panel partitions to include in maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Panel finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance.

b. Seals, hardware, track, track switches, carriers, and other operating components. c. Electric operator and controls.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same production run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Panel Finish-Facing Material: Furnish full width in quantity to cover both sides of two panels when installed.




A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages and panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable glass-panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.




a. Faulty operation of operable glass-panel partitions. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design seismic bracing of tracks to structure above.

B. Seismic Performance: Operable panel glass-partitions shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the partition panels will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

C. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable glass-panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated:

1. Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable glass-panel partition assembly tested for laboratory sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTM E90, determined by ASTM E413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes complying with one of the following as determined by testing identical products by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2.2 OPERABLE GLASS PANELS

A. Operable Glass Panels: Aluminum-framed glass-panel partition system, including panels, seals, suspension system, operators, and accessories.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Acousti-Clear

Automatic Paired Panel by Modernfold Inc. or comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

C. Panel Operation Paired Panel: Series of paired flat panels hinged together in pairs, manually operated, manually activated, top supported with automatic top and bottom seals. 1. Final Closure:

a. Pivot Panel (Glass Panel) 1) Hardware - Satin Stainless Steel Finish

a) Locking Rail Handle b) Panel (Glass Panel) c) Horizontally expanding panel edge with removable crank.



D. Panel Construction: As required to support panel from suspension components and with reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish irregularities.

1. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze operable glass panels in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

E. Dimensions: Fabricate operable glass-panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements.

1. Panel Width: As indicated on drawings.

F. Panel Construction

1. Nominal 4-inch (100 mm) thick panels in manufacturer’s standard 48-inch (1220 mm) widths. All panel horizontal and vertical framing members shall be fabricated from aluminum extrusions and mechanically fastened. Frame shall be designed to minimize exposure on face of panels.

2. Acoustical ratings of panels with this construction achieve Sound Transmission Class of (see below) minimum STC when tested in accordance with ASTM E90 and classified in accordance with ASTM E413. a. STC: Not less than 45.

3. Panel Weight: 12 lb/sq. ft. (59 kg/sq. m) maximum. 4. Panel Faces:

a. 5/16-inch (8 mm) clear glass on one face, mechanically fastened and sealed in frame.

b. 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) clear glass on one face, mechanically fastened and sealed in frame.

c. Glass Type: Tempered, complying with ASTM C1036, ASTM C1048, CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Categories 1 & 2, and ANSI Z97.1.

5. Glass Finish: Clear tempered 6. Panel Trim: Pre-finished aluminum to protect edge of glass in the following finish:

a. Clear Anodized

2.3 SEALS

A. Vertical Interlocking Sound Seals between panels: Extruded aluminum astragals with interlocking convex/concave resilient quad-lip gaskets. Rigid plastic astragals or astragals with gaskets on only one panel edge are not acceptable.

B. Horizontal Top and Bottom Seals shall be automatic operable seals providing 7/8-inch (22 mm) operating clearance with an operating range of +9/16-inch (14 mm) to -3/8-inch (9.5 mm). Seals shall operate automatically without tools or cranks and shall extend as panels are positioned. Fixed (non-operating) seals at top or bottom of panels are not acceptable.


A. Suspension Tracks: Minimum 11 gauge, 0.12-inch (3 mm) roll-formed steel track suitable for either direct mounting to a wood header or supported by adjustable steel hanger brackets



supporting the load-bearing surface of the track, connected to structural support by pairs of 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) diameter threaded steel rods.

1. Exposed track soffit: Steel, integral to track, and pre-painted off-white.

B. Carriers: One stainless steel trolley with vinyl roller surfaces per panel (except Pivot Panel).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine flooring, floor levelness, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable glass-panel partitions.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install operable glass-panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed in area of partition installation.

B. Install panels in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings.

C. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable.

D. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable.

E. Light-Leakage Test: Temporarily opacify glass areas of panels. Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints and top and bottom seals for voids. Adjust partitions for alignment and full closure of vertical joints and full closure along top and bottom seals.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operable glass-panel partitions, hardware, and other moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Verify that safety devices are properly functioning.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable glass-panel partitions.



WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 1

SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Horizontal wall guards.

2. Vertical corner guards.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of wall and door protection showing locations and extent.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall-protection unit indicated, in

each color and texture specified.

1. Include Samples of accent strips and accessories to verify color selection.




A. Maintenance Data: For each type of wall and door protection product to include in maintenance

manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.



1. Wall-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of

each type, color, and texture of cover installed, but no fewer than two, 96-inch- (2400-

mm-) long units.

2. Corner-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of

each type, color, and texture of cover installed, but no fewer than two, 48-inch- (1200-

mm-) long units.

3. Mounting and Accessory Components: Amounts proportional to the quantities of extra

materials. Package mounting and accessory components with each extra material.


A. Store wall and door protection in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-

ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C)

during the period plastic materials are stored.

2. Keep plastic materials out of direct sunlight.

3. Store plastic wall- and door-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until

plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C).

a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position.

b. Store wall-guard covers in a horizontal position.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of wall- and door-

protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including detachment of components from each other or from

the substrates, delamination, and permanent deformation beyond normal use.

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, plastics, and other materials beyond normal

use.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain wall- and door-protection products of each type from single source

from single manufacturer.




A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified

testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings

and Facilities and ICC A117.1.

2.3 WALL GUARDS

A. Opaque-Plastic Chair Rail: Standard-duty assembly consisting of continuous snap-on cover

installed over continuous retainer.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

indicted on drawings or comparable product as approved by Architect prior to bidding.

2. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.070-inch (1.8-mm) wall thickness; in

dimensions and profiles indicated on Drawings.

a. Color and Texture: As indicated on drawings or as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range.

3. Retainer: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum.

4. Bumper: Continuous, resilient bumper cushion(s).

5. End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching cover;

field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.

6. Accessories: Concealed splices and mounting hardware.

7. Mounting: Surface mounted directly to wall.

2.4 CORNER GUARDS

A. Surface-Mounted, Plastic-Cover Corner Guards: Manufacturer's standard assembly consisting

of snap-on, resilient plastic cover installed over retainer; including mounting hardware;

fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 150F Flush

Mount Corner Guard by Inpro Architectural Products as indicted on drawings or

comparable product as approved by Architect prior to bidding.

2. Height: Full height.

3. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

4. Continuous Retainer: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, one-piece, extruded

aluminum.

5. Retainer Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-absorbing clips.



2.5 MATERIALS

A. Plastic Materials: Chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant plastic with integral color

throughout; extruded and sheet material as required, thickness as indicated.

B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts,

and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where

exposed to view.

C. Adhesive: As recommended by protection product manufacturer.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate wall and door protection according to requirements indicated for design, performance,

dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.

B. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize

field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.

C. Quality: Fabricate components with uniformly tight seams and joints and with exposed edges

rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other

imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline

joints.

D. Wood Handrails: Miter corners and ends of wood handrails for returns.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances, fire rating, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls to which wall and door protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and

other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of

support fasteners.

1. For wall and door protection attached with adhesive, verify compatibility with and

suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall and door protection.

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Installation Quality: Install wall and door protection according to manufacturer's written

instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips,

cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.

B. Mounting Heights: Install wall and door protection in locations and at mounting heights

indicated on Drawings.

C. Accessories: Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, trim, joint moldings, and other

accessories required for a complete installation.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a

standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent.

B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by

manufacturer.



TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1

SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.



B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify accessories using designations indicated.


A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, visible silver spoilage defects. 2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED CONTRACTOR-INSTALLED (O.F.C.I.) MATERIALS

A. Owner-Furnished Materials: Dispensing toilet accessories; soap, paper towel, and toilet paper dispensers,etc..



2.2 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

A. As indicated on Drawings.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.

C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inch minimum nominal thickness.

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.

E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.



B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.



FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 1

SECTION 104413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire protection cabinets for the following:

a. Portable fire extinguishers.


1. Section 104416 "Fire Extinguishers" for portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers accommodated by fire-protection cabinets.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets.

1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.


A. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows:

1. Sheet: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221.

B. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear).

2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET (FE)

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsen’s

Manufacturing Company; 2409-R2 recessed (7-1/8 inch minimum wall cavity

depth), 2409RA semi-recessed (2-7/8 inch minimum wall cavity depth), and 2409-6R

semi-recessed (4-7/8 inch minimum wall cavity depth), or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Fire End & Croker Corporation. b. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group. c. Moon-American. d. Potter Roemer LLC.

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.

C. Cabinet, Door and Trim Materials: Aluminum sheet.

1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.

D. Recessed Cabinet: Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface, with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

E. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth.

F. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.

G. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).

H. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard.



2. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.

I. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle.

3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."

1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Lettering Color: Red. 3) Orientation: Vertical.

4. Alarm: Manufacturer's standard alarm that actuates when fire protection cabinet door is opened and that is powered by batteries.

J. Finishes:

1. Aluminum: Clear anodic.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 4. Install door locks at factory.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick.

2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.





B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets will be installed.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare recesses for recessed and semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicatedor, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire protection cabinets.

2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.



D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1

SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers.


1. Section 104413 "Fire Protection Cabinets."

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.


FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.




RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 113100 - 1

SECTION 113100 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes Owner-Furnished Contractor Installed (OFCI) appliances indicated on drawings including but not limited to:

1. Undercounter Refrigerators. 2. Undercounter Dishwashers.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring. 2. Section 064116 “Plastic-Laminate-Face Architectural Cabinets for cabinets to received

undercounter appliances.


A. Field Measurements: Confirm and verify dimensions of appliances installed in cabinets and coordinate with cabinet contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation and performance of residential appliances.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before appliance installation.

C. Examine walls, ceilings, and roofs for suitable conditions where overhead exhaust hoods will be installed.

D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.


RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 113100 - 2

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install appliances according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough openings are completely concealed.

C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.


A. Perform the following tests:

1. Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation.



FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 114000 - 1

SECTION 114000 - FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes Owner-Furnished Owner Installed (OFOI) Food Serviced Equipment indicated

on drawings including but not limited to:

1. Full Height Commercial Refrigerators.

2. Full Height Commercial Warmers.

3. Commercial Microwaves.

4. Commercial Dishwashers.

5. Rolling Shelves and Tables.


1. Division 22 to 26 for mechanical, electrical, and plumbing rough-ins required for food

service equipment specified in this section.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with foodservice

equipment by field measurements before fabrication. Indicate measurements on Coordination

Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)


FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 114000 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATING, CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Coordinated adjacent work with owner installed food service equipment.

B. Clean owner food service equipment disturbed by contractor’s work.

C. Protect owner installed food service equipment from damage during remainder of the

construction period.



PROJECTION SCREENS 115213 - 1

SECTION 115213 - PROJECTION SCREENS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electrically operated, front-projection screens and controls. 2. Supplemental framing and supports required above ceilings to support screens from roof

structure. 3. Engineering analysis of screen support systems mounted from roof structure.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for metal support framing for front-projection screens.

2. Division 26 "Electrical" Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for controls and operators.



B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts and types of front-projection screens. Include the following:

1. Drop heights. 2. Location of seams in viewing surfaces. 3. For end-mounted motors, location of screen centerline relative to ends of screen case. 4. Anchorage details, including connection to supporting structure for suspended units. 5. Details of juncture of screen case or trim with adjacent finishes. 6. For electrically operated units, wiring diagrams and location of wiring connections. 7. Accessories.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish and for each color and finish specified, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

D. Delegated Design: Design screen support system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer licensed in the state of Missouri, using seismic design criteria indicated on structural drawings.


A. Maintenance Data: For front-projection screens to include in maintenance manuals.




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install front-projection screens until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Store front-projection screens in manufacturer's protective packaging and according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of front-projection screens with adjacent construction, including ceiling suspension systems, light fixtures, HVAC system components, fire-suppression system, and partitions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Viewing-Surface and Masking Materials:

1. Mildew-Resistance Rating: Zero or 1 when tested in accordance with ASTM G21. 2. Flame Resistance: Passes NFPA 701. 3. Flame-Spread Index: Not greater than 75 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.2 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED, FRONT-PROJECTION SCREENS

A. General: Manufacturer's standard units consisting of case, screen, motor, controls, mounting accessories, and other components necessary for a complete installation. Provide units that are listed and labeled as an assembly by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Controls: Remote, key-operated, three-position control switch installed in recessed device box with flush cover plate.

B. Suspended, Electrically Operated Screen: Unit designed and fabricated for suspended mounting.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Tensioned

Large Advantage Electrol by Da-Lite, or a comparable product.

a. Motor in Roller: Instant-reversing motor of size and capacity recommended in writing by screen manufacturer; with permanently lubricated ball bearings, automatic thermal-overload protection, preset limit switches to automatically stop screen in up and down positions, and positive-stop action to prevent coasting. Mount motor inside roller with vibration isolators to reduce noise transmission.



b. Controls: key-operated, three-position control switches installed in recessed device box with flush cover plate matching other electrical device cover plates in room where switch is installed as shown on electrical drawings.

c. Screen Case: Metal. 1) Ceiling Aperture: Open under screen compartment with closure, hinged to

automatically open when screen is lowered and automatically close when screen is fully raised. a) Provide screen case with trim flange to receive ceiling finish.

2) Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard. d. Matte-White Viewing Surface. e. Tensioning Cable System to prevent warping and ensure even lateral tension. f. Mildew-Resistance Rating: Zero or 1 when tested according to ASTM G21. g. Flame Resistance: Passes NFPA 701. h. Flame-Spread Index: Not greater than 75 when tested according to ASTM E84. i. Seamless Construction: Provide screens, in sizes indicated, without seams. j. Edge Treatment: Black masking borders. k. Size of Viewing Surface: 16 feet by 10 feet nominal.

2.3 METAL SUPPORT ACCESSORIES

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.

C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A786/A786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A36/A36M or ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C or D.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

E. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install front-projection screens at locations indicated to comply with screen manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install front-projection screens with screen cases in position and in relation to adjoining construction indicated. Securely anchor to supporting substrate in a manner that produces a smoothly operating screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing surface flat when screen is lowered.

1. Install low-voltage controls according to NFPA 70 and complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Test electrically operated units to verify that screen controls, limit switches, closures, and other operating components are in optimum functioning condition.



ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 1

SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers. 2. Motor-operated roller shades for skylights (ALTERNATE BID).


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories.

2. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for light-blocking shades with a sealant.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.

1. Motor-Operated Shades: Include details of installation and diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 10 inches (250 mm) long.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of shadeband material.


E. Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade.

1. Shadeband Material: Not less than 10 inches (250 mm) square. Mark interior face of material if applicable.

2. Roller Shade: Full-size operating unit, not less than 16 inches (400 mm) wide by 36 inches (900 mm) long for each type of roller shade indicated.

3. Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 10 inches (250 mm) long.



F. Product Schedule: For roller shades. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.



B. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material.

C. Product Test Reports: For each type of shadeband material, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.


A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer.



2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED VERTICAL SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide R16 Manual

Shade with Fascia by SWF Contract or comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

B. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.

1. Bead Chains: Stainless steel.

a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.

2. Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller shade weight and for lifting heavy roller shades.

C. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.

D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated.

E. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly.

F. Shadebands:

1. Shadeband Material: See drawings or as selected by Architect from full range of options. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.

a. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

G. Installation Accessories:

1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.

a. Shape: L-shaped. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband

assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches (102 mm).

2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. 3. Closure Panel and Wall Clip: Removable aluminum panel designed for installation at

bottom of site-constructed ceiling recess or pocket and for snap-in attachment to wall clip without fasteners.

4. Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of shades as shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides or other means of aligning shadebands with channels at tops.

5. Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at bottoms of shades when shades are closed.

6. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.



2.3 MOTOR-OPERATED, SKYLIGHT ROLLER SHADES (ALTERNATE BID)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Skylight 2

FlexShade by Draper, Inc. or comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

B. Method of Installation: Mount skylight window shade horizontal.

C. Operator Roller: 3-1/2 inch (50 mm) diameter, .1345 inch thick, extruded aluminum. Take up spools for draw cable attached to each end.

D. Fabric Connection: Fabric retainers slide into ¾" pockets at each end of fabric, then fit into roller extrusion and hem bar. Fabric orientation shall always be from the top (back) of roller.

E. Endcaps/Brackets: .236" thick aluminum: 5-13/16" x 5-13/16". Fabric/roller endcaps complete with motor adapter bracket. White powder coat finish. Draw Cable/Guide. Cable brackets provided with pulley assemblies.

F. Fabric Support Stays: Horizontal spring steel stays, .005" thick x 1" wide, are installed at regular intervals and covered. This system enables the shade to withstand reasonable air pressure differentials and gravity. This unit is not designed for fabric to lay perfectly flat. Some fabric sag is to be expected.

G. Guide Cables: 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) 7x19 strand, galvanized, non-coated steel cable with 3/16" copper Nicopress Stop.

H. Draw Cables: 1/16" O.D., 7x7 strand wire rope. Low-stretch, high-fatigue, nylon coated.

I. Operator: Tubular motor concealed inside shade roller tube.

1. Standard Motor: 110-120V AC, single-phase, 60 HZ, instantly reversible, lifetime lubricated, and equipped with internal thermal overload protector, electric brake, and pre-set accessible limit switches.(Compatible with Intelliflex Controls.)

J. Wall Switch for Single Shade Control (Standard): Each motor shall be controlled individually by 110-120V, 15 amp, key switch operated 3-position wall switch, UL and CSA recognized. Switch shall be single-pole, double-throw, maintained or momentary action.

K. Light-Blocking Fabric: Opaque fabric, stain and fade resistant.

1. Source: Roller shade manufacturer. 2. Type: As selected by Architect from full range of options. 3. Roll Width: See Drawings. 4. Orientation on Shadeband: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Features: Washable. 6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.4 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION

A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.

B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F (23 deg C):



1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm) per side or 1/2-inch (13-mm) total, plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm). Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm).

2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings.

C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible, except as follows:

1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material.

2. Skylight Shades: Provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband as required to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion or sag of material.

3. Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll width is less than the required width of shadeband and where indicated. Provide battens and seams as required by railroaded material to produce shadebands with full roll-width panel(s) plus, if required, one partial roll-width panel located at top of shadeband.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, locations of connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Verify field dimensions of skylights prior to fabrication of skylight window shades.

B. Coordinate blocking and structural support requirements of skylight window shades to ensure proper attachment and support.

C. Coordinate requirements and location of power supply, conduit, and wiring required for motorized skylight window shade motors and controls.

D. Coordinate interface and installation of skylight window shades with provision of HVAC system, lighting system, and motorized projection screen.

3.3 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION

A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions.



1. Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 2 inches (51 mm) to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.

B. Electrical Connections: Connect motor-operated roller shades to building electrical system.

C. Vertical Roller Shade Locations: At windows as indicated on drawings.

D. Install skylight window shades at four (4) skylights in Meeting Room 112.

E. Position skylight window shade in alignment with skylight opening. Secure with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.


A. Clean roller shade surfaces, after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain motor-operated roller shades.

B. Test skylight window shades to verify that operating mechanism, controls, limit switches, interface to other building systems, fabric stays, and other operating components are functional. Correct deficiencies.

C. During daylight hours, close skylight window shades and turn off interior lights. Verify that there are no direct light streaks at perimeter or within shade assembly. Correct deficiencies.

D. Demonstrate operation of skylight window shades to Owner's designated representatives.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Clean and protect skylight window shades after installation from damage during construction operations. If damage occurs, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as required to provide units in their original, undamaged condition.



PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 - 1

SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes plastic-laminate countertops, backsplashes and end splashes.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing countertops that are concealed within other construction before countertop installation.

2. Section 064116 “Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets” for countertops installed on cabinets.

3. Section 123661.16 “Solid-Surfacing Countertops” for solid surface countertops, sinks, and aprons.



B. Shop Drawings: For plastic-laminate-clad countertops.

1. Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Detail fabrication and installation, including field joints.

2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic-laminate-clad countertops.

C. Samples: Plastic laminates in each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required in manufacturer's standard size.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.


A. Deliver countertops only after casework and supports on which they will be installed have been completed in installation areas.



B. Store countertops in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.

C. Keep surfaces of countertops covered with protective covering during handling and installation.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the AWI "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of plastic-laminate-clad countertops indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

B. Grade: Custom.

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.

A. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:


B. Edge Treatment: 3-mm PVC edging.

C. Core Material: Particleboard made with exterior glue.

D. Core Thickness: 3/4 inch.

1. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches at front, back, and ends with additional layers of core material laminated to top.

E. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate.

2.2 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of countertop and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.



1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Wire-Management Grommets: Circular, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

1. Outside Diameter: 2 inches. 2. Color: As selected by Architect.

B. Brackets (at countertops not supported on cabinets): 1/8 inch pre-finished steel, with a load limit exceeding 1,000 lbs.

1. Provide brackets at intervals not to exceed 36 inches, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: As selected by fabricator to comply with requirements.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:

B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended, and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment.

C. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately, and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

1. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.



B. Before installing countertops, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.

1. Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately, and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish.

C. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings.

1. Secure field joints in countertops with concealed clamping devices located within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints.

D. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Countertop Installation: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.

1. Install countertops level and true in line. Use concealed shims as required to maintain not more than a 1/8-inch-in-96-inchesvariation from a straight, level plane.

2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive.

3. Seal joints between countertop and backsplash, if any, and joints where countertop and backsplash abut walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer.


A. Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace countertops. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean countertops on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.

C. Protection: Provide Kraft paper or other suitable covering over countertop surfaces, taped to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches o.c. Remove protection at Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 123623.13


SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - 1

SECTION 123661 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-surface-material countertops, backsplashes and integral bowl sinks. 2. Solid-surface-material window sills and trim.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring solid surface window sills and tops.

2. Section 064116 “Plastic-Laminate-Face Architectural Cabinets for cabinets to received solid surface counter tops.

3. Section 113100 “Residential Appliances” for appliances installed in architectural cabinets.


A. Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of material exposed to view.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements before countertop fabrication is complete.

B. Verify dimensions of appliances installed in cabinets.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS

A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:

1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top. 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. 3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash. 4. Steps in countertop: Solid surface countertop step from standard height and ADA height

as indicated on drawings. The thickness of solid surface material and front edge condition shall be maintained vertically at all steps in countertops.

B. Countertops: 1/4-inch- thick, solid surface material laminated to 3/4-inch- thick particleboard with exposed edges built up with 3/4-inch- thick, solid surface material.

C. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch- thick, solid surface material.

D. Integral Sinks: Comply with ISSFA-2 and ANSI Z124.3, Type 5 or Type 6, without a precoated finish. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide BV1512

(with overflow) ADA compliant integral sink by Wilsonart or comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

E. ADA removable sink closure panels: 3/4-inch- thick, solid surface material.

F. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges, backsplashes and integral bowl sinks unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surface-material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly. 2. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop.

G. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints.

H. Cutouts and Holes:

1. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items.

2.2 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.

B. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SS1.

1. Type: Provide Standard Type unless Special Purpose Type is indicated. 2. Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with ISSFA-2 and ANSI Z124.3, Type 5 or Type 6, without a

precoated finish. 3. Manufacturer, Colors, and Patterns: As indicated on Drawings. The product color(s),

finish(es) and/or texture(s), and the manufacturer providing the product indicated are the basis-of-design. The specified color, finish, and/or texture shall be provided without



exception to the Bid Sum or construction schedule. If the manufacturer providing the product is not the basis-of-design, but is otherwise an acceptable comparable product, then the product provided shall match the specified color, finish, and/or texture and the Owner shall not incur additional cost or claims of schedule delays regardless of whether compliance is considered a custom, premium or specialty order.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates to receive solid surface materials, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.

B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

1. Install backsplashes and endsplashes to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

2. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish.
